Home

UCM6510 User Manual - Grandstream Networks

1. cccccccccecceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeceeeseeeeeeeeesseaeeeeessseeeeeeeeas 63 Figure 34 Add LDAP Phonebook esc iccicecedccenzccccvenssadcccsitacndnendiccdnacnsentavendnndvccwdansdveadidadnorntecasnendnedueeneertcnoendadaaes 64 AE ENN PENN 64 PIQUE 36 Import PROMEDOOK vasicdiicesnedecensendscetnnianticneazosdcnsnadstatierdddnedaseaiarsatedentnadseaediawsidiecdanextsedeadsicetmedageotaces 65 Figure 37 Phonebook CSV File FOrmat cccccccssssececcceeeeceeceeeeeeeecsaeeceeesseeseceeesseaeeceeessaeeeessesageeeeseaas 65 Figure 38 LDAP Phonebook After IMpoOrt cccccccccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeesseaeeeesessegeeeeeteas 66 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 11 of 317 Figure 39 Figure 40 Figure 41 Figure 42 Figure 43 Figure 44 Figure 45 Figure 46 Figure 47 Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50 Figure 51 Figure 52 Figure 53 Figure 54 Figure 55 Figure 56 Figure 57 Figure 58 Figure 59 Figure 60 Figure 61 Figure 62 Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65 Figure 66 Figure 67 Figure 68 Figure 69 Figure 70 Figure 71 Figure 72 Figure 73 Figure 74 Figure 75 Figure 76 Figure 77 Figure 78 Figure 79 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM Export Selected LDAP Phonebook ccccccecccceceeseeeeeceaeeeeeeecsaeesceeeeseaeeeeesseaaeeeeessaaeeeeeessaaees 66 LOAF NNN 67 GXP2200 LDAP Phonebook Configuration c
2. Po Available Extensions Selected Extensions Available Extensions Selected Extensions Figure 134 Create New Event List Table 80 Event List Settings Configure the name of this event list for example office event list Please note the URI name cannot be the same as the extension name on the UCM6510 The valid characters are letters digits _ and Select the available extensions listed on the local UCM6510 to be monitored in the event list lf LDAP sync is enabled between the UCM6510 and the peer UCM6510 the remote extensions will be listed under Available Extensions If not manually enter the remote extensions under Special Extensions field Manually enter the remote extensions in the peer register trunk to be monitored in the event list Valid format 5000 5001 9000 Remote extension monitoring works on the UCM6510 via event list BLF among Peer SIP trunks or Register SIP trunks register to each other Therefore please properly configure SIP trunks on the Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 240 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM UCM6510 first before using remote BLF feature Please note the SIP end points need support event list BLF in order to monitor remote extensions When an event list is created on the UCM6510 and remote extensions are added to the list the UCM6510 will send out SIP SUBSCIRBE to the remote UCM6510 to obtain the remote extension status When the SIP end points registers a
3. Destination Channel Destination Number Note Detection will keep the call up for about 1 minute If you have selected Semi auto Detect please pick up the phone only after you are informed Figure 82 UCM6510 PSTN Detection e lf there are two FXO ports connected to PSTN lines use the following settings for auto detection Detect Model Auto Detect Source Channel The source channel to be detected Destination Channel The channel to help detecting For example the second FXO port Destination Number The number to be dialed for detecting This number must be the actual PSTN number for the FXO port used as the destination channel Edit Analog Trunk trunk 1 Detect model Auto Detect Source Channel to be 1 detected Destination Channel Destination Number 1234567 Note Detection will keep the call up for about 1 minute If you have selected Semi auto Detect please pick up the phone only after you are informed Figure 83 UCM6510 PSTN Detection Auto Detect e lf there is only one FXO port connected to PSTN line use the following settings for auto detection Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 141 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Edit Analog Trunk trunk 1 Detect model Semi auto Detect G Source Channel to be 1 7 detected G Destination Number 1234567 Note Detection will keep the call up for about 1 minute If you have selected Semi auto Detect please pick up th
4. e Analog Station Select FXS port to be assigned to the extension By default it s set to None e Once selected analog related settings for this extension will show up in Analog Settings section Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 226 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Create New User SIP G Analog Station SIP Settings NAT Can Reinvite DTMF Mode RFC2833 v i Insecure Enable Keep alive Keep alive Frequency AuthiD Analog Settings Call Waiting D Use as SEND G RX Gain i TX Gain MIN RX Flash 200 i MAX RX Flash G Enable Polarity Reversal Yes v i Echo Cancellation G 3 Way Calling Figure 125 Configure Extension For Fax Machine 7 Goto web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Inbound Routes page 8 Create an inbound route to use the Fax analog trunk Select the created extension for Fax machine in step 4 as the default destination Create New Inbound Rule Trunks AnalogTrunks FAX LINE G DID Pattern GJ Default Destination Extension Time Condition Click to add Time Condition Cancel Save Figure 126 Configure Inbound Rule for Fax Now the Fax configuration is done When there is an incoming Fax calling to the PSTN number for the FXO port it will send the Fax to the Fax machine Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 227 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FOR FAX TO EMAIL
5. rrrnnnrrrrrrrnnnnnrvvrrnnnnnrrvrnnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnssen 259 Internal Options RTP Settings ccccccssssecceccseseeeeeceeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeseeaeceeesseaeeesesseaeeeeesesegeeeeeenas 259 mtema Options STUN MONON avverge kddaend 260 IAX SEN GE 261 IAX Settings Registration rrrrrnnrnnnnnnvrrrnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnsennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnssennnnnnssennnnnnsnssnn 261 IAX Settings Static Defense rrrrrrnnnnnrrrrnnnnnrrvrrnnnnnrevrrnnnnrrennnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsenn 262 FEE NN 263 PLEN 264 SIP Settings Session TIMEM cccccccseecceeccessecceccccsseceeccccsenecessccseneeesccceceeeesscceeseeesscceeeeesssceens 264 SIP Settings TOP and TES cscccdceseacsatienicodstenienseendeedtteniseossdoedaciuiientcoas ondued dewaesieteuseadadeetersadendicoan 265 PLN 266 FELE 267 Announcements Center Settings cccccccssssececcceseeeeeceeeeeeeecseaeeeeesseeaseeeesseeeceeessaaeeeeessaaees 270 Group 11 0 EE EE NE UN 270 BUK ae ENE EE NE TN ENE EE 273 Extension SUS aenn n an E o EE EE EEE EE Eaa EER 275 AO AES ieee E E AE E E E E E E E 276 Interface Status Indicators cccceeccccccesseseeeeceeeeeeeeecaeeseceeesaaueeceeesaaeeeeeessaaseeeeessaaseeeeessanseeees 277 Digital Channel Status NAA DB vever EOE E 280 FS 281 System Status gt General ccccccccccssssececceeeseececceeseeeecceeseceeeseauseeeecssugeeeeesseageeeessseageeeesssaages 282 Syste
6. Create New IVR Name Extension Dial Other Extensions Dial Trunk Permission Welcome Prompt Digit Timeout Response Timeout Response Timeout Prompt Invalid Prompt Response Timeout Repeat Loops Invalid Repeat Loops Language Key Pressing Events Create New Inbound Rule Press 0 Press 1 Press 2 Figure 136 Dial By Name Group In IVR Key Pressing Events Trunks DID Pattern Privilege Level Default Destination Dial Trunk Time Condition Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 IVR1 7000 Internal welcome Prompt 3 10 ivr createtimeout invalid 3 F 3 F Default Dial By Name Extension Conference Rooms SIP Trunks PeerSiPTrunk 000 Internal Dial By Name Click to add Time Condition DialByNameGF1 DialByNameGF1 Figure 137 Dial By Name Group In Inbound Route UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual hl Page 244 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE U Rt 2 Extension Configure the direct dial extension for the Dial By Name group 3 Available Extensions Selected Extensions Select available extensions from the left side to the right side as the directory for the Dial By Name group Only the selected extensions here can be reached by the Dial By Name IVR when dialing into this group The extensions here must have valid first name and last name configured under web GUI gt PBX gt
7. LDAP Name Attributes LDAP Number Attributes LDAP Mail Attributes LDAP Name Filter LDAP Number Filter LDAP Mail Filter LDAP Displaying Name Attributes Max Hits Search Timeout ms LDAP Lookup For Dial LDAP Lookup For Incoming Call GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD 192 168 40 134 369 dc pbx dc com CallerDName AccountNumber CallerDName AccountNumber YoAccountNumber oCallerlDName 50 0 E Enable E Enable Cancel Figure 41 GXP2200 LDAP Phonebook Configuration HTTP SERVER The UCM6510 embedded web server responds to HTTP HTTPS GET POST requests Embedded HTML pages allow the users to configure the PBX through a web browser such as Microsoft IE Mozilla Firefox and Google Chrome By default the PBX can be accessed directly by typing IP address in the PC s web browser e g 192 168 40 50 It will then be automatically redirected to HTTPS using Port 8089 e g https 192 168 40 50 8089 Users could also change the access protocol and port as preferred under web GUI gt Settings gt HTTP Server Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 68 of 317 Redirect From Port 80 Protocol Type Port lt GRANDSTREAM Table 17 HTTP Server Settings Enable or disable redirect from port 80 On the PBX the default access protocol is HTTPS and the default port number is 8089 When this option is enabled the access using HTTP with Port 80
8. PYCCKANA Pycckui Figure 5 UCM6510 web GUI Language SAVE AND APPLY CHANGES Click on Save button after configuring the web GUI options in one page After saving all the changes make sure click on Apply Changes button on the upper right of the web page to submit all the changes If the change requires reboot to take effect a prompted message will pop up for you to reboot the device Apply Changes English Logout Status Settings Maintenance 2014 10 01 21 16 UTC 04 00 Create New User Modify Selected Extensions Delete Selected Extensions Batch Add SIP Extensi Import Extensi Email To User Auto Refresh v Extension Figure 6 UCM6510 web GUI Apply Changes Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 34 of 317 GRANDSTREAM MAKE YOUR FIRST CALL Power up the UCM6510 and your SIP end point phone Connect both devices to the network Then follow the steps below to make your first call 1 Log in the UCM6510 web GUI go to PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions 2 Click on Create New SIP Extension to create a new extension You will need User ID Password and Voicemail Password information to register and use the extension later 3 Register the extension on your phone with the SIP User ID SIP server and SIP Password information The SIP server address is the UCM6510 IP address 4 When your phone is registered with the extension dial 97 to access the voicemail box Enter
9. T h M S k W w aM MMMM MM Figure 3 UCM6510 T1 E1 J1 Crossover Cable Pin out Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 26 of 317 GRANDSTREAM SAFETY COMPLIANCES The UCM6510 series IP PBX complies with FCC CE and various safety standards The UCM6510 power adapter is compliant with the UL standard Use the universal power adapter provided with the UCM6510 package only The manufacturer s warranty does not cover damages to the device caused by unsupported power adapters WARRANTY If the UCM6510 series IP PBX was purchased from a reseller please contact the company where the device was purchased for replacement repair or refund If the device was purchased directly from Grandstream Networks contact our Technical Support Team for a RMA Return Materials Authorization number before the product is returned Grandstream Networks reserves the right to remedy warranty policy without prior notification A Warning Use the power adapter provided with the UCM6510 series IP PBX Do not use a different power adapter as this may damage the device This type of damage is not covered under warranty Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 27 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 28 of 317 GRANDSTREAM GETTING STARTED The UCM6510 provides LCD interface LED indication and web G
10. e Click on to hide the status detail table QUEUES Users could see all the configured call queue status in this section The following figure shows the call queue 6500 being in used Service Level SL 0 0 within Os Calls Completed 0 Calls Abandoned 1 Figure 151 Queue Status The current call status caller ID duration agent status service level calls summary completed abandoned are shown for the call queue The agent status is defined as below Table 99 Agent Status The agent is available idle The agent is ringing The agent is talking busy The agent has been logged out On the UCM6510 Service Level is defined as the percentage of high quality calls over all calls in the call queue where high quality call means calls answered within 10 seconds Other operations are also available in queue status section e Click on Queues the web page will redirect to call queue configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Call Queue e Click on G to refresh the call queue status e Click on to expand the call queue detail e Click on to hide the call queue detail CONFERENCE ROOMS Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 276 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Users could see all the conference room status in this section It shows all the configured conference rooms current users call duration for each user and conferenc
11. CONNECTING THE WORLD ONE KEY DIAL The UCM6510 supports One Key Dial that allows users to call a certain destination by pressing one digit 0 to 9 on the keypad This creates a system wide speed dial access for all the extensions on the UCM6510 To enable One Key Dial on the UCM6510 web GUI go to page PBX gt Call Features gt One Key Dial e Zandstrean Status Settings Maintenance PBX gt gt Call Features gt gt One Key Dial One Key Dial Call Features Press 0 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 1 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 2 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 3 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 4 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 5 Enable Destination Default Destination Figure 131 Configure One Key Dial User should first decide a digit used for One Key Dial and check the option Enable Destination for the digit Then select a dial destination from Default Destination The supported destinations include extension voicemail conference room voicemail group IVR ring group call queue page group fax DISA Dial by Name and external number Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 233 of 317 2 e Frandstrean Call Features Status One Key Dial Press 0 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 1 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 2 Enable Destination Default Destin
12. Codec Preference BATCH ADD IAX EXTENSIONS lt GRANDSTREAM e None Disable Fax e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web UI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 Note If enabled Fax Pass through cannot be used This option controls how the extension can be used on devices within different types of network e Allow All Device in any network can register this extension e Local Subnet Only Only the user in specific subnet can register this extension Up to three subnet addresses can be specified e ASpecific IP Address Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension The default setting is Allow All If enabled users will not need enter the PIN Set required by the outbound rule to make outbound calls The default setting is No Select audio and video codec for the extension The available codecs are PCMU PCMA GSM AAL2 G 726 32 G 722 G 729 G 723 ILBC ADPCM LPC10 H 264 H 263 and H 263p In the selected codec list users can click on UP or DOWN arrow to adjust the order for the codec priority Under Web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions click on Batch Add Extensions gt Batch Add IAX Ext
13. Default value f1 480 50 f2 620 50 c 250 250 Click on Detect to detect the busy tone Polarity Reversal and Current Disconnect by PSTN Before the detecting please make sure there are more than one channel configured and working properly If the detection has busy tone the Tone Country option will be set as Custom The UCM6510 provides PSTN detection function to help users detect the busy tone Polarity Reversal and Current Disconnect by making a call from the PSTN line to another destination The detecting call will be answered and up for about 1 minute Once done the detecting result will show and can be used for the UCM6510 settings 1 Goto UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Analog Trunks page Click to edit the analog trunk created for the FXO port In the dialog window to edit the analog trunk go to Tone Settings section and click on CEED for PSTN Detection Tone Settings G Busy Detection G Congestion Detection G Tone Country G Busy Tone G Congestion Tone i PSTN Detection Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GJ Busy Tone Count Congestion Count United States of America USA T Figure 81 UCM6510 FXO Tone Settings UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 140 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD 4 Click on Detect to start PSTN detection Edit Analog Trunk trunk 1 Detect model Auto Detect Source Channel to be 1 detected
14. Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules inbound rules and etc Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP provider s server of the trunk Configure the SIP transport protocol to be used in this trunk The default setting is All UDP Primary e UDP Only e TCP Only e TLS Only e All UDP Primary UDP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 167 of 317 Keep Original CID Keep Trunk CID NAT Disable This Trunk TEL URI Caller ID CallerID Name Auto Record lt GRANDSTREAM e All TCP Primary TCP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too e All TLS Primary TLS is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too Keep the CID from the inbound call when dialing out this setting will override Keep Trunk CID option Please make sure that the peer PBX at the other side supports to match user entry using username field from authentication line If enabled the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension s CID when the extension has CID configured The default setting is No Turn on this option when the PBX is using public IP and communicating with devices behind NAT If there is one way audio issue usually it s related to NAT configuration or S
15. Other Settings lt GRANDSTREAM ORLO address Configure to enable disable requiring call token If set to Auto it might lock out users who depend on backward compatibility when peer authentication credentials are shared between physical endpoints The default setting is Yes SRTP Fax Mode Strategy Skip Trunk Auth Codec Preference Enable SRTP for the call The default setting is No Select Fax Mode for this user The default setting is None e None Disable Fax e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 This option controls how the extension can be used on devices within different types of network Allow All Device in any network can register this extension Local Subnet Only Only the user in specific subnet can register this extension Up to three subnet addresses can be specified A Specific IP Address Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension The default setting is Allow All If enable All users do not need to enter password when making an outbound call If enable Follow Me the call can dial out via follow me without password
16. CONNE TING THE Ww te eo 1 Connect one end of an RJ 45 Ethernet cable cable type straight through into the WAN port of the UCM6510 connect the other end into the uplink port of an Ethernet switch hub 2 Connect the 12V DC power adapter into the DC 12V power jack 1 on the back of the UCM6510 Insert the main plug of the power adapter into a surge protected power outlet Connect the second power adapter into the DC 12V power jack 2 for failover purpose in case the first one is down 3 Wait for the UCM6510 to boot up The LCD in the front will show its hardware information when the bootup process is done 4 Once the UCM6510 is successfully connected to the network the LED indicator for the WAN port in the front will be in solid green and the LCD shows up the IP address Depending on how the UCM6510 is used users can follow the steps below for optional setup 1 PSTN Line Connection connect PSTN lines from the wall jack to the UCM6510 LINE ports FXO ports 2 Analog Line Connection connect analog lines phone and fax to the PHONE ports FXS ports 3 T1 E1 J1 Line Connection connect one end of the T1 E1 J1 cable provided from the service provider into the T1 E1 J1 port of the UCM6510 connect the other end into the T1 E1 J1 wall jack T1 E1 J1 crossover cable should be used and it s not provided in the UCM6510 package Please see T1 E1 J1 crossover cable pin out in the figure below amp RX RX TX TX K h
17. Current Time Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Figure 44 Set Time Manually UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 72 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Manually setup time will take effect immediately after saving and applying change in the web UI If users would like to reboot the UCM6510 and keep the manually setup time setting please make sure Remote NTP Server Enable DHCP Option 2 and Enable DHCP Option 42 options under Web GUI gt Settings gt Time Settings gt Time Auto Updating page are unchecked or set to empty Otherwise time auto updating settings in this page will take effect after reboot OFFICE TIME On the UCM6510 the system administrator can define office time which can be used to configure time condition for extension call forwarding schedule and inbound rule schedule To configure office time go to Web GUI gt Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Click on Create New Office Time to create an office time status PBX Create New Office Time Start Time End Time Week Sun Y Mon Y Tue Y Wed Y Thu Y Fri Show Advanced Options v Month v Janw Feb v Marv Apr Y Mayv Junv Jul Aug Sept Y Oct v Nov Y Dec Y Al en 123a 29 30 31 Figure 45 Create New Office Time Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 73 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Table 20 Create New Office Time Start Time Configure the start time for office hour End Time Confi
18. G Response Timeout Digit Timeout Allow Hangup Figure 133 Create New DISA Table 78 DISA Settings Name Configure DISA name to identify the DISA Configure the password digit only required for the user to enter before using DISA to dial out Password Note The password has to be at least 4 digits Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 235 of 317 Permission Response Timeout Digit Timeout Allow Hangup gt GRANDSTREAM Configure the permission level for DISA The available permissions are Internal Local National and International from the lowest level to the highest level The default setting is Internal If the user tries to dial outbound calls after dialing into the DISA the UCM6510 will compared the DISA s permission level with the outbound route s privilege level If the DISA s permission level is higher than or equal to the outbound route s privilege level the call will be allowed to go through Configure the maximum amount of time the UCM6510 will wait before hanging up if the user dials an incomplete or invalid number The default setting is 10 seconds Configure the maximum amount of time permitted between digits when the user is typing the extension The default setting is 5 seconds If enabled during an active call users can enter the UCM6510 hangup feature code 0 by default to disconnect the call or hang up directly A new dial tone will be heard shortly for t
19. JE 013 Gare meee eee ene ee EEE ee ee ee ee ee 85 GLOBAL CONFIGURATION s ren E E R E iR EN EEA RENIAS 86 ENG EEE E E EE EE ET 86 GLOBAL ENES 93 MODEL CONFIGURATION wiissachsetcinnanescancennsesnawsdianachauneisanyeddancpncedaqaeidiewectaiiabressarcancnsedtaniviivamdeamanneds 95 MODEL TENNE eee 95 VELDE rte reer re eT eT Ce EEE eee ene er re rere ree 98 DEIGEN Eser 98 CREATE NEW DE VICE SEE EEE EE ee 98 VEDEN 99 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 2 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM SAMPLE APPLICATION scssscssscssesseesseesseesssessnessnecsnccasecasecasseaseeaseeseesseessessneesaessatesanesateeateeeseeasee 106 ETEN Ne 111 CREATE NEW EE 111 CREATE NEW SIP EXTENSION esssesssesssesssesssssssssssssssneesneesneesneesuessusesneesunsennsentenneenneenneesneete 111 FEN NAN 117 CREATE NEW FXS EXTENSION EEE 121 BATCH ADD EXT TENSIONS EEE 126 BATCH ADD SIP EXTENSIONS mrrrrersrersrersressernssrnssenssersserssressressressessensernseenssenssersserssressrenseen 126 BAT CAD IAN EXTEN NN 129 SEARCH AND EDIT BITEN Over 131 EXPORT ENE OE 133 MOTE EG 133 OE EE 134 ALDE TAI ee te csc ec eee eee 137 ANALOG TRUNKS CONFIGURATION csssesssesssessseessessssesnsesneesneesneesneesueesseeesneesneesneesntesntesneennees 137 FEE TN 140 ANALOG HARDWARE CONFIGURATION ssssesseesseesseesseessneecececetecaeeesteeseeestesseteseteseteeatecatenasen 143 DIGITAL TRUNKS vem 147 DIGITAL HARDWARE CONFIGURATION c sseesssesssessssse
20. Music On Hold l the active call on hold Table 40 FXS Extension Configuration Parameters Media Analog Settings Configure to enable disable call waiting feature The default setting is No If configured the key can be used as SNED key after dialing the number on the analog phone The default setting is Yes Call Waiting User as SEND Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of analog FXS port The valid range is 30Db to 6Db The default setting is 0 RX Gain Configure the TX gain for the transmitting channel of analog FXS port The valid range is 30Db to 6Db The default setting is 0 TX Gain Configure the minimum period of time in milliseconds that the hook flash MIN RX Flash must remain unpressed for the PBX to consider the event as a valid flash event The valid range is 30ms to 1000ms The default setting is 200ms Configure the maximum period of time in milliseconds that the hook flash must remain unpressed for the PBX to consider the event as a MAX RX Flash oe valid flash event The minimum period of time is 256ms and it can t be modified The default setting is 1250ms If enabled a polarity reversal will be marked as received when an Outgoing call is answered by the remote party For some countries a Enable Polarity Reversal polarity reversal is used for signaling the disconnection of a phone line and the call will be considered as hangup on a polarity reversal Th
21. Select audio and video codec for the extension The available codecs are PCMU PCMA GSM AAL2 G 726 32 G 722 G 729 G 723 ILBC ADPCM LPC10 H 264 H 263 and H 263p SEARCH AND EDIT EXTENSION All the UCM6510 extensions are listed under web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions with status Extension CallerID Name Technology SIP AX and FXS IP and Port Each extension has a checkbox for users to Modify Selected Extensions or Delete Selected Extensions Also options Edit P Reboot and Delete U are available per extension User can search an extension by specifying the extension number to find an extension quickly Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 131 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNEC TIN amp THE WORLD Manage Extensions OD extension 1003 Show All Extensions Create New Extension Modify Selected Extensions Delete Selected Extensions Batch Add Extensions Import Extensions Email To User Auto Refresh Y View 30 v a Extension amp 1003 SIP 192 168 40 198 5062 Z wW i Total 14 Show 114 Goto First Prev Next Last Figure 75 Manage Extensions e Status Users can see the following icon for each extension to indicate the SIP status Co Green Free Blue Ringing 3 Yellow In Use Grey Unavailable e Edit single extension Click on to start editing the extension parameters e Reboot the user l l l Click on t
22. The following are required for the IVR prompt file to be successfully uploaded and used by the UCM6510 e PCM encoded e 16 bits e 8000Hz mono e In mp3 or wav format or raw ulaw alaw gsm file with ulaw or alaw suffix e File size under 5M Upload IVR Prompt Choose voice prompt to upload Sound file must be PCM encoded 16 bits at 8000Hz mono with mp3 wav format or raw ulaw alaw gsm file with ulaw alaw suffix The file size must be under 5M Choose file to upload ms Upload Figure 104 Upload IVR Prompt E Click on _ to select audio file from local PC and click on t to start uploading Once uploaded the file will appear in the IVR Prompt web page Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 196 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM LANGUAGE SETTINGS FOR VOICE PROMPT The UCM6510 supports multiple languages in web GUI as well as system voice prompt The following languages are currently supported in system voice prompt English United States Arabic Chinese Dutch English United Kingdom French German Greek Hebrew Italian Polish Portuguese Russian Spanish Swedish Turkish English United States and Chinese voice prompts are built in with the UCM6510 already The other languages provided by Grandstream can be downloaded and installed from the UCM6510 web GUI directly Additionally users could customize their own voice prompts package them and upload to the UCM6510 Lang
23. and Announce Callers cannot be enabled at the same time If enabled no authentication will be required when joining the conference call The default setting is Yes If enabled the UCM6510 will play Hold music to the first participant in the conference until another user joins in The default setting is No Select the music on hold class to be played in conference call This option shows up if Play Hold Music For First Caller is enabled Music On Hold class can be set up under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Music On Hold If enabled the invitation from web GUI for a conference bridge with password will skip the authentication for the invited users The default setting is No UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 188 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING 8 Users could dial the conference bridge extension to join the conference If password is required enter the password to join the conference as a normal user or enter the admin password to join the conference as administrator INVITE OTHER PARTIES TO JOIN CONFERENCE When using the UCM6510 conference bridge there are two ways to invite other parties to join the conference e Invite from web GUI For each conference bridge in UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Conference there is an icon 2 for option Invite a participant Click on it and enter the number of the party you would like to invite Then click on Add A call will be sent to this number
24. cccc cece cccccccecececececececuacacuceuececuauscgeauenecuauaeauateneneauauatsusneneavansususnenenanaes 25 CONNECT THE UCM6510 100 cccccccccecececencucccccecersusceceeeuensnsnsueaeateusnsusnenenueusnsnsuetnususususnsesnensnsnens 25 SAFETY COMPLAN OE S add 27 WARRANT T e A a a E r 27 GETTING STARTED uunneunnnennnennnnnnnnsnsnsunnnsunnsusnsnnnnnnnnsunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnmnnnmnnnnn 29 USE THE LOD MENU penn 29 USE THE LEP INDICA TOAS j aa a a Ea E aaa Ea a an are adda nratas 31 USE THE WEB GUI a cece cece ccc cc ccccccccececcccecccececececuauacuceuececuauaesusueneauausesusueneauavaesusuenenuceatsusueneaeansesusnes 32 Vee ss EEE 32 WEB GUI CONFIGURATIONS wicckcseccoccavascdecevasdi cosehadtccaBocaircslsaastecavoedoeecobedbdesDoccneePeenacwcaeacdiccaebecuds 33 WEB GUI LANGUAGES vicroceccvincicncatieduweaciiclnaecteceuiciaiaictn viuectewiesblelwanadisdiieuleddeleieainediecdewicedeblioncalieddeitedtlstdaes 33 SAVE AND APPLY CHANGES cccccccccecececsnccccceccerscsueceatnteusnsuseeaecueusnsnsueaenueusnsustscenusnsnsnsusnennenss 34 MAKE YOUR FIRST CALL 2 cece ccccecccecececccececcccececececuacaceceueceauuseauenecuauaususueneceavaustsneneaeanststsneneneanars 35 SYSTEM SETTINGS uannnannununununnnanananannnnunnnanananananannvnnnunnnnnnnanavannvnunnnnnnne 37 USER MANAGEMENT cccececececececcccccccececececuacaceceuececuauacaustenecuauaesusnenenuatsesusuenenuanausususnennansnsusnss 37 USER PRIVILEGES cccccccccececececccccccceceuecenece
25. gt Time Settings gt Holiday Click on Create New Holiday to create holiday time Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 74 of 317 Name Holiday Memo Month Day Show Advanced Options Week GRANDSTREAM BONNESTING THE WORLD Create New Holiday Name Labor Day Holiday Memo Office closed Month Jan Feb Apr May Jun Jul Aug Y Sept Oct Nov Bes 8 9 10 11 5 6 if Ne 22 23 24 25 29 30 31 Show Advanced Options Figure 47 Create New Holiday Table 21 Create New Holiday Specify the holiday name to identify this holiday Create a note for the holiday Select the month for the holiday Select the day for the holiday Check this option to show advanced options If selected please specify the days as holiday in one week below Select the days as holiday in one week Enter holiday Name and Holiday Memo for the new holiday Then select Month and Day The system administrator can also define days in one week as advanced options Once done click on Save and then Apply Change for the holiday to take effect The holiday will be listed in the web page as the figure shows below Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 75 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD OC English Logout AS Status PBX Maintenance 2014 08 21 21 15 UTC 04 00 Settings gt gt Time Settings gt gt Holiday Holiday Create New Holiday Delete Sel
26. i Create New Backu GUI gt Maintenance gt Backup gt Backup Restore Click on to create a new backup Then the following dialog will show Create New Backup G Choose Backup Files Config File CDR Records Recording Files Fax Files Voice Mail Voice Prompt Files ZeroConfig Storage G Choose Storage Location USB Disk i USB Disk SD Card File Name backup_2015jan Local Warming backing up data files could take long time Figure 179 Create New Backup Choose the files to be included in the backup Choose where to store the backup file USB Disk SD Card or Local Name the backup file Click on Backup to start backup pr m Once the backup is done the list of the backups will be displayed with date and time in the web page Users can download t restore 2 or delete U it from the UCM6510 internal storage or the external device Click on to upload backup file from the local device to UCM6510 The uploaded backup file will also be displayed in the web page and can be used to restore the UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 305 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNES TIN amp THE WORLD Manage Backups Backup Configuration Create New Backup Upload Backup File Regular Backup File If the size of the backup file which you want to restore is less than 10M you can click Upload Backup File button to select a local file upload and restore Otherwise itis necessary to put the file into a SD
27. 2 165 KG Package weight 3 012 KG Dimensions 440mm L x 185mm W x 44mm H Operating 32 113 F 0 45 C Humidity 10 90 non condensing Storage 14 140 F 10 60 C Humidity 10 90 non condensing Mounting Rack mount and Desktop Environmental Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 22 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Additional Features Multi language Support Caller ID Polarity Reversal Wink Call Center Customizable Auto Attendant Maximum Call Capacity Conference Bridges Call Features Compliance Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Spanish French Portuguese German Russian Italian Polish Czech for web GUI Customizable IVR voice prompts for English Chinese British English German Spanish Greek French Italian Dutch Polish Portuguese Russian Swedish Turkish Hebrew and Arabic Bellcore Telcordia ETSI FSK ETSI DTMF SIN 227 BT NTT Japan pending Yes with enable disable option upon call establishment and termination Multiple configurable call queues automatic call distribution ACD based on agent skills availability busy level in queue announcement Up to 5 layers of IVR Interactive Voice Response Up to 2000 registered SIP endpoints up to 200 concurrent calls Up to 8 bridges up to 64 simultaneous conference attendees Call park call forward call transfer DND DISA ring gr
28. 4 6 or even 8 Please note that the higher the number is the more time is needed to hangup the channel However this might lower the probability to get random hanguo Congestion detection is used to detect far end congestion signal The Congestion Detection reg default setting is Yes If Congestion Detection is enabled users can specify the number of Congestion Count l ae congestion tones to wait for The default setting is 2 Select the country for tone settings If Custom is selected users could Tone Country manually configure the values for Busy Tone and Congestion Tone The default setting is United States of America USA Syntax f1 val level f2 val level c on1 off1 on2 off2 on3 off3 Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in ms Frequencies Range 0 4000 Busy Level Range 300 0 Cadence Range 0 16383 Select Tone Country Custom to manually configure Busy Tone value Busy Tone Default value f1 480 50 f2 620 50 c 500 500 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 139 of 317 Congestion Tone PSTN Detection PSTN DETECTION lt GRANDSTREAM Syntax f1 val level f2 val level c on1 off1 on2 off2 on3 off3 Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in ms Frequencies Range 0 4000 Busy Level Range 300 0 Cadence Range 0 16383 Select Tone Country Custom to manually configure Busy Tone value
29. 5300 gt channel SIP 5300 00000002 dstchannel SIP 5301 00000003 lastapp Dial lastdata SIP 5301 60 start 2013 12 03 14 02 23 answer 2013 12 03 14 02 27 end 2013 12 03 14 02 31 duration 8 billsec 4 disposition ANSWERED amaflags DOCUMENTATION uniqueid 1386100943 2 userfield EXT channel ext 5300 dstchannel ext 5301 service s Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 299 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 300 of 317 UPGRADING lt GRANDSTREAM UPGRADING AND MAINTENANCE The UCM6510 can be upgraded to a new firmware version remotely or locally This section describes how to upgrade your UCM6510 via network or local upload UPGRADING VIA NETWORK The UCM6510 can be upgraded via TFTP HTTP HTTPS by configuring the URL IP Address for the TFTP HTTP HTTPS server and selecting a download method Configure a valid URL for TFTP HTTP or HTTPS the server name can be FQDN or IP address Examples of valid URLs firmware grandstream com The upgrading configuration can be accessed via web GUI gt Maintenance gt Upgrade Upgrade Via Firmware Server Path Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Upgrade Firmware Network Upgrade G Upgrade Via HTTP GJ Firmware Server Path fw ipvideotalk com gs GJ Firmware File P
30. 7 Select audio and video codec for the VolP trunk The available codecs are PCMU PCMA GSM AAL2 G 726 32 G 726 G 722 G 729 G 723 ILBC ADPCM H 264 H 263 H 263p Configure the actual domain name where the extension comes from This can be used to override the From Header For example trunk UCM6510 provider com is the From Domain in From Header sip 1234567 trunk UCM6510 provider com UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 165 of 317 From User Send PPI Header Send PAI Header Outbound Proxy Support Outbound Proxy DID Mode DTMF Mode Enable Qualify Qualify Timeout Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM Configure the actual user name of the extension This can be used to override the From Header There are cases where there is a single ID for registration single trunk with multiple DIDs For example 1234567 is the From User in From Header Sip 1234567 trunk UCM6510 provider com If enabled the SIP INVITE message sent to the trunk will contain PPI P Preferred ldentity header The default setting is No Note Send PPI Header and Send PAI Header cannot be enabled at the same time Only one of the two headers is allowed to be contained in the SIP INVITE message If enabled the SIP INVITE message sent to the trunk will contain PAI P Asserted Identity header The default setting is No Note Send PPI Header and Send PAI Header cannot be enabled at the same t
31. After configuring digital hardware go to web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Digital Trunks e Click on Create New Digital Trunk to add a new digital trunk e Click on to configure detailed parameters for the digital trunk e Click on to configure Direct Outward Dialing DOD for the digital Trunk e Click on to delete the digital trunk The digital trunk parameters are listed in the table below Trunk Name Channel Group Hide CallerID Keep Trunk CID Caller ID CallerID Name Auto Record Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 54 Digital Trunk Configuration Parameters Configure trunk name to identify the digital trunk Configure the digital channel group used by the trunk Configure to hide outgoing caller ID The default setting is No If enabled the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension s CID when the extension has CID configured The default setting is No Configure the Caller ID This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls For some providers it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored When making outgoing calls the following rules are used to determine which CallerID will be used if they exist e The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first e If Keep Trunk CID is enabled the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used e lf the above two are missing the Global Outbound CID defin
32. English The warning information next to the P value field indicates that the option matching the P value number exists in the configuration already For P value information of different models please refer to configuration template here http www grandstream com Support tools Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 102 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Edit Customize Device Settings 000B8262B023 Model GRANDSTREAM GXP2140 MAG Address 000B8262B023 IP Address 192 168 40 161 Version Customize Fields Name P1362 add New Field Phone Default Call Settings xt or GY Use as Dial Kev Figure 66 Add P Value in Customize Device Settings e Select multiple devices that need to be modified and then click on 22s S555 dad to batch modify devices If selected devices are of the same model the configuration dialog is like the following figure Configurations in five levels are all available for users to modify Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 103 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Modify Selected Devices GRANDSTREAM GXP 2140 000BS262B023 000B82620024 Advanced 5 Customize Device Settings E Preview Modify Customize Settings Preview prepared for 000882628023 4 Model Templates Localization Language Setting Available y li i Selected Language Maintenance Upgrade and Prowision OP Defauit Model Templ
33. Follow Me option can be found under web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Follow Me To configure follow me 1 Click on Create New Follow Me and then select an extension to be configured with Follow Me Create New Follow Me Please select a extension first G Extension 1000 Figure 129 Create Follow Me 2 Click on Next to continue editing Follow Me configuration Edit Follow Me 1000 G Enable w Music On Hold Class default Follow Me Numbers 1004 for 15 seconds 1002 for 15 seconds 13238680006 for 30 seconds Add Follow Me Number Figure 130 Edit Follow Me Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 231 of 317 5 GRANDSTREAM 3 Click on Add Follow Me Number to add local extensions or external numbers to be called after ringing the extension selected in the first step 4 Once created it will be displayed on the follow me web page list Click on to edit the Follow Me configuration Click on to delete the Follow Me The following table shows the Follow Me configuration parameters Table 76 Follow Me Settings Enable Configure to enable or disable Follow Me for this user If external number is added in the Follow Me please make sure this option Skip Trunk Auth is enabled or the Skip Trunk Auth option of the extension is enabled otherwise the external Follow Me number cannot be reached Configure the Music On Hold class that the caller would hear wh
34. GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Outbound Routes and select Enable Filter on Source Caller ID Both single extensions and extension groups will show up for users to select Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 219 of 317 Edit Outbound Rule usa 1 o Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Calling Rule Name Pattern Password Privilege Level National Enable Filter on Source Caller w ID Available Extensions Extension Groups Extension Group Accounting Dept Extension Group Marketing Dept Extension Group IT Dept Extension Group Sales Dept Extension Group TechSupport Dept Custom Dynamic Route GRANDSTREAM BONNESTING THE WORLD Selected Extensions Extension Groups Figure 120 Select Extension Group in Outbound Route UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 220 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM w o e PICKUP GROUPS The UCM6510 supports pickup group feature which allows users to pick up incoming calls for other extensions if they are in the same pickup group by dialing Pickup Extension feature code by default 8 CONFIGURE PICKUP GROUPS Pickup groups can be configured via web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Pickup Groups e Click on Create New Pickup Group to create a new pickup group e Clickon to edit the pickup group Select extensions from the list on the left side to the right side Create New Pickup Group TechSupport Availabl
35. Immediate Record Trace the recording channels Record Direction Both Record File Mode Separate Start Output Result The file has been deleted or does not exist Figure 190 E amp M Immediate Record Trace SERVICE CHECK Enable Service Check to periodically check UCM6510 Check Cycle is configurable in seconds and the default setting is 60 sec Check Times is the maximum number of failed checks before restart the UCM6510 The default setting is 3 If there is no response from UCM6510 after 3 attempts default to check current status will be stored and UCM6510 will be restarted Service Check GJ Enable Server Check i Check Srde D Check times Figure 191 Service Check Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 314 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD REMOTE ACCESS SSH ACCESS SSH switch now is available via web Ul and LCD User can enable or disable SSH access directly from web UI or LCD screen For web SSH access please log in UCM6510 web interface and go to Maintenance gt Remote Access gt SSH Access By default SSH access is disabled for security concerns It is highly recommend to only enable SSH access for debugging purpose SSH Access G Enbale SSH Access Cancel Save Remote Access Figure 192 SSH Access Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 315 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Fi
36. Indicators Heartbeat LCD Display 128x32 dot matrix graphic LCD with DOWN and OK buttons Reset Switch Yes long press for factory reset and short press for reboot Voice Video Capabilities LEC with NLP Packetized Voice Protocol Unit 128ms tail length carrier grade Line Echo Cancellation Dynamic Jitter Buffer Modem detection and auto switch to G 711 G 711 A law U law G 722 G 723 1 5 3K 6 3K G 726 G 729A B IIbc GSM AAL2 G 726 32 ADPCM T 38 Video Codecs H 264 H 263 H 263 QoS Layer 3 QoS Layer 2 QoS Voice over Packet Capabilities Voice and Fax Codecs Signaling and Control DTMF Methods In Audio RFC2833 and SIP INFO Digital Signaling PRI SS7 MFC R2 E amp M TFTP HTTP HTTPS auto discovery amp auto provisioning of Grandstream IP endpoints via ZeroConfig DHCP Option 66 multicast SIP SUBSCRIBE Mdns eventlist between local and remote trunks TCP UDP IP RTP RTCP ICMP ARP DNS DDNS DHCP NTP TFTP Network Protocols SSH HTTP HTTPS PPPoE SIP RFC3261 STUN SRTP TLS LDAP HDLC HDLC ETH PPP Frame Relay Call Progress Tone Polarity Reversal Hook Flash Timing Loop Current Provisioning Protocol and Plug and Play Disconnect Methods Disconnect Busy Tone Media SRTP TLS HTTPS SSH Fail2ban alert events Whitelist Blacklist strong password based access Advanced Defense control Physical Universal Power Supply Input 100 240VAC 50 60Hz Output DC 12VDC 1 5A Physical Unit Weight
37. Jandstream Status PBX MENING ae Login Timeout Settings G User Login Timeout Cancel Save Login Timeout Settings Figure 52 Login Timeout Settings Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 79 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 80 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM PROVISIONING OVERVIEW Grandstream SIP Devices can be configured via Web interface as well as via configuration file through TFTP HTTP HTTPS download All Grandstream SIP devices support a proprietary binary format configuration file and XML format configuration file The UCM6510 provides a Plug and Play mechanism to auto provision the Grandstream SIP devices in a zero configuration manner by generating XML config file and having the phone to download it within LAN area This allows users to finish the installation with ease and start using the SIP devices in a managed way To provision a phone three steps are involved i e discovery configuration and provisioning This section explains how Zero Config works on the UCM6510 The settings for this feature can be accessed via Web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config CONFIGURATION ARCHITECTURE FOR END POINT DEVICE The end point device configuration in Zero Config is divided into the following three layers with priority from the lowest to the highest e Global This is the lowest layer Users can configur
38. Network Indicator NI should match in nodes otherwise it might cause Network Indicator issues Users can select National National Spare International or International Spare Usually National or International is used The line build out LBO is the distance between the operators and the ee PBX Please use the default value OdB unless the distance is long RX Gain Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of digital port The valid range is from 24dB to 12dB TX Gain Configure the TX Gain for the transmitting channel of digital port The valid Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 155 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE Ww te Rt range Is 24dB to 120dB Codec Select alaw or ulaw If set to default ulaw will be used for T1 J1 Coding Select B8ZS or AMI Indicates the type of the called number The receiving switch may use this Called Nature of Address indicator during translations to apply the number s proper dial plan Users Indicator can select Unknown Subscriber National International or Dynamic Indicates the type of the calling number The receiving switch may use this Calling Nature of Address indicator during translations to apply the number s proper dial plan Users Indicator can select Unknown Subscriber National International or Dynamic D chan Indicates the D channel for control International Prefix National Prefix Configure the prefix in Cal
39. None e None Disable Fax e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 Table 61 IAX Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Provider Name Host Name Keep Trunk CID Disable This Trunk Caller ID Caller ID Name Advanced Settings Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules inbound rules and etc Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP provider s server of the trunk If enabled the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension s CID when the extension has CID configured The default setting is No If selected the trunk will be disabled Configure the Caller ID This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls For some providers it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored When making outgoing calls the following rules are used to determine which CallerID will be used if they exist e The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first e f no CallerID configured for the extension the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used e If the above two are missing
40. Pick Extensions 4000 4999 This refers to the extensions that can be manually picked from end device when being provisioned by the UCM6510 There are two related options in zero config page gt Auto Provision Settings Pick Extension Segment and Enable Pick Extension If Enable Pick Extension under zero config settings is selected the extension list defined in Pick Extension Segment will be sent out to the device after receiving the device s request This Pick Extension Segment should be a subset of the Pick Extensions range here This feature is for the GXP series phones that support selecting extension to be provisioned via phone s LCD UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 258 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE WORLD Auto Provision Extensions 5000 6299 This sets the range for Zero Config Extension Segment which is the extensions can be assigned on the UCM6510 to provision the end device Conference Extensions 6300 6399 Ring Group Extensions 6400 6499 Queue Extensions 6500 6599 Voicemail Group Extensions 6600 6699 IVR Extensions 7000 7100 Fax Extensions 7200 8200 INTERNAL OPTIONS JITTER BUFFER Table 83 Internal Options Jitter Buffer SIP Jitter Buffer Select to enable jitter buffer on the sending side of the SIP channel The default setting is No Enable Jitter Buffer Jitter Buffer Size Max Jitter Buffer Implementation Configure the time in ms to buffer This is the jitter buffer size used i
41. TRUNKS Users could see all the configured trunk status in this section Trunks 192 168 40 140 Unavailable Trunk1 Ports 1 Unmonitored Grandstream Figure 149 Trunk Status Table 97 Trunk Status Display trunk status Status ne e Analog trunk Digital trunk status Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 273 of 317 Trunks Type Username Port Hostname IP 5 GRANDSTREAM Available Busy Unavailable Unknown Error Error Configured Incorrect signaling configuration between the two devices For example both of the devices are configured as CPE or NET e SIP Peer trunk status Unreachable The hostname cannot be reached Unmonitored QUALIFY feature is not turned on to be monitored Reachable The hostname can be reached e SIP Register trunk status Registered Unrecognized Trunk Display trunk name Display trunk Type e Analog e E1 T1 J1 e SIP e AX Display username for this trunk Display Port for analog trunk or Hostname IP for VoIP SIP IAX trunk Other operations are also available in trunk status section e Click on Trunks the web page will redirect to trunk configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Analog Trunks e Click on to refresh the trunk status e Click on to expand the status detail table e Click on to hide the status detail table EXTENSIONS Users could see all the configured e
42. Telnet SSH Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM ZC firmware in the USB storage root directory e Local SD Card Media If selected an SD card needs to be plugged into the UCM6510 and the firmware file must be put under a folder named ZC firmware in the USB storage root directory When URL is selected as firmware source configure upgrade via TFTP HTTP or HTTPS When URL is selected as firmware source configure the firmware upgrading server path When URL is selected as firmware source configure the firmware file prefix If configured only the firmware with the matching encrypted prefix will be downloaded and flashed into the phone if URL is selected as firmware source When URL is selected as firmware source configure the firmware file postfix If configured only the configuration file with the matching encrypted postfix will be downloaded and flashed into the phone If DHCP option 43 or 66 is enabled on the LAN side the TFTP server can be redirected If enabled the end point device will automatically upgrade if a new firmware is detected Users can select automatic upgrading by day by week or by minute e By week Once selected specify the day of the week to check HTTP TFTP server for firmware upgrades or configuration files changes e By day Once selected specify the hour of the day to check the HIT TP TFTP server for firmware upgrades or configuration files changes e By minute Once selected specify the interval
43. The following instructions describe a sample configuration on how to use Fax to Email feature on the UCM6510 1 Connect PSTN line to the UCM6510 FXO port 2 Goto UCM6510 web GUI gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 page Create a new Fax extension Create New Fax Extension Extension Name Fax Gi Email Address Faxtest ucm6510mycompany com Figure 127 Create Fax Extension 3 Go to UCM6510 web GUI gt Basic Call Routes gt Analog Trunks page Create a new analog trunk with FAX Detection set to No 4 Goto UCM6510 web GUI gt Basic Call Routes gt Inbound Routes page Create a new inbound route and set the default destination to the Fax extension Create New Inbound Rule Trunks AnalogTrunks PSTN Gi DID Pattern G Default Destination Fax 5111 Time Condition Click to add Time Condition Figure 128 Inbound Route to Fax Extension 5 Once successfully configured the incoming Fax from external Fax machine to the PSTN line number will be converted to PDF file and sent to the Email address Faxtest ucm6510mycompany com as attachment Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 228 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE RESTRICTED ACCESS Starting from firmware 1 0 1 10 the UCM6510 supports Asterisk Manager Interface AMI with restricted access AMI allows a client program to connect to an Asterisk instance commands or read events over a TCP IP stream Its particularl
44. Time Condition for Skip Trunk If Skip Trunk Auth is set to By Time select a time condition during Auth which users can skip entering password when making outbound calls Dial Trunk Password Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk Table 42 FXS Extension Configuration Parameters Specific Time Specific Time Time Condition Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension BATCH ADD EXTENSIONS BATCH ADD SIP EXTENSIONS In order to add multiple SIP extensions BATCH add can be used to create standardized SIP extension accounts However unique extension user name can t be set using BATCH add Under web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions click on Batch Add Extensions gt Batch Add SIP Extensions Table 43 Batch Add SIP Extension Parameters Configure the starting extension number of the batch of extensions to be added Start Extension Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 126 of 317 Create Number Permission Enable Voicemail SIP IAX Password Voicemail Password Ring Timeout Auto Record Skip Voicemail Password Verification Music On Hold Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM Specify the number of extensions to be added The default setting is 5 Assign permission level to the user The available permissions are Internal Local National and International from the lowest
45. UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 152 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE Ww te eo Accept On Offer By default it s enabled In most of cases this option should be enabled If enabled the callee side will request the caller to send caller category before sending caller number Skip Category Note Get ANI First and Skip Category cannot be enabled at the same time Whether or not report to the other end accept call with charge This Charge Calls setting has no effect with most telecos The default setting is enabled recommended Click on Custom Options button on the right top of the configuration Custom Options dialog and then user can customize desired tone and timer options accordingly Table 51 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters T1 J1 PRI NET PRI CPE Basic Settings All E1 T1 J1 spans generate a clock signal on their transmit side The parameter determines whether the clock signal from the far end of the E1 T1 J1 is used as the master source of clock timing If the far end is used as the master the PBX system clock will synchronize to it ek e Master The port will never be used as a source of timing This is appropriate when you know the far end should always be a slave to you e Slave The equipment at the far end of the E1 T1 J1 link is the preferred source of the master clock LBO The line build out LBO is the distance between the operators and the PBX Please use the default value 0dB unless th
46. Users cannot add or delete contacts directly The contacts information will need to be modified via web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions first The default LDAP phonebook will then be updated automatically e Add new phonebook A new sibling phonebook of the default PBX phonebook can be added by clicking on Add under LDAP Phonebook section Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 63 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Add Phonebook Gi Phonebook Prefix i Phonebook DN Cancel Save Figure 34 Add LDAP Phonebook Configure the Phonebook Prefix first The Phonebook DN will be automatically filled in For example if configuring Phonebook Prefix as people the Phonebook DN will be filled with ou people dc pbx dc com Once added users can select toedit the phonebook attributes and contact list see figure below or select LDAP Attributes AccountName CallerIDName Email FirstName LastName Department MobileNumber HomeNumber Fax Figure 35 Edit LDAP Phonebook e Import phonebook from your computer to LDAP server Click on Import Phonebook and a dialog will prompt as shown in the figure below Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 64 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD import Phonebook Import Options Please use UTF 8 encoding
47. a parked call is not retrieved after the timeout the original extension who parks the call will be called back Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 255 of 317 GRANDSTREAM L ENABLE SPY If Enable Spy option is enabled feature codes for Listen Spy Whisper Spy and Barge Spy are available for users to dial from any extension to perform the corresponding actions Assume a Call is on going between extension A and extension B user could dial the feature code from extension C to listen on their call 54 by default whisper to one side 55 by default or barge into the call 56 by default Then the user will be asked to enter the number to call which should be either side of the active call extension Aor B in this example A Warning Enable Spy allows any user to listen to any call by dialing feature codes This may result in the leakage of user privacy Please be aware of the associated potential security risk when enabling this feature Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 256 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD INTERNAL OPTIONS This section describes internal options that haven t been mentioned in previous sections yet The settings in this section can be applied globally to the UCM6510 including general configurations jitter buffer RTP settings hardware config and STUN monitor The options can be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options I
48. and their descriptions from internal internal extension makes outbound calls ext did XXXXX inbound calls It starts with ext did and XXXXX content varies case by case which also relate to the order when the trunk is created ext local internal calls between local extensions e Source Channel Dest Channel Sample 1 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 291 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L DAHDI means it is an analog call FXO or FXS For UCM6510 DAHDI 1 2 are FXO ports and DAHDI 3 4 are FXS ports For UCM6510 DAHDI 1 4 are FXO ports and DAHDI 5 6 are FXS ports For UCM6510 DAHDI 1 8 are FXO ports and DAHDI 9 10 are FXS ports For UCM6510 DAHDI 1 16 are FXO ports and DAHDI 17 18 are FXS ports Sample 2 call from callto context start time answer time end time call time talk time source channel dest channel status 609 619 from internal 1 30 2014 14 31 1 30 2014 14 32 1 30 2014 14 32 9 3 SIP 609 00000150 SIP 619 00000151 ANSWERED Figure 172 Downloaded CDR File Sample Source Channel and Dest Channel 2 SIP means it s a SIP call There are three possible format a SIP NUM XXXXXX where NUM is the local SIP extension number The last XXXXX is a random string and can be ignored c SIP trunk_X NUM where trunk_X is the internal trunk name and NUM is the number to dial out through the trunk c SIP trunk X XXXXXX where trunk X is the internal trunk name and it i
49. by default DHCP Option 66 is turned on it will send out a DHCP DISCOVER request The UCM6510 receives it and returns DHCP OFFER with the config server path URL in the Option 66 for example https 192 168 2 1 8089 zccgi The phone will then use the path to download the config file generated in the UCM6510 To start the auto provisioning process under Web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Zero Config Settings fill in the auto provision information Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 83 of 317 PBX gt gt Zero Config gt gt Zero Config Settings Zero Config Settings Enable Zero Config Enable Automatic Configuration Assignment Extension Assignment GRANDSTREAM NNECTIN Pa w Auto provision automatically provides an extension to the device There are three methods of auto provision SIP SUBSCRIBE DHCP Option 66 and mDNS or example when the device boots up it will send SIP SUBSCRIBE multicast in the LAN The PBX will find it create an account and return a URL of the config file for the device to G Automatically Assign Extension Zero Config Extension 5000 6299 Zero Config Extension Segment Segment Enable Pick Extension Pick Extension Segment 4000 4999 Pick Extension Seqment Pick Extension Period hour Enable Zero Config Enable Automatic Configuration Assignment Automatically Assign Extension Zero Config Extension Segment Firmware Version 1 0
50. by either device Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension The default setting is disabled The recording files will be saved in external storage if plugged in and can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files When user dials voicemail code the password verification IVR is skipped If enabled this would allow one button voicemail access By default this option is disabled Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extensions when putting them on hold UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 127 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE WORLD If enabled the batch added extensions will be added to LDAP Phonebook Enable LDAP PBX list if disabled the batch added extensions will be skipped when creating LDAP Phonebook Use NAT when the PBX is on a public IP communicating with devices hidden behind NAT e g broadband router If there is one way audio issue usually it s related to NAT configuration or Firewall s support of SIP NAT and RTP ports The default setting is enabled By default the PBX will route the media steams from SIP endpoints through itself If enabled the PBX will attempt to negotiate with the Can Reinvite endpoints to route the media stream directly It is not always possible for the PBX to negotiate endpoint to endpoint media routing The default setting is No Select DTMF mode for the user to send DIMF The default setting is RFC2833 If Info is selected SIP
51. caller can confirm and dial out if it s the destination party or press to listen to the next matching result if it s not the desired party to call By Menu After the caller enters the digits the IVR will announce 8 matching results The caller can press number 1 to 8 to select and call or press 9 for results in next page Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 245 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 246 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD ACTIVE CALLS AND MONITOR The active calls on the UCM6510 are displayed in web Ul gt Status gt Active Calls page Users can monitor call status hang up active call s as well as barge in active call s in real time manner ACTIVE CALLS STATUS To view the status of active calls navigate to web GUI gt Status gt Active Calls The following figure shows extension 1000 is calling 1001 1001 is ringing PBX settings Maintenance 2014 11 21 14 48 UTC 05 00 Active Calls 00 00 05 00 00 05 ep fe V eg ee Q am 1000 1001 1000 John Doe Jane Doe John Doe Figure 139 Status gt PBX Status gt Active Calls Ringing The following figure shows the call between 1000 and 1001 is established Active Calls 00 00 10 amp gt 1000 1001 John Doe Jane Doe Total 4 Show 4 Go o R Figure 140 Status gt PBX Status gt Active Calls Call Establis
52. copy files completely G Recording Files wf Conference D Gi Queue o Figure 51 Recording Storage Category On the UCM6510 recording files are generated and exist in 3 categories normal call recording files conference recording files and call queue recording files Therefore users have the following options when select the categories to copy the files to the external device Recording Files Copy the normal recording files to the external device Conference Copy the conference recording files to the external device Queue Copy the call queue recording files to the external device Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 78 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD All Copy all recording files to the external device LOGIN TIMEOUT SETTINGS After the user logs in the UCM6510 web UI the user will be automatically logged out after certain timeout This timeout value can be specified under UCM6510 web GUI gt Settings gt Login Timeout Settings page The User Login Timeout value is in minute and the default setting is 10 minutes If the user doesn t make any operation on web UI within the timeout the user will be logged out automatically After that the web UI will be redirected to the login page and the user will need to enter username and password to log in If set to 0 there is no timeout for the web Ul login session and the user will not be automatically logged out e
53. displayed in web Ul Users can also view the sending history is in the same web page PBX gt gt Value added Features gt gt Fax Sending Fax Sending G External Fax Number 16263631066 Fax File File Send Progress External Fax Number Show All Fax Files Date testFax pdf 2015 02 03 15 08 57 UTC 08 00 admin 16263631066 Send Successfully Figure 143 Fax Sending in Web Ul ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER UCM6510 supports Announcements Center feature starting from firmware version 1 0 2 7 Announcements Center allows users to previously record and store voice message into UCM6510 with a specified code The users can also create group with specified extensions When the code and the group number are dialed together in the combination of code group number the specified voice message is sent to all group members and only extensions in the group will hear the voice message Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 269 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNEC TIN THE WORLD Status Settings Maintenance 2015 08 04 17 25 UTC 04 00 The current password security degree is low please go to the Change Password page to 2 modify the password and bind Email English admin v e Aandstream vatre PBX gt gt Value added Features gt gt Annoucements Center gt Annoucements Center Create New Annoucements Center Group Value added Features Figure 144 Announcements Center ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER SETT
54. enter the option name key word the option that contains the key word will be listed User could then select the option and click on Add Option to add it into the model template Once added the option will be shown in the list below On the left side of each option users can click on to remove this option from the model template On the right side of each option users can click on to reset the option to the default value Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 96 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Edit Template 3275temp Model Template Name 3275temp Description Default Model Template Active Customize Fields Name Value P1362 en OG add New Field Figure 60 Edit Model Template User could also click on Add New Field to add a P value number and the value to the configuration The following figure shows setting P value P1362 to en which means the display language on the LCD is set to English For P value information of different models please refer to configuration template here http www grandstream com Support tools e Click on Save when done The model template will be displayed on web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Model Templates page le e Click on to delete the model template or click on Delete Selected Templates to delete multiple selected templates at once e Click on Toggle Selected Template s to toggle the status
55. for all inbound routes Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 181 of 317 GRANDSTREAM e Click on to edit the inbound route e Click on to delete the inbound route INBOUND RULE CONFIGURATIONS Trunks DID Pattern Privilege Level Default Destination Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 64 Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters Select the trunk to configure the inbound rule All patterns are prefixed with the _ Special characters X Any Digit from 0 9 Z Any Digit from 1 9 N Any Digit from 2 9 Wildcard Match one or more characters I Wildcard Match zero or more characters immediately Example 12345 9 Any digit from 1 to 9 The pattern can be composed of two parts divided by a f character The first part is used to specify the dialed number the second part is used to specify the caller ID and it is optional if set it means only the extension with the specific caller ID is allowed to call in or call out For example patter 2XXX 1234 means the only extension with the caller ID 1234 is allowed to use this rule Select privilege level for the inbound rule when a VoIP trunk is selected in Trunks field Internal The lowest level required All users can use this rule Local Users with Local National or International level are allowed to use this rule National Users with National or International level are allowed to use this rule International The high
56. gt Recording Files Advanced Settings Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 168 of 317 Codec Preference DID Mode DTMF Mode Enable Qualify Qualify Timeout Qualify Frequency Maximum Number of Call Lines Fax Mode SRTP Sync LDAP Enable Sync LDAP Password Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM Select audio and video codec for the VoIP trunk The available codecs are PCMU PCMA GSM AAL2 G 726 32 G 726 G 722 G 729 G 723 ILBC ADPCM H 264 H 263 H 263p Configure where to get the destination ID of an incoming SIP call from SIP Request line or To header The default is set to Request line Configure the default DTMF mode when sending DTMF on this trunk e Default The global setting of DIMF mode will be used The global setting for DTMF Mode setting is under web Ul gt PBX gt SIP Settings gt ToS e RFC2833 Send DTMF using RFC2833 e Info Send DTMF using SIP INFO message e Inband Send DTMF using inband audio This requires 64 bit codec i e PCMU and PCMA e Auto Send DTMF using RFC2833 if offered Otherwise inband will be used If enabled the UCM6510 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online The default setting is No When Enable Qualify option is set to Yes configure the timeout in ms for the Qualify SIP message If no response is received within the timeout the device is considered offline The defaul
57. hour s day s to configure the cycle 3 Memory Usage Alert Settings Memory Usage G Detect Cycle second s Alert Threshold Figure 159 System Events gt Alert Events Lists Memory Usage e Detect Cycle The UCM6510 will perform the memory usage detection based on this cycle Users can enter the number and then select second s minute s hour s day s to configure the cycle e Alert Threshold If the detected value exceeds the threshold in percentage the UCM6510 system will send the alert 4 System Reboot Alert Settings System Reboot G Detect Cycle minute s Cancel Save Figure 160 System Events gt Alert Events Lists System Reboot e Detect Cycle The UCM6510 will check the system reboot based on this cycle Users can enter the number and then select second s minute s hour s day s to configure the cycle 5 System Update Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 285 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING TREGE Wer Oo Alert Settings System Update F G Detect Cycle minute s Figure 161 System Events gt Alert Events Lists System Update e Detect Cycle The UCM6510 will check the system update based on this cycle Users can enter the number and then select second s minute s hour s day s to configure the cycle 6 System Crash Alert Settings System Crash G Detect Cycle 10 minute s Cancel Save Figure 162 System Events gt Alert Event
58. idle status before starting the detection During the detection source channel will be used as caller and send the call to the configured Destination Number Users will then need follow the prompts in web GUI to help finish the detection Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 142 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM The default setting is Auto Detect Source Channel Select the channel to be detected Destination Channel Select the channel to help detect when Auto Detect is used Destination Number Configure the number to be called to help the detection e The PSTN detection process will keep the call up for about 1 minute e lf Semi auto Detect is used please pick up the call only after informed from the web GUI prompt Once the detection is successful the detected parameters Busy Tone Polarity Reversal and Current Disconnect by PSTN will be filled into the corresponding fields in the analog trunk configuration ANALOG HARDWARE CONFIGURATION The analog hardware FXS port and FXO port on the UCM6510 can be configured under web GUI gt PBX gt Ports Config gt Analog Hardware Click on to edit signaling preference for FXS port or configure ACIM settings for FXO port Select Loop Start or Kewl Start for each FXS port And then click on Update to save the change Edit Analog Ports Signalling Preference Port1 Loop Start Port2 Kewl Start Figure 8
59. level to the highest level The default setting is Internal Note Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule s privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule If the outbound rule privilege is disabled this option will not take effect Enable Voicemail for the user The default setting is Yes Configure the SIP IAX password for the users Two options are available to create password for the batch of extensions e User Random Password A random secure password will be automatically generated It is recommended to use this password for security purpose e Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch Configure Voicemail password digits only for the users e User Random Password A random password in digits will be automatically generated It is recommended to use this password for security purpose e Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail voicemail is enabled or hang up voicemail is disabled If not specified the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6510 which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting under web GUI gt Internal Options General Preference The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds Note If the end point also has a ring timeout configured the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set
60. minute Max Message Time e 2minutes e 5 minutes e 15 minutes e 30 minutes e Unlimited Configure the minimum effective duration in seconds of a voicemail message Messages will be automatically deleted if the duration is shorter than the Min Effective Message Time The default setting is 3 seconds The available options are e No minimum e 1 second Min Effective Message Time e 2 seconds e 3 seconds e 4 seconds e 5 seconds Note Silence and noise duration are not counted in message time Announce Message Caller ID If enabled the caller ID of the user who has left the message will be Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 201 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM announced at the beginning of the voicemail message The default setting is No Announce Message Duration If enabled the message duration will be announced at the beginning of the voicemail message The default setting is No If enabled a brief introduction received time received from and etc of Play Envelope each message will be played when accessed from the voicemail application The default setting is Yes Play from Last If enabled UCM6510 will play from the voice message left most recently if disabled UCM6510 will play from the earliest left voice message Allow User Review If enabled users can review the message following the IVR before sending the message out The default setting is No ACCESS VOICEMAIL If
61. of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 192 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING TE Wo eto IVR CONFIGURE IVR IVR configurations can be accessed under the UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt IVR Users could create edit view and delete an IVR e Click on Create New IVR to add a new IVR e Click on to edit the IVR configuration e Clickon ll to delete the IVR Table 67 IVR Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Name Configure the name of the IVR Letters digits and are allowed Extension Enter the extension number for users to access the IVR pare If Paneo all callers to the IVR can dial other extensions The default setting is No If enabled all callers to the IVR is allowed to use trunk The permission Dial Trunk must be configured for the users to use the trunk first The default setting is No Assign permission level for outbound calls if Dial Trunk is enabled The available permissions are Internal Local National and International from the lowest level to the highest level The default setting is Internal If the user tries to dial outbound calls after dialing into the IVR the UCM6510 will compared the IVR s permission level with the outbound route s privilege level If the IVR s permission level is higher Permission than or equal to the outbound route s privileg
62. of Ring Group with peer extensions is presented in the following 1 Creating SIP Peer Trunk between both UCM6510_A and UCM6510 B SIP Trunk can be found under web Ul gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt VoIP Trunks Also please configure their Inbound Outbound routes accordingly mr 2 Click edit button in the menu od eA il and check if Sync LDAP Enable is selected this option will allow UCM6510_A update remote LDAP server automatically from peer UCM6510 B In addition Sync LDAP Password must match for UCM6510_A and UCM6510 B in order to sync LDAP contact automatically Port number can be anything between 0 65535 and use the outbound rule created in step 1 for the LDAP Outbound Rule option Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 209 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Edit SIP Trunk Test Ringgroup Basic Settings Advanced Settings Codec Preference Available Codecs Selected Codecs iLBC PCMU G 122 PEMA AAL2 G 726 32 GSM ADPCM G 726 il G773 G 779 DID Mode Request line DTMF Mode Default Enable Qualify Qualify Timeout Qualify Frequency The maximum number of call lines Fax Mode SRITP Sync LDAP Enable yf Sync LDAP Password admini Sync LDAP Port 36789 LDAP Outbound Rule Test_Ringgroup LDAP Dialed Prefix Oo O10 00010909 00000080 LDAP Last Sync Date 2015 03 23715 14 54 0700 Figure 112 Sync LDAP Server option 3 Incase if LDAP server doesn t
63. of the page click on Delete All button to remove all the call report information e Play Download Delete Recording File per entry If the entry has audio recording file for the call the three icons on the most right column will be activated for users to select In the following picture the second entry has audio recording file for the call Click on to play the recording file click on to download the recording file in wav format click 2013 07 03 18 27 47 0 00 16 0 00 14 2013 07 03 17 55 04 0 00 18 0 00 16 Figure 168 Call Report Entry with Audio Recording File e Automatic Download CDR Records User could configure the UCM6510 to automatically download the CDR records and send the records to an Email address Click on Automatic Download Settings and configure the parameters in the dialog below Automatic Download Settings Automatically send the CDR records to configured email at a certain period lf you want to upload the CDR records to FTP TFITP server please go to the Data Syne page to configure Enable i Automatic Download Period Email Figure 169 Automatic Download Settings Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 290 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD To receive CDR record automatically from Email check Enable and select a time period By Day By Week or By Month for the automatic download period Make sure you have entered an E
64. or PRI e Supports up to 2000 SIP endpoint registrations up to 200 concurrent calls up to 100 SRTP encrypted concurrent calls and up to 64 conference attendees e Flexible dial plan call routing site peering call recording manual and automatic per SIP call and SIP trunk central control panel for endpoints integrated NTP server and integrated LDAP contact directory e Automated detection and provisioning of IP phones video phones ATAs gateways SIP cameras and other endpoints for easy deployment e Strongest possible security protection using SRIP TLS and HTTPS with hardware encryption accelerator e Redundant power supply advanced support for Hot Standby Clustering and High Availability to minimize system down time pending e Automatic export of previous day s data periodically cleans up user data TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table 1 Technical Specifications Analog Telephone FXS Ports 2 RJ11 ports both with lifeline capability in case of power outage PSTN Line FXO Ports 2 RJ11 ports both with lifeline capability in case of power outage T1 E1 J1 Interface 1 RJ45 port Dual Gigabit ports switched or routed with PoE Network Interfaces A 3 Gigabit port for Hot Standby Clustering NAT Router Yes user configurable Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 21 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Peripheral Ports USB SD Power PoE USB SD T1 E1 J1 FXS FXO LAN WAN Cluster LED
65. or USB card then insert the SD or USB card into UCM and refresh the page to select the backup file to be restored List of Previous Configuration Backups The files saved in the local disk View 10 backup_2015feb04_120144 tar 2015 02 04 15 01 54 UTC 05 00 4 61MB 9 g Total 4 Show 1 1 coto CES Regular Backup Log Clean Figure 180 Backup Restore Regular Backup File option allows UCM6510 to perform automatically backup on the user specified time Regular backup file can only be stored in USB SD card SFTP server User is allowed to set backup time from 0 23 and how frequent the backup will be performed Regular Backup File GJ Enable Regular Backup File w G Choose Backup Files Config File CDR Records Recording Files FaxFiles Voice Mail Voice Prompt Files eroConfig Storage Gi Choose Storage Location USB Disk G Backup Time 16 G Regular Backup File Interval Cancel Save Figure 181 Local Backup DATA SYNC Besides local backup users could backup the voice records voice mails CDR FAX in a daily basis to a remote server via SFTP protocol automatically under web GUI gt Maintenance gt Backup gt Data Sync Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 306 of 317 GRANDSTREAM NNECTING ORLD Manage Data Sync Sync your voice recordsNoicemails CDR Fax every day via SFTP protocol automatically Enable Backup Account Password Server Ad
66. override the configurations for the same options fields in the lower layer when presented at the same time After understanding the Zero Config configuration architecture users could configure the available options for end point devices to be provisioned by the UCM6510 by going through the three layers This configuration architecture allows users to set up and manage the Grandstream end point devices in the same LAN area in a centralized way AUTO PROVISIONING SETTINGS By default the Zero Config feature is enabled on the UCM6510 for auto provisioning Two methods of auto provisioning are used Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 82 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD UCM6510 SIP End Device Boot up Discover Device os Assign Extension to Device Create XML Config File Download Config File Send Downloading URL to Device Reboot Get Provisioned Figure 54 UCM6510 Zero Config e SIP SUBSCRIBE When the phone boots up it sends out SUBSCRIBE to a multicast IP address in the LAN The UCM6510 discovers it and then sends a NOTIFY with the XML config file URL in the message body The phone will then use the path to download the config file generated in the UCM6510 and take the new configuration e DHCP OPTION 66 This method should be used only when the UCM6510 is set to Route mode under web GUI gt Settings gt Network Settings gt Basic Settings Method When the phone restarts
67. packet loss round trip min avg max 13 900 14 566 19 300 ms Done Figure 187 PING TRACEROUTE Enter the target host in host name or IP address Then press Start button The output result will dynamically display in the window below Traceroute G Target Host www google com Start Output Result traceroute Dignostic run traceroute to www google com 74 125 224 179 m o T ae 61 61 csw3 LosAngeles1 Level3 net 4 69 137 10 14 700 ms 33 675 ms 14 675 ms 6 ae 1 60_edge1_LosAngeles9 Level3 net 4 69 144 10 14 000 ms ae 4 90 edget LosAngeles9 Level3 net 4 69 144 202 17 900 ms 11 725 ms 9 GOOGLE NC edgel LosAngeles9 Level3 net 4 53 225 6 20 625 ms 21 550 ms 14 600 ms 10 64 233 174 238 64 233 174 238 13 325 ms 19 450 ms 13 900 ms 11 72 14 236 11 72 14 236 11 15 675 ms 15 025 ms 15 275 ms 12 lax02s501 inf19 te100 net 74 125 224 179 13 775 ms 11 925 ms Done Figure 188 Traceroute Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 312 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD PRI SS7 MFC R2 SIGNALING TRACE Please see section DIGITAL TRUNK TROUBLESHOOTING ANALOG RECORD TRACE Analog record trace can be used to troubleshoot analog trunk issue for example the UCM6510 user has caller ID issue for incoming call from Analog trunk Users can access analog record trance under web GUI gt Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt Analog Record Trace Here is the step to capture trace
68. pick up the call on the first trunk here SLA Station Options Configure the time in seconds to ring the station before the call is Ring Timeout l l i l considered unanswered No timeout is set by default If set to 0 there will Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 175 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM R be no timeout Configure the time in seconds for delay before ringing the station when a Ring Delay call first coming in on the shared line No delay is set by default If set to 0 there will be no delay This option defines the competence of the hold action for one particular trunk If set to open any station could hold a call on that trunk or resume Hold Access l l l one held session if set to private only the station that places the trunk call on hold could resume the session The default setting is open SAMPLE CONFIGURATION 1 On the UCM6510 go to web Ul gt Basic Call Routes gt Analog Trunks page Create analog trunk or edit the existing analog trunk Make sure SLA Mode is enabled for the analog trunk Once enabled this analog trunk will be only available for the SLA stations created under web Ul gt Basic Call Routes gt SLA Station page Create New Analog Trunk Channels Trunk Name SLA Mode Barge Allowed Hold Access Figure 94 Enable SLA Mode for Analog Trunk Click on Save The analog trunk will be listed with trunk mode SLA Tru
69. report CDR with the matching caller name will be filtered out Enter the callee number to filter the CDR report CDR with the matching callee number will be filtered out Specify the start time to filter the CDR report Click on the calendar icon on the right and the calendar will show for users to select the exact date and time Specify the end time to filter the CDR report Click on the calendar icon on the right and the calendar will show for users to select the exact date and time The call report will display as the following figure shows 2014 12 12 13 58 33 2014 12 12 13 58 28 2014 12 12 13 57 51 2014 12 12 13 57 45 2014 12 12 13 57 35 2014 12 12 13 57 25 2014 12 11 20 38 51 2014 12 11 20 38 47 2014 12 11 18 52 56 2014 12 11 18 52 26 Recording File Options Status Tota 20 Show 12 Goto ER Next Last Figure 167 Call Report Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 289 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Users could perform the following operations on the call report e Sort Click on the header of the column to sort by this category For example clicking on Start Time will sort the report according to start time Clicking on Start Time again will reverse the order e Download Records Download All Records Click on BS to download the records filtered out or to download all records e Delete All On the bottom
70. ringing The default setting is 30 seconds Note The actual ring timeout might be overridden by users if the phone has ring timeout settings as well Once this option is enabled the calls using this extension or trunk will be automatically recorded If enabled users could select extension voicemail ring group IVR call queue voicemail group as the destination if the call to the ring group has no answer Secret and Email address are required if voicemail is selected as the destination Configure the password to access the ring group extension s voicemail Note The password has to be at least 4 characters Configure the Email address of the ring group extension s voicemail If Attach Recordings to E mail is enabled from web GUI gt PBX gt Voicemail gt Voicemail Email Settings the voicemail can be sent to the ring group s Email address as attachment UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 208 of 317 GRANDSTREAM THE WORLD Edit Ring Group 6400 Ring Group Name Shipping Extension 6400 Available Extensions Ring Group Members 656 657 658 659 660 AA1 Ring Group Options Ring Strategy Ring simultaneously i Ring Timeout on Each 30 Member s Enable Destination i Default Destination WMainVoiceMenu Figure 111 Ring Group Configuration REMOTE EXTENSION IN RING GROUP Remote extensions from the peer trunk of a remote UCM6510 can be included in the ring group with local extension An example
71. same level as or higher level than an outbound rule s privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule Configure the password for the user A random secure password will be automatically generated It is recommended to use this password for security purpose If enabled SIP Password will accept only alphabet characters and digits AuthID will be changed to the same as Extension Configure the authentication ID for the user If not configured the extension number will be used for authentication Enable voicemail for the user The default setting is Yes Configure voicemail password digits only for the user to access the voicemail box A random numeric password is automatically generated It is recommended to use the random generated password for security purpose When user dials voicemail code the password verification IVR is skipped If enabled this would allow one button voicemail access By default this option is disabled If selected this extension will be disabled on the UCM6510 Note The disabled extension still exists on the PBX but can t be used on the end device If enabled this extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX list if disabled this extension will be skipped when creating LDAP Phonebook First Name Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Configure the first name of the user The first name can contain UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 112 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM characters letters digit
72. same range such as WAN port 1000 1005 and LAN port 1000 1005 and access from WAN port will be forwarded to the LAN port with the same port number for example WAN port 1000 will be port forwarding to LAN port 1000 Specify the LAN IP address Specify the LAN port number or a range of LAN ports Note When it is set to a range WAN port and LAN port must be configured with the same range such as WAN port 1000 1005 and LAN port 1000 1005 and access from WAN port will be forwarded to the LAN port with the same port number for example WAN port 1000 will be port forwarding to LAN port 1000 Select protocol type UDP Only TCP Only or TCP UDP for the forwarding in the selected port The default setting is UDP Only The following figures demonstrate a port forwarding example to provide phone s web Ul access to public side e The UCM6510 network mode is set to Route e The UCM6510 WAN port is connected to uplink switch with a public IP address configured e g TeV ta ds e The UCM6510 LAN port provides DHCP pool that connects to multiple phone devices in the LAN network 192 168 2 x The UCM6510 is used as a router with gateway address 192 168 2 1 e There is a GXP2160 connected under the LAN interface network of the UCM6510 It obtains IP address 192 168 2 100 from UCM6510 DHCP pool Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 53 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD e On the UCM651
73. sync automatically user can manually sync LDAP server Under VoIP Trunks page click sync button shown in the following figure to manually sync LDAP contacts from peer UCM6510 VoIP Trunks Create New SIP Trunk Create New IAX Trunk Provider Name Test_Ringgroup 192 168 40 128 Figure 113 Manually Sync LDAP Server Create New Ring Group 4 Under Ring Groups setting page click Ring Groups can be found under web Ul gt PBX gt Call Features gt Ring Groups Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 210 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD 5 If LDAP server is synced correctly Available LDAP Numbers box will display available remote extensions that can be included in the current ring group Please also make sure the extensions in the peer UCM6510 can be included into that UCM6510 s LDAP contact Edit Ring Group 6402 Extension 6402 Available Extensions Extension Groups Ring Group Members 1000 jingya tan 1001 Emily 1003 Test TestH 1004 Test 1005 UCM FAKE PEER 3000 Grandstream Test 3001 UCM PEER 144 Available LDAP Numbers Selected LDAP Numbers 1002 0u Test 1 5001 ou Test Ringgroup 2000 o0u Test 1 1010 o0u Test Ringgroup 1011 o0u Test Ringgroup 5000 ou Test Ringgroup 5002 o0u Test Ringgroup Ring Group Options Ring Strategy Ring simultaneously Permission Internal Custom Prompt None G Ring Timeout on Each 60 Member is Au
74. the Global Outbound CID defined in Web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt General will be used Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured Codec Preference Enable Qualify Qualify Timeout Qualify Frequency Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Select audio and video codec for the VoIP trunk The available codecs are PCMU PCMA GSM AAL2 G 726 32 G 726 G 722 G 729 G 723 ILBC ADPCM H 264 H 263 H 263p If enabled the UCM6510 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online The default setting is No When Enable Qualify option is set to Yes configure the timeout in ms for the Qualify SIP message If no response is received within the timeout the device is considered offline The default setting is 1000ms When Enable Qualify option is set to Yes configure the interval in UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 172 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM seconds of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online The default setting is 60 seconds l l The maximum number of concurrent calls using the trunk The default Maximum Number of Call Lines l l rant settings 0 which means no limited Select Fax mode The default setting is None e None Disable Fax e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email addre
75. the Voicemail Password once you hear Password voice prompt 5 Once successfully logged in to the voicemail you will be prompted with the Voice Mail Main menu 6 You are successfully connected to the PBX system now Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 35 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 36 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD SYSTEM SETTINGS This section explains configurations for system wide parameters on the UCM6510 Those parameters include Network Settings Firewall Change Password LDAP server HTTP server Email settings Time Settings and NTP Server settings USER MANAGEMENT User management is on web GUI gt Settings gt User Management page User could create multiple accounts for different administrators to log in the UCM6510 web GUI Additionally the system will automatically create user accounts along with creating new extensions for extension users to login to the web UI using their extension number and password All existing user accounts for web UI login will be displayed on User Management page as shown in the following figure Settings gt gt User Management gt gt User Management User Information Create New User View 10 v Privilege admin Super Administrator 2015 02 03 11 09 57 AdminBill Administrator 2014 12 12 12 13 46 AdminJane Administrator 2014 11
76. time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page AE ET Ue Configure the Call Forward Busy target number If not configured the Call Forward Busy feature is deactivated The default setting is deactivated Select time condition for Call Forward Busy The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific Note e Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFB Time Condition terms of time period e Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page CC Settings If enabled UCM6510 will automatically alert this extension when a called Enable CC party is available given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason Ring Simultaneously Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along Rina Simult with the extension ing Simultaneous i If a register trunk is used for outbound the register number will be used to be displayed for the external number as calle
77. to be UAC or UAS The default setting is UAC SIP SETTINGS TCP and TLS A Note The configuration in this section requires system reboot to take effect TCP Enable TCP Bind Address TLS Enable TLS Bind Address TLS Client Protocol TLS Do Not Verify Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 92 SIP Settings TCP and TLS Configure to allow incoming TCP connections with the UCM6510 The default setting is No Configure the IP address for TCP server to bind to 0 0 0 0 means binding to all interfaces The port number is optional If not specified 5060 will be used Configure to allow incoming TLS connections with the UCM6510 The default setting is No Configure the IP address for TLS server to bind to 0 0 0 0 means binding to all interfaces The port number is optional If not specified 5061 will be used Note The IP address must match the common name hostname in the certificate Please do not bind a TLS socket to multiple IP addresses For details on how to construct a certificate for SIP please refer to the following document http tools ietf org html draft ietf sip domain certs Select the TLS protocol for outbound client connections The default setting is TLSv1 If enabled the TLS server s certificate won t be verified when acting as a UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 265 of 317 TLS Self Signed CA TLS Cert TLS CA Cert TLS CA List SIP SETTINGS NAT External IP Address External Host Ex
78. up The default setting is 3 Select the voice prompt language to be used for this IVR The default setting is Default which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Language The dropdown list shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6510 To add more languages in the list please download voice prompt package by selecting Check Prompt List under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Language Key Pressing Events Key Press Event Press 0 Press 1 Press 2 Press 3 Press 4 Press 5 Press 6 Press 7 Press 8 Press 9 Press Timeout Invalid Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Select the event for each key pressing for 0 9 Timeout and Invalid The event options are 7 Extension 8 Voicemail 9 Conference Rooms 10 Voicemail Group 11 IVR 12 Ring Group 13 Queues 14 Page Group 15 Fax 16 Custom Prompt 17 Hangup 18 DISA 19 Dial By Name 20 External Number 21 Callback UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 194 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD CREATE IVR PROMPT To record new IVR prompt or upload IVR prompt to be used in IVR click on Prompt next to the Welcome Prompt option and the users will be redirected to IVR Prompt page Or users could go to web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Custom Prompt page directly Create New IVR G Name Main Menu Extension 7011 Dial Other Extensions Dial Trunk Permission Inter
79. via this server Please refer to the webpage http www grandstream com support firmware Alternatively users can download a free TFTP or HTTP server and conduct a local firmware upgrade A free windows version TFTP server is available for download from http www solarwinds com products freetools free tftp server aspx http tftod32 jounin net Instructions for local firmware upgrade via TFTP 1 Unzip the firmware files and put all of them in the root directory of the TFTP server Connect the PC running the TFTP server and the UCM6510 to the same LAN segment 3 Launch the TFTP server and go to the File menu gt Configure gt Security to change the TFTP server s default setting from Receive Only to Transmit Only for the firmware upgrade 4 Start the TFTP server and configure the TFTP server in the UCM6510 web configuration interface 5 Configure the Firmware Server Path to the IP address of the PC 6 Update the changes and reboot the UCM6510 End users can also choose to download a free HTTP server from http httod apache org or use Microsoft IIS web server BACKUP The UCM6510 configuration can be backed up locally or via network The backup file will be used to restore the configuration on UCM6510 when necessary Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 304 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD BACKUP RESTORE Users could backup the UCM6510 configurations for restore purpose under web
80. voicemail box Default Code 83 Pause the agent in all call queues Default Code 84 Unpause the agent in all call queues Default Code 81 To page an extension enter the code followed by the extension number Default Code 80 To intercom an extension enter the code followed by the extension number Default Code 40 To add a number to blacklist for inbound route dial 40 and follow the voice prompt to enter the number Default Code 41 To remove a number from current blacklist for inbound route dial 41 and follow the voice prompt to remove the number Default Code To pick up a call for any extension xxxx enter the code followed by the extension number xxxx Default Code 8 This code is for the pickup group which can be assigned for UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 253 of 317 Direct Dial Voicemail Prefix Call Completion Request Call Completion Cancel Enable Spy Listen Spy Whisper Spy Barge Spy CALL RECORDING lt GRANDSTREAM each extension on the extension configuration page If there is an incoming call to an extension the other extensions within the same pickup group can dial 8 directly to pick up the call Default Code This code is for the user to directly dial or transfer to an extension s voicemail For example directly dial 5000 will have to call go into the extension 5000 s voicemail If the user would like to transfer the call to the extension 5000 s v
81. when the extension has CID configured The default setting is No Turn on this option when the PBX is using public IP and communicating with devices behind NAT If there is one way audio issue usually it s related to NAT configuration or SIP RTP port configuration on the firewall If selected the trunk will be disabled Note If a current SIP trunk is disabled UCM6510 will send UNREGISTER message REGISTER message with expires 0 to the SIP provider If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number this field should be set to User Phone Then a User Phone parameter will be attached to the Request Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E 164 number If set to Enable Tel will be used instead of SIP in the SIP request The default setting is disabled Select whether the trunk needs to register on the external server or not when Register SIP Trunk type is selected The default setting is No Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider when Register SIP Trunk type is selected Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider when Register SIP Trunk is selected Enter the Authentication ID for Register SIP Trunk type Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk for SIP trunk only The default setting is disabled The recording files can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files Codec Preference From Domain Firmware Version 1 0 2
82. when importing a CSV file In Windows or other operating systems it can be opened using Notepad and saved as UTF 8 encoded files Import file Account Number and Phonebook DN is required File export_phonebooks csv Figure 36 Import Phonebook The file to be imported must be a CSV file with UTF 8 encoding Users can open the CSV file with Notepad and save it with UTF 8 encoding Here is how a sample file looks like Please note Account Number and Phonebook DN fields are required Users could export a phonebook file from the UCM6510 LDAP phonebook section first and use it as a sample to start with A B C D E F G H I J 1 FirstNamiLastName Account Number CalleriD Name Email Department Mobile Number Home Number Fax Phonebook DN 2 John Doe 1001 1001 IT 1001000000 phonebook 3 Jane Doe 1002 1002 Sales 1002000000 phonebook 4 William Chung 1003 1003 Marketing 1003000000 phonebook 5 Linda Kuo 1004 1004 Accounting 1004000000 phonebook 6 Steve Chang 1005 1005 Support 1005000000 others Figure 37 Phonebook CSV File Format The Phonebook DN field is the same Phonebook Prefix entry as when the user clicks on Add to create a new phonebook Therefore if the user enters phonebook in Phonebook DN field in the CSV file the actual phonebook DN ou phonebook dc pbx dc com will be automatically created by the UCM6510 once the CSV file is imported In the CSV file users can specify different phonebook D
83. which means the UCM6510 will keep trying until the server side accepts the registration request Video Configure the maximum bit rate in kb s for video calls The default setting is 384 Support SIP Video Select to enable video support in SIP calls The default setting is Yes Max Bit Rate kb s If enabled the UCM6510 will generate manager events when SIP UA Generate Manager Events Soa performs events e g Hold The default setting is No If enabled when rejecting an incoming INVITE or REGISTER request the UCM6510 will always reject with 401 Unauthorized instead of notifying Reject Non Matching INVITE the requester whether there is a matching user or peer for the request This reduces the ability of an attacker to scan for valid SIP usernames The default setting is No SIP SETTINGS SESSION TIMER Table 91 SIP Settings Session Timer Select the session timer mode The default setting is Accept The options are Session Timers e Originate Always request and run session timer e Accept Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 264 of 317 Session Expire Min SE Session Refresher lt GRANDSTREAM Run session timer only when requested by other UA e Refuse Do not run session timer Configure the maximum session refresh interval in seconds The default setting is 1800 Configure the minimum session refresh interval in seconds The default setting is 90 Select the session refresher
84. will be redirected to HTTPS with Port 8089 The default setting is Enable Select HTTP or HTTPS as the protocol to access the HTTP server The default setting is HTTPS This also defines whether to use HTTP or HTTPS to download the config file in zero config as the UCM6510 is served as HTTP HTTPS server that has the device config files for zero config Specify port number to access the HTTP server The default port number is 8089 Once the change is saved the web page will be redirected to the login page using the new URL Enter the username and password to login again EMAIL SETTINGS The Email application on the UCM6510 can be used to send out alert event Emails Fax Fax To Email Voicemail Voicemail To Email and etc The configuration parameters can be accessed via web GUI gt Settings gt Email Settings TLS Enable Type Domain Server Username Password Display Name Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 18 Email Settings Enable or disable TLS during transferring submitting your Email to other SMTP server The default setting is Yes MTA Mail Transfer Agent The Email will be sent from the configured domain When MIA is selected there is no need to set up SMTP server for it or no user login is required However the Emails sent from MTA might be considered as spam by the target SMTP server Client Submit Emails to the SMTP server A SMTP server is required and users need login with correct cr
85. will flash in red and the call can be picked up by pressing this key This allows users to know if the line is occupied or not The SLA function on the UCM6510 is similar to BLF but SLA is used to monitor external line i e analog trunk on the UCM6510 Users could configure the phone with BLF mode on the MPK to monitor the analog trunk status or press the line key pick up call from the analog trunk on the UCM6510 CREATE EDIT SLA STATION SLA Station can be configured on web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt SLA Station SLA Station Create New SLA Station Delete Selected SLA Station View 10 v a Station Name fxo1 1000 fxo1 Total 1 Show 1 1 Goto Figure 93 SLA Station e Click on Create New SLA Station to add a SLA Station e Click on to edit the SLA Station The following table shows the SLA Station configuration parameters les e Clickon to delete the SLA Station Table 62 SLA Station Configuration Parameters Station Name Configure a name to identify the SLA Station Station Specify a SIP extension as a station that will be using SLA Available SLA Trunks Existing Analog Trunks with SLA Mode enabled will be listed here Select a trunk for this SLA from the Available SLA Trunks list Click on vy to arrange the order If there are multiple trunks selected when there are calls on those trunks at the same time pressing the LINE key on Selected SLA Trunks the phone will
86. 0 17 10 T 313 E amp M IMMEDIATE RECORD TRACE ssssssssssesssesssesssseesseesneesneesneesneesnsesnnsenesentennsenneenneenneenneete 314 FVN 314 PTE 315 ENE 315 EXPERIENCING THE UCM6510 SERIES IP PBX ennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnenn 317 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 7 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM Table of Tables UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Table 1 Technical Spe cifiCations cccccccceccccccessceeceesececeeeeceeeeeeceeseeeeeeeseeeceessuaeeesseaeeeessaeceessaeeeesseeeeessaaes 21 Table 2 UCM6510 Equipment Packaging rrrrrrnnnnronrnnnnorrnnnnronnnnnrenrnnnnernnnnnennnnnnsennnnsnennnnnneennnnnsennnnsssnnnnn 25 EC COCO NIET i EEE NE NE oe eer reer 30 Table 4 UCM6510 LED INDICATORS mmmrrnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnernnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnenee 31 Table 5 User Management Create New USer rrrrnnnnnnonnnnnnernnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnennnnnneennnnnsennnnnnennnnn 39 Table 6 Operation Log Column Header rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnevnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnssennnnesennnnnnsennnnssennnnsseennnn 42 Table 7 Change Binding Email Op WOM seede 44 Table 8 UCM6510 Network Settings gt Basic Settings cccccccccccsssccceceesceeseeeceeseeeecesseeeeeesseeeesseeeessaaes 44 Table 9 UCM6510 Network Settings gt 802 1X ccccecccccceseceeceeeeeceeeeeeeceeeceeseeeeeessesecesseaeeesseeeeseeaeeeesaaes 50 Table 10 UCM6510 Network Set
87. 0 under web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt VolP Trunks Once created the VolP trunks will be listed with Provider Name Type Hostname IP Username and Options to edit detect the trunk e Click on Create New SIP Trunk or Create New IAX Trunk to add a new VolP trunk e Click on to configure detailed parameters for the VoIP trunk e Click on to configure Direct Outward Dialing DOD for the SIP Trunk e Click on to start LDAP Sync e Click on to delete the VoIP trunk For VoIP trunk example please refer to the following document http www grandstream com products ucm series ucm65xx documents how to interconnect multiple uc m6510 using peer trunk pdf The VolP trunk options are listed in the table below Table 56 Create New SIP Trunk Select the VolP trunk type Type e Peer SIP Trunk e Register SIP Trunk Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound Provider Name rules inbound rules and etc Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP provider s server of the Host Name trunk Keep the CID from the inbound call when dialing out This setting will a override Keep Trunk CID option Please make sure that the peer PBX at Keep Original CID l l l the other side supports to match user entry using username field from authentication line If enabled the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension s CID when Keep Trunk CID l l ao the extension has CID configured The defau
88. 0 web Ul gt Settings gt Network Settings gt Port Forwarding configure a port forwarding entry as the figure shows below WAN Port This is the port opened up on the WAN side for access purpose LAN IP This is the GXP2160 IP address under the LAN interface network of the UCM6510 Protocol Type We select TCP here for web Ul access using HTTP Settings gt gt Network Settings gt gt Port Forwarding Port Forwarding Please configure the LAN mode as Router to enable this function When Port Forwarding is set to range the WAN port and the LAN port rules for only same start and end values such as 1000 1005 and 1000 1005 Range match Range Single match Single such as 4444 match 5555 1500 1505 match 1500 1505 WAN Port 2999 3005 LAN IP 192 168 2 103 LAN Port 2999 3005 Protocol Type TCP Only WAN Port 8088 LAN IP 192 168 2 100 LAN Port 80 Protocol Type TCP Only WAN Port LAN IP LAN Port Protocol Type UDP Only WAN Port LAN IF LAN Port Protocol Type UDP Only WAN Port LAN IP LAN Port Protocol Type UDP Only WAN Port LAN IP LAN Port Protocol Type UDP Only WAN Port LAN IP LAN Port Protocol Type UDP Only WAN Port LAN IP LAN Port Protocol Type UDP Only Figure 24 UCM6510 Port Forwarding Configuration This will allow users to access the GXP2160 web Ul from public side by typing in address 1 1 1 1 8088 D 1 1 1 1 8088 page status_network Grandstream GXP2160 Puente English v C iun Status Accoun
89. 00 000B822B0B34 GRANDSTREAM GXP2120 000B822B2D94 192 168 40 143 GRANDSTREAM GXP2110 Figure 63 Manage Devices 1 Click on to access the web Ul of the phone 2 Click on Ved to edit the device configuration Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 99 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD A new dialog will be displayed for the users to configure Basic settings and Advanced settings Basic settings have the same configurations as displayed when manually creating a new device i e account line key and MPK settings Advanced settings allow users to configure more details in a five level structure Edit Device 000B825E66E2 cis eree sete 4 Model Templates Multiple Purposed Key Settings MPK 1 Mode Speed Dial Available v E Account Account 1 Selected 3275te mp Descri p tion 1000 value 1000 Defaut model Template Language Settings 3275default Language enes Language ENGLISH iovai Templates Date and Time Available Date Format MM DD YY A anenence U aaee a a Selected tempi Upgrade and Provision 1 Global Policy Firmware Source source URL Upgrade via TFIP Modify Global Policy Cancel Save Figure 64 Edit Device A preview of the Advanced settings is shown in the above figure There are five levels configurations as described in 1 2 3 4 5 below with priority from the lowest to the highest The configuratio
90. 01 11 11 11 to start the RTC Real Time Clock test pattern Check the system time from LCD idle screen by pressing DOWN button or from web GUI gt System Status gt General page After the test reboot the device manually and the device will display the correct UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 30 of 317 time 5 GRANDSTREAM e Hardware Testing Select Test SVIP to perform SVIP test on the device This is mainly for factory testing purpose which verifies the hardware connection inside the device The diagnostic result displays on the LCD after the test is done e Protocol Web access protocol HTTP or HTTPS By default it s HTTPS Web Info e Port Web access port number By default it s 8089 e Enable SSH Enable SSH access SSH Switch e Disable SSH Disable SSH access By default the SSH access is disabled USE THE LED INDICATORS The UCM6510 has LED indicators in the front to display connection status The following table shows the status definitions LED Indicator Power 1 Power 2 PoE LAN WAN USB SD Phone 1 Phone 2 FXS Line 1 Line 2 FXO T1 E1 J1 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 4 UCM6510 LED INDICATORS LED Status Solid Connected Fast Blinking Data Transferring Slow Blinking Trying to connect OFF Not Connected Solid Connected and working Fast Blinking 0 5s on 0 5s off No cable is connected or connected but the link is not working at all Slow Blinkin
91. 02 1p Assign the priority value of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port The default value Priority Value is O LAN 1 LAN 2 when Method is set to Dual If Dual is selected as Method users will need assign the default interface to be LAN 1 mapped to UCM6510 WAN port or LAN 2 mapped to UCM6510 LAN port and then configure network settings for LAN 1 and LAN 2 The default interface is Default Interface LAN 2 IP Method Select DHCP Static IP or PPPoE The default setting is DHCP IP Address Enter the IP address for static IP settings The default setting is 192 168 0 160 Enter the subnet mask address for static IP settings The default setting is 255 255 0 0 Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings when the port is assigned as Subnet Mask Gi default interface The default setting is 0 0 0 0 DNS Server 1 Enter the DNS server 1 address for static IP settings The default setting is 0 0 0 0 DNS Server 2 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings User Name Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE Password Enter the password to connect via PPPoE Layer 2 QoS Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port The default value is 802 1Q VLAN Tag 0 Layer 2 QoS 802 1p Assign the priority value of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port The default value Priority Value is O e Method Route WAN port interface is used for uplink connection LAN port interface is used as a rout
92. 10 IP PBX User Manual Page 88 of 317 Address Port Base DN User Name Password Number Filter Name Filter Version Name Attribute Number Attribute Display Name Max Hits Search Timeout Sort Results Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM Configure the IP address or DNS name of the LDAP server Configure the LDAP server port The default value is 389 This is the location in the directory where the search is requested to begin Example e dc grandstream dc com e ou Boston dc grandstream dc com Configure the bind Username for querying LDAP servers The field can be left blank if the LDAP server allows anonymous binds Configure the bind Password for querying LDAP servers The field can be left blank if the LDAP server allows anonymous binds Configure the filter used for number lookups Please refer to user manual for more details Configure the filter used for name lookups Please refer to user manual for more details Select the protocol version for the phone to send the bind requests The default value is 3 Specify the name attributes of each record which are returned in the LDAP search result Example gn e cnsn description Specify the number attributes of each record which are returned in the LDAP search result Example e telephoneNumber e telephoneNumber Mobile Configure the entry information to be shown on phone s LCD Up
93. 17 lt GRANDSTREAM Base DN dc pbx dc com Login DN Please leave this field empty Password Please leave this field empty Anonymous Please enable this option Filter CalleriDName AccountNumber Port 389 The following figure gives a sample configurations for UCM6510 acting as a LDAP client LDAP Client Configurations LDAP Server Test 1 Server Address 192 168 40 144 Base DN dr pbx dc com User Name cn admin dc pbx dc com Password Filter CallerIDName WXAccountNumbe Port Figure 40 LDAP Client Configurations To configure Grandstream IP phones as the LDAP client please refer to the following example Server Address The IP address or domain name of the UCM6510 Base DN dc pbx dc com User Name Please leave this field empty Password Please leave this field empty LDAP Name Attribute Caller IDName Email Department FirstName LastName LDAP Number Attribute AccountNumber MobileNumber HomeNumber Fax LDAP Number Filter AccountNumber LDAP Name Filter CallerIDName LDAP Display Name AccountNumber CallerIDName LDAP Version If existed please select LDAP Version 3 Port 389 The following figure shows the configuration information on a Grandstream GXP2200 to successfully use the LDAP server as configured in Figure 31 LDAP Server Configurations Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 67 of 317 Server Address Port Base DN User Name Password
94. 19 15 59 15 Ihuynh Administrator 2015 02 02 11 13 41 Consumer Consumer Consumer Consumer Consumer Consumer p Total 89 Show 1 9 Goto First Prev Next Last Figure 7 User Management Page Display USER PRIVILEGES Three privilege levels are supported e Super Admin This is the highest privilege Super Admin can access all pages on UCM6510 web GUI change Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 37 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L configuration for all options and execute all the operations Super Admin can create edit and delete one or more users with Admin privilege Super Admin can edit and delete one or more users with Consumer privilege Super Admin can view operation logs generated by all users By default the user account admin is configured with Super Admin privilege and it s the only user with Super Admin privilege The User Name and Privilege level cannot be changed or deleted Super Admin could change its own login password on web Ul gt Settings gt Change Password page Super Admin could view operations done by all the users in web Ul gt Settings gt User Management gt Operation Log e Admin Users with Admin privilege can only be created by Super Admin user Admin privilege users are not allowed to access the following pages Maintenance gt Upgrade Maintenance gt Backup Mai
95. 2 7 Save Figure 55 Auto Provision Settings Table 22 Auto Provision Settings Enable or disable the Zero Config feature on the PBX The default setting is enabled By default this is disabled If disabled when SIP device boots up the UCM6510 will only send the configuration path to the device when you have any manual configuration on the device This manual configuration includes Any configuration under BASIC and CUSTOM page of the device in Zero Config page If any global or model template expect for the default template is selected for the assigned device in Zero Config page Note When disabled SIP devices can still be provisioned by manually sending NOTIFY from the UCM6510 which will include the XML config file URL for the SIP device to download If enabled when the device is discovered the PBX will automatically assign an extension within the range defined in Zero Config Extension Segment to the device The default setting is disabled Click on the link Zero Config Extension Segment to specify the extension range to be assigned if Automatically Assign Extension is enabled The default range is 5000 6299 Zero Config Extension Segment range can be UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 84 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM defined in web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt General page gt Extension Preference section Auto Provision Extensions If enabled the extension list will be sent out to
96. 5 FXS Ports Signaling Preference For FXO port users could manually enter the ACIM settings by selecting the value from dropdown list for each port Or users could click on Detect for the UCM6510 to automatically detect the ACIM value The detecting value will be automatically filled into the settings Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 143 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE Wr Ga Pe ae ee ACIM Setting G ACIM Detection A Note ACIM setting is very important for the FXO PSTN line to work properly on the UCM6510 If the users experience echo caller ID or disconnecting issue please make sure to run the ACIM detection to find out the correct value for impedance setting Table 47 Analog Hardware Configuration Parameters Select country to set the default tones for dial tone busy tone ring tone Tone Region and etc to be sent from the FXS port The default setting is United States of America USA Advanced Settings Select country to set the On Hook Speed Ringer Impedance Ringer Threshold Current Limiting TIP RING voltage adjustment Minimum FXO Opermode Operational Loop Current and AC Impedance as predefined for your country s analog line characteristics The default setting is United States of America USA Select country to set the On Hook Speed Ringer Impedance Ringer Threshold Current Limiting TIP RING voltage adjustment Minimum FXS Opermode Operational Loop Curr
97. 5301 s 64 5300 5301 from internal pn01 lt 5300 gt SIP 5300 00000002 SIP 5301 00000003 Dial SIP 5301 60 2013 12 03 14 02 23 2013 12 03 14 02 27 2013 12 03 14 02 31 8 4 ANSWERED DOCUMENTATION 1386100943 2 EXT 5300 5301 s Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 298 of 317 GRANDSTREAM lt root gt lt cdr gt lt Acctld gt 62 lt Acctld gt lt accountcode gt lt accountcode gt lt src gt 5300 lt src gt lt dst gt 5301 lt dst gt lt dcontext gt from internal lt dcontext gt lt clid gt amp quot pn0 1 amp quot amp It 5300 amp gt lt clid gt lt channel gt SIP 5300 00000000 lt channel gt lt dstchannel gt SIP 5301 00000001 lt dstcha nnel gt lt lastapp gt Dial lt lastapp gt lt lastdata gt SIP 5301 60 lt lastdata gt lt start gt 2013 12 03 11 46 40 lt start gt lt answer gt 2013 12 03 11 46 43 lt answer gt lt end gt 2013 12 03 11 46 49 lt end gt lt duration gt 9 lt duration gt lt billsec gt 6 lt billsec gt lt disposition gt ANSWERED lt disposition gt lt a maflags gt DOCUMENTATION lt amaflags gt lt uniqueid gt 1386092800 0 lt uniqueid gt lt userfield gt EXT lt userfie ld gt lt channel ext gt 5300 lt channel ext gt lt dstchannel ext gt 5301 lt dstchannel ext gt lt service gt s lt service gt lt cdr gt lt cdr gt lt Acctld gt 63 lt Acctld gt lt accountcode gt lt accountcode gt lt src gt 5300 lt src gt lt dst gt 5301 lt dst gt lt dcontext gt from internal lt dcontext gt lt
98. 6510 after email is sent The default setting is Yes Fill in the Subject and Message content to be used in the Email when sending to the user The template variables are Template For Voicemail Emails e t TAB Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 e VM_NAME Recipient s first name and last name e VM_DUR The duration of the voicemail message e VM_MAILBOX The recipient s extension e VM_CALLERID The caller ID of the person who has left the UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 204 of 317 GRANDSTREAM NNECTIN THE WORLD message e VM_MSGNUM The number of messages in the mailbox e S VM DATE The date and time when the message is left CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL GROUP The UCM6510 supports voicemail group and all the extensions added in the group will receive the voicemail to the group extension The voicemail group can be configured under web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Voicemail Group Click on Create New Voicemail Group to configure the group Create New Voicemail Group Voicemail Group Extension 6600 Name VMGroup1 Available Mailboxes Voicemail Group Mailboxes 5005 Warehouse 5000 John Doe 5006 Sales 5001 Stacy Green 5007 Tech Support B 5002 Tom Lin 5008 Customer Service at 5003 Ricky Chan 5009 RMA Anan Shinninna Voicemail Group Extension Name Voicemail Password Email Address Voicemail Group Mailboxes Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Figure 10
99. 6510 will use to check on a voltage drop in the line The default setting is 200 The valid range is 50 to 3000 Configure the ring timeout in ms Trunk FXO devices must have a timeout to determine if there was a hangup before the line is answered This value can be used to configure how long it takes before the UCM6510 considers a non ringing line with hangup activity The default setting is 8000 Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of analog FXO port The valid range is from 13 5 Db to 12 0 Db The default setting is 0 Configure the TX gain for the transmitting channel of analog FXO port The valid range is from 13 5 Db to 12 0 Db The default setting is 0 Configure to enable CallerID detection The default setting is Yes Enable to detect Fax signal from the trunk during the call and send the received Fax to the default Email address in Fax setting page under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 The default setting is No Note If enabled Fax Pass through cannot be used Select the Caller ID scheme for this trunk If you are not sure which scheme to choose please select Auto Detect The default setting is Bellcore Telcordia Configure the time interval between off hook and first dialed digit for outbound calls Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk The default setting is disabled The recording files are saved in external storage device if
100. 7 Data Trunk Configuration Parameters rrrrnrrnnnnrnvvvrnnnnrrevrrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnrennnnnnsnsenn 162 TENT 163 SIP Register Trunk Configuration Parameters rrrnnnrrrnnrnnnnnnvvnvnnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnrennnnnnn 164 SIP Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters rrrrnrrnnnnrrovrrnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnrvnnnnnnenrennnnnssnsennnnnnnnernnnnnn 167 GEER SEG sicccacecs acntccentacsasensendaensentdnssiseduceusansencedaainocsdqcagnensxaGedenaacteeendsadaccetecsseenticnias 170 IAX Register Trunk Configuration Parameters rrrrrrnnnnrrvvrrnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnennrnnnsnnennnnnnsnsenn 171 IAX Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters rrrrnnnrrvrrrnnnnrvvrrrnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnsennnnnnsnnennnnnnsnsenn 172 SLA Station Configuration Parameters cccccccccsssesceeecseeeeeeeeeseeeeceeesseeeeeeessaaeeeeeeesaaeeeeeessaaess 175 Outbound Route Configuration Parameters cccccccccssseeceeecseeseeeeeceeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeesaaeeeeeessaeeeees 179 Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters cccccccsseseceecseeseceeeceeeeecececseaeeeeeseeeaseseeseuegeeeeeeaas 182 Conference Bridge Configuration Parameters ccccccsseseeececseeseceeeeeaeeceeeseeeeeesessaeeeeeeesaaaees 187 Conference Caller IVR Menu ccccccccccsesseceeeceeeeeeeeeceauseeeeesseaaeceeesseaaeceeessaaaeeeeesseaeeeeesssaaass 190 IVR Configuration Parameters ccccccceseecceceeeeseeeeceaeeeceeeeaeeseceeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeee
101. 9 Voicemail Group Table 71 Voicemail Group Settings Enter the Voicemail Group Extension The voicemail messages left to this extension will be forwarded to all the voicemail group members Configure the Name to identify the voicemail group Letters digits and are allowed The Voicemail password for the user to check Voicemail messages The Email address of current user Select available mailboxes from the left list and add them to the right list The extensions need to have voicemail enabled to be listed in available mailboxes list UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 205 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING eS Wo eto This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 206 of 317 GRANDSTREAM RING GROUP The UCM6510 supports ring group feature with different ring strategies applied to the ring group members This section describes the ring group configuration on the UCM6510 CONFIGURE RING GROUP Ring group settings can be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Ring Group Create New Ring Group Extension Ring Group Name Members 6400 techsupport 6005 6006 6007 Figure 110 Ring Group e Click on Create New Ring Group to add ring group e Click on l to edit the ring group The following table shows the ring group configuration parameters e Click on to delete the ring group Table 72 Ring Group Parameters l Configure ring group name to identif
102. AP MD5 e EAP TLS e EAP PEAPv0 MSCHAPv2 Identity Enter 802 1X mode identity information MD5 Password Enter 802 1X mode MD5 password information 802 1X CA Certificate Select 802 1X certificate from local PC and then upload 802 1X Client p Select 802 1X client certificate from local PC and then upload Certificate STATIC ROUTES A static route is a pre determined path that the network traffic travels to reach a specific host or network On the UCM6510 the static route function allows the device to use manually configured routes rather than dynamically assigned routes or default gateway configured in the UCM6510 web GUI gt Network Settings gt Basic Settings to forward traffic It can be used to define a route when no other routes is Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 50 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM available or necessary or used in complementary with existing routing on the UCM6510 as a failover backup and etc e Click on in the table below SS SS to create a new static route The configuration parameters are listed e Once added users can select to edit the static route e Select to delete the static route e Static routes configuration can be reset from LCD menu gt Network Menu Destination Netmask Gateway Interface Table 10 UCM6510 Network Settings gt Static Routes Configure the destination IP address or the destination IP subnet for the UCM6510 to reach using the st
103. Basic Call Routes gt Extensions in order to be searchable in Dial By Name directory through IVR By specifying the extensions here the administrators can make sure unscreened calls will not reach the company employee if he she doesn t want to receive them directly Edit Extension 1000 Status General Extension CalleriD Number Permission Internal SIPAAX Password P95Cih Create New User Modify Select v 47545707 G Enable Voicemail Voicemail Password Call Forward Unconditional Call Forward No Answer Call Forward Busy Ring Timeout Skip Voicemail Password Auto Record y erification Support Hot Desking Mode User Settings G First Name LastName Doe Email Address Language Default v Figure 138 Configure Extension First Name and Last Name 4 Query Type Specify the query type This defines how the caller will need to enter to search the directory By First Name enter the first 3 digits of the first name to search the directory By Last Name enter the first 3 digits of the last name to search the directory By Full Name enter the first 3 digits of the first name or last name to search the directory 5 Select Type Specify the select type on the searching result The IVR will confirm the name number for the party the caller would like to reach before dialing out By Order After the caller enters the digits the IVR will announce the first matching party s name and number The
104. Bind IP Address Allow Guest Calls Overlap Dialing Allow Transfer Enable DNS SRV Lookups on Outbound Calls MWI From Table 89 SIP Settings General Configure the host name or domain name for the UCM6510 Realms MUST be globally unique according to RFC3261 The default setting is grandstream Configure the UDP port used for SIP The default setting is 5060 Configure the IP address to bind to The default setting is 0 0 0 0 which means binding to all addresses If enabled the UCM6510 allows unauthorized INVITE coming into the PBX and the call can be made The default setting is No Warning Please be aware of the potential security risk when enabling Allow Guest Calls as this will allow any user with the UCM6510 address to dial into the UCM6510 Select to enable overlap dialing support Overlap dial provides for a longer time out period between digits also called the inter digit timer If set to Yes the PBX expects to receive the digits one right after the other coming in to this line with very little delay between digits If set to No the PBX waits up to about 2 seconds between digits The default setting is No If set to No all transfers initiated by the endpoint in the UCM6510 will be disabled unless enabled in peers or users The default setting is Yes Select to enables DNS SRV lookups on outbound calls from the UCM6510 The default setting is Yes When sending MWI NOTIFY requests this value w
105. C DENE Status PBX Maintenance Recordings Storage Choose the device to store the recording files Gi Enable auto change yf GJ USB Disk G SD Card G Local Recordings Storage Figure 49 Settings gt Recordings Storage e If Enable Auto Change is selected the recording files will be automatically saved in the available USB Disk or SD card plugged into the UCM6510 If both USB Disk and SD card are plugged in the recording files will be always saved in the USB Disk e If Local is selected the recordings will be stored in UCM6510 internal storage Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 77 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD e lf USB Disk or SD Card is selected the recordings will be stored in the corresponding plugged in external storage device Please note the options USB Disk and SD Card will be displayed only if they are plugged into the UCM6510 Once USB Disk or SD Card is selected click on OK The user will be prompted to confirm to copy the local files to the external storage device Prompt information Change success to USB do you want to copy the local files to the USB Figure 50 Recordings Storage Prompt Information Click on OK to continue The users will be prompted a new dialog to select the categories for the files to be copied over Please select the files that you want to copy It may take some time to
106. CM6510 firmware file from the following link and save it in your PC http www grandstream com support firmware 2 Log in the web GUI as administrator in the PC aa 3 Go to web GUI gt Maintenance gt Upgrade upload the firmware file by clicking on and select the firmware file from your PC The default firmware file name is ucm6510fw bin Local Upgrade Firmware File Path ucm S00fw bin on Upgrade Figure 176 Local Upgrade 4 Click on i to start upgrading Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 302 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Loading gt Upgrading Firmware files Figure 177 Upgrading Firmware Files 5 Wait until the upgrading process is successful and a window will be popped up in the web GUI Prompt information Device successtully upgraded Do you want to restart the device now to make the changes take effect Cancel Figure 178 Reboot UCM6510 6 Click on OK to reboot the UCM6510 and check the firmware version after it boots up Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 303 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM A Note Please do not interrupt or power cycle the UCM6510 during upgrading process NO LOCAL FIRMWARE SERVERS For users that would like to use remote upgrading without a local TFTP server Grandstream offers a NAT friendly HTTP server This enables users to download the latest software upgrades for their devices
107. CM6510 or not If enabled the local UCM6510 will play ringback tone to the caller Otherwise the caller will listen to the tone from peer device The default UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 148 of 317 ORLO lt GRANDSTREAM setting is disabled Advanced Settings See Switch Type Coding CRC PRI Dial Plan PRI Local Dial Plan D Chan International Prefix National Prefix Local Prefix Private Prefix Unknown Prefix PRI T310 PRI Indication Reset Interval PRI Exclusive Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Select switch type e EurolSDN EurolSDN common in Europe e Nl2 National ISDN type 2 common in the US e DMS100 Nortel DMS100 e 4ESS AT amp T 4ESS e 5ESS Lucent 5ESS e NI1 old national ISDN type 1 e QSIG Select HDB3 or AMI Select whether to use CRC4 or not This setting is used to specify the type of the callee number The service provider will usually verify this The default setting is unknown In some very unusual circumstances you may need set to Dynamic or Redundant Note When one type is selected you might not be able to dial another class of numbers For example if National is configured you won t be able to dial local or international numbers This setting is used to specify the type of the caller number The service provider will usually verify this Indicates the D channel for control Configure the prefix in PRI Local Dial Plan and PRI D
108. Code Digits Timeout Call Park Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Default Setting 1000 Configure the maximum interval in milliseconds between the digits input to activate the feature code Default Extension 700 During an active call initiate blind transfer and then enter this code to park the call UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 252 of 317 Parked Lots Use Parklot as Extension Parking Timeout s Feature Codes lt GRANDSTREAM R Default Extension 701 720 These are the extensions where the calls will be parked i e parking lots that the parked calls can be retrieved If checked the parklot number will be used as an extension and the user can transfer to the parklot number to park the call Please note the parking lot number should not be configured the same as existing extension number Otherwise there will be conflict Default setting 300 This is the timeout allowed for a call to be parked After the timeout if the call is not picked up the extension who parks the call will be called back Voicemail Access Code My Voicemail Agent Pause Agent Unpause Paging Prefix Intercom Prefix Blacklist Add Blacklist Remove Call Pickup on Ringing Pickup Extension Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Default Code 98 Enter 98 and follow the voice prompt Or dial 98 followed by the extension and to access the entered extension s voicemail box Default Code 97 Press 97 to access the
109. Configure voicemail password digits only for the user to access the voicemail box A random numeric password is automatically generated It is recommended to use the random generated password for security purpose When user dials voicemail code the password verification IVR is skipped If enabled this would allow one button voicemail access By default this option is disabled If selected this extension will be disabled on the UCM6510 Note The disabled extension still exists on the PBX but can t be used on the end device If enabled this extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX list if disabled this extension will be skipped when creating LDAP Phonebook User Settings First Name Last Name Email Address User Password Language Music On Hold Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Configure the first name of the user The first name can contain characters letters digits and _ Configure the last name of the user The last name can contain characters letters digits and _ Fill in the Email address for the user Voicemail will be sent to this Email address Configure the password for user portal access A random numeric password is automatically generated It is recommended to use the randomly generated password for security purpose Select the voice prompt language to be used for this extension The default setting is Default which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal
110. EAM RED alarm there is physical wiring problem loss of connectivity or a framing line coding mismatch with the remote switch YELLOW alarm connected but the link is working only one way This means that the remote switch is not able to maintain sync with you or is not receiving your transmission The following example scenarios could trigger YELLOW alarm 1 The T1 portis connected with J1 connection 2 Incorrect cable is used 3 When using E1 one end is using CRC4 while the other end is not BLUE alarm the port goes into BLUE alarm when it receives all unframed 1s on all timeslots from the remote switch This is a special signal to indicate that the remote switch is having problem with its upstream connection Cannot start up Other operations are also available in interface status section e Click on O to refresh the interface status e Click on to expand the interface details e Click on to hide the interface details DIGITAL CHANNELS STATUS This section displays the status of the digital trunks on the UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 279 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Digital Channels Status Figure 153 Digital Channels Status Table 101 Digital Channel Status Indicators Voice Channel Not available 5 Connected and in talking status or incorrect configuration Connected and in idle status Connected and in ringing sta
111. Figure 19 UCM6510 Network Interface Method Dual 802 1X IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based network access control It provides an authentication mechanism to device before the device is allowed to access Internet or other LAN resources The UCM6510 supports 802 1X as a supplicant client to be authenticated The following diagram and figure show UCM6510 uses 802 1X mode EAP MD5 on WAN port as client in the network to access Internet Authenticator Authentication server Switch WAN port connected to Switch UCM6510 Figure 20 UCM6510 Using 802 1X as Client Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 49 of 317 GRANDSTREAM Settings gt gt Network Settings gt gt 802 1X gt 802 1X Settings 802 1 Mode EAP MD5S Identity 8021xUCM6510 J MD5S Password Figure 21 UCM6510 Using 802 1X EAP MD5 The following table shows the configuration parameters for 802 1X on UCM6510 Identity and MD5 password are required for authentication which should be provided by the network administrator obtained from the RADIUS server If EAP TLS or EAP PEAPvO MSCHAFPVv2 is used as the 802 1X mode users will also need upload 802 1X CA Certificate and 802 1X Client Certificate which should be also generated from the RADIUS server Table 9 UCM6510 Network Settings gt 802 1X Select 802 1X mode The default setting is Disable The supported 802 1X mode are 802 1X Mode e E
112. Figure 87 Digital Hardware Configuration ccccccsscccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeecseeeceeeseaeueeeeessaeeeesessaaeeeeeessaneeeees 147 Figure 88 Troubleshooting Digital Trunks rrrnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrovrrnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnsssennnnnnsnee 159 AE ENN NPR 161 Figure 90 Data Trunk Configuration rrnrrrenrrnnnnnrvrrrnnnnnvennrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnnrennnnnsnssnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnee 161 Figure 91 DOD extension selection ccccccseseecceeeeeecceeseecceuseeccseueeecseuseeessuseeessageeeesauseesssaueesssaneeesseass 174 FU 92r EO DOD see ei e teniidatditenitaw R R tutes teealimezantatuementatemiansuteadecatd 174 FE OLA aO md eee 175 Figure 94 Enable SLA Mode for Analog TrunK rrrrrrnnnnnrrnrrnnnnrrrvrrnnnnnrnnnrnnnnrrnnnnnnnnnrennnnnsnsennnnnnsssrnnnnnnsnee 176 Figure 95 Analog Trunk with SLA Mode Enabled ronnnnrrnrrnnnrnrnvrrnnnnnvnnnrnnnnnrnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnee 176 Figure 96 SLA Example SLA Station ccccccccccssseeeceeseeeccesseeecsaeeecceseeecsageeessageeeeeesesessageessseneeeessags 177 Figure 97 SLA Example MPK Conigu llbhasssveesravrrvreesrv eee 177 Figure 98 Inbound Route feature Prepend ccccccccsssscccceeseecceeseeeceeseeeseaseeecsaaeeeeseseeessageeessanseesseass 185 Figure 99 Blacklist Configuration ParaMetelrS cccccccsseececceeseeeceeeeeeeseueeeeceaeeeesseseeeeseaeeeessaneeessaneeeesaaes 185 Figure 100 Conferenc
113. GRANDSTREAM bGO NMNEGTIING THE WwWOoRE GO Grandstream Networks Inc UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual lt GRANDSTREAM UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Index CHANGE LOG i avanananananannnnnnnnsnananananansnsnsnsnsnnsnannannnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 16 FIRMWARE VERSION 1 0 2 7 c cccccccccccecccccccececucucucucuecacuauaucueuavacuauausueuetacuavausucuavacuauaususuenecuananseenes 16 FIRMWARE VERSION 1 0 2 5 c cccccccccccecccececececuccacsceuececuauaesueueneceauaesusneneauusesusuenenuauaususneneaeansnsnsnes 16 FIRMWARE VERSION 1 0 1 12 c cccccccececececececuccccscecececuauacauetececuauaesueteneauavaesustenecuansusususneaeansnsusnes 17 FIRMWARE VERSION 1 0 0 25 cccccccecscecececccucccececececuauacsueuenecuauaususneneauavaesusuenenuanaesusneneatansesusnes 18 WELCOME wiiwiccdicccccvccnececcceceiesccecearecccevacccccucanweceenivediaceaswaceewacecdexecwscccexive 19 PRODUCT OVERVIEW uu cccccccnccccccccncccnncccncecnccenneucnueenneuunuennueunneeuneuennees 21 FEATURE HIGHTLIGHTS aeteicrcece ciceeeeceseeciecnccttcees oveciecehewcaiocaeenanineceice cai aaee via ctenien acieaae pean betdieraatieds saamendceiesaseaeienes 21 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 00 0 cc cece cc cccccccccccecececececcacaceceuececuaeaeauauececuavaesuauenecucuatsusuaneeausnstsusneneas 21 INSTALLATION suannonnnennnennnnnnnnsnsssunnnunnssnnnsvnnsnnsssnnnsnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnunnnunnnn 25 FOUPNMENT PACKA ON G se 25 CONNECT YOUR UCM6510
114. INFO message will be used If DTMF Mode Inband is selected 64 kbit codec PCMU and PCMA are required When Auto is selected RFC2833 will be used if offered otherwise Inband will be used e Port Allow peers matching by IP address without matching port number e Very Allow peers matching by IP address without matching port number Also authentication of incoming INVITE messages is not Insecure required e No Normal IP based peers matching and authentication of incoming INVITE The default setting is Port l If enabled empty SDP packet will be sent to the SIP server periodically to Enable Keep alive er keep the NAT port open The default setting is Yes K ive F Configure the number of seconds for the host to be up for Keep alive The eep alive Frequenc default setting is 60 seconds If the end device phone has an assigned PSTN telephone number this field should be set to User Phone Then a User Phone parameter will TEL URI be attached to the Request Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E 164 number If set to Enable Tel will be used instead of SIP in the SIP request The default setting is disabled Other Settings SRTP Enable SRTP for the call The default setting is No Fax Mode Select Fax mode for this user The default setting is None Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 128 of 317 Strategy Skip Trunk Auth
115. INGS Table 95 Announcements Center Settings Configure a name for the newly created Announcements Center for Name l identify this announcement center Enter a code number for the custom prompt This code will be used in combination with the group number For example if the code is 55 and group number is 666 The user can dial 55666 to send prompt 55 to all members in group 666 Code Note The combination number must not conflict with any number in the system such as extension number or conference number This option is to set a custom prompt as an announcement to notify group Custom Prompt members The file can be uploaded from page Custom Prompt Click Prompt to add additional record Configure the ring timeout for the group members The default value is 30 Ring Timeout seconds GROUP SETTINGS Table 96 Group Settings Name Configure a name for the newly created group to identify the group Configure the group number The group number is used in combination with the code For example if group number is 666 and code is 55 The Number user can dial 55666 to send prompt 55 to all members in group 666 Note Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 270 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD The combination number must not conflict with any number in the system such as extension number or conference number Announcements Center feature can be found under web Ul gt PBX gt Value added Features
116. IP RTP port configuration on the firewall If selected the trunk will be disabled Note If a current SIP trunk is disabled UCM6510 will send UNREGISTER message REGISTER message with expires 0 to the SIP provider If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number this field should be set to User Phone Then a User Phone parameter will be attached to the Request Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E 164 number If set to Enable Tel will be used instead of SIP in the SIP request The default setting is disabled Configure the Caller ID This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls For some providers it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored When making outgoing calls the following rules are used to determine which CallerID will be used if they exist e The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first e f no CallerID configured for the extension the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used e If the above two are missing the Global Outbound CID defined in Web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt General will be used Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk for SIP trunk only The default setting is disabled The recording files can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR
117. IP is used for the interface Preferred DNS Server Enter the preferred DNS server address If Preferred DNS is configured the Method Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 44 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD UCM6510 will use it as Primary DNS server WAN when Method is set to Route IP Method IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 User Name Password Layer 2 QoS 802 1Q VLAN Tag Layer 2 QoS 802 1p Priority Value Select DHCP Static IP or PPPoE The default setting is DHCP Enter the IP address for static IP settings The default setting is 192 168 0 160 Enter the subnet mask address for static IP settings The default setting is 255 255 0 0 Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings The default setting is 0 0 0 0 Enter the DNS server 1 address for static IP settings The default setting is 0 0 0 0 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE Enter the password to connect via PPPoE Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for WAN port The default value is 0 Assign the priority value of the layer 2 QoS packets for WAN port The default value is O LAN when Method is set to Route IP Address Subnet Mask DHCP Server Enable DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Allow IP Address From Allow IP Address To Default IP Lease Time Enter the IP address assigned to LAN por
118. January 23 2013 00 00 00 UTC to extensions 5300 5309 with results in CSV format https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi caller 53 amp callee 5300 5309 amp endTime 2013 01 23 OR https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi caller 53 amp callee 530_ amp endTime 2013 01 23T00 00 00 Query 4 Request all records of calls placed by an Anonymous caller during July 2013 Central Standard Time to extensions starting with 2 or 34 or ending with 5 with results in CSV format https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi caller Anonymous amp callee 2 34 5 amp startTime 2013 07 01T00 00 00 06 00 amp endTime 2013 07 31723 59 59 06 00 Query 5 Request all records during July 2013 Central Standard Time 200 at a time with results in CSV format https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi startTime 2013 07 01T700 00 00 06 00 amp endTime 2013 07 311723 59 59 06 00 amp numRecords 200 amp offset 0 THEN https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi sstartTime 2013 07 01T00 00 00 06 00 amp endTime 2013 07 31 T23 59 59 0 6 00 amp numRecords 200 amp offset 200 THEN https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi startTime 2013 07 01T700 00 00 06 00 amp endTime 2013 07 311723 59 59 06 00 amp numRecords 200 amp offset 400 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 297 of 317 GRANDSTREAM NNECTING fT e Disallowed characters in the caller callee startTime or endTime strings and non digit characters in the values of numRecords offset minDur or maxDur w
119. LDAP config g Figure 80 Email To User LDAP Client Information and QR Code Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 135 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 136 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE Wr Ga Pe ae ee ANALOG TRUNKS To set up analog trunk on the UCM6510 e Goto web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Analog Trunks to add and edit analog trunks e Go to web GUI gt PBX gt Ports Config gt Analog Hardware to configure analog hardware settings ANALOG TRUNKS CONFIGURATION Go to web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Analog Trunks to add and edit analog trunks e Click on Create New Analog Trunk to add a new analog trunk e Clickon to edit the analog trunk e Clickon todelete the analog trunk The analog trunk options are listed in the table below Table 45 Analog Trunk Configuration Parameters Channels Select the channel for the analog trunk Specify a unique label to identify the trunk when listed in outbound routes Trunk Name inbound routes and etc Enable this option to satisfy two primary use cases which include SLA Mode emulating a simple key system and creating shared extensions on a PBX Enable SLA Mode will disable polarity reversal The barge option specifies whether or not other stations are allowed to join Barge Allowed a Call in progress o
120. N 2 address e Network 192 168 66 0 has IP phones registered to UCM6510 via VPN e Network 192 168 40 0 has VPN connection established with network 192 168 66 0 In this network by default the IP phones in network 192 168 69 0 are unable to call IP phones in network 192 168 66 0 when registered on different interfaces on the UCM6510 Therefore we need configure a Static route on the UCM6510 so that the phones in isolated networks can make calls between each other Create New Static Route Destination 192 168 66 0 Netmask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 40 3 G Interface LANZ v Figure 23 UCM6510 Static Route Configuration Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 52 of 317 PORT FORWORDING gt GRANDSTREAM The UCM6510 network interface supports router functions which provides users the ability to do port forwarding If the UCM6510 is set to Route under web GUI gt Settings gt Network Settings gt Basic Settings Method port forwarding is available for configuration The port forwarding configuration is under web GUI gt Settings gt Network Settings gt Port Forwarding page Please see related settings in the table below WAN Port LAN IP LAN Port Protocol Type Table 11 UCM6510 Network Settings gt Port Forwarding Specify the WAN port number or a range of WAN ports Up to 8 ports can be configured Note When it is set to a range WAN port and LAN port must be configured with the
121. N fields for different contacts If the phonebook DN already exists on the UCM6510 LDAP Phonebook the contacts in the CSV file will be added into the existing phonebook If the phonebook DN doesn t exist on the UCM6510 LDAP Phonebook a new phonebook with this phonebook DN will be created The sample phonebook CSV file in above picture will result in the following LDAP phonebook in the UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 65 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD LDAP Phonebook Add Import Phonebook Export Selected Phonebook Note The first phone book is for extensions in this PBX The contacts cannot be added or deleted directly To add or delete the contacts please modify the accounts in Extensions page first To modify the read only attributes please edit the corresponding items in Extension page and the phone book will be automatically updated when the change is saved and applied Users can add other phone books for external accounts For those phone books users can edit LDAP attributes add or delete contacts directly View 5 v ou pbx dc pbx dc com ou phonebook dc pbx dc com ou others dc pbx dc com Total 3 Show 1 1 cor Figure 38 LDAP Phonebook After Import As the default LDAP phonebook with DN ou pbx dc pbx dc com cannot be edited or deleted in LDAP phonebook section users cannot import contacts with Phonebook DN field pbx if existed in the CSV fil
122. ND INTERCOM GROUP nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnennnnnnnnennnnnnneennn 213 CONFIGURE PAGING INTERCOM GROUP ssssssssssesssossessssteessssseessstseesstsessssseessstecessteeeesseeeesnee 213 ELLE hr 215 CONFIGURE CALL QUEUE o 0 ssssssssssssssssssessssssesssssssesstseessssssesstssssstseesssiseesstsessssseeesssecesaneneensieseseee 215 EXTENSION GROUPS ven 219 CONFIGURE EXTENSION GROUPS ssccsssssssssossesssstsessssseessstssssssseesssiseesstseesssseeesstecessteneesnieeeseee 219 USE EXTENSION GROUPS ssssssssssssesssssessssseeessssssesssseesssisecsstssesstsesssissssstseessniesessteseesneesessseeeen 219 PICKUP 210 0 2c ne 221 CONFIGURE PICKUP GROUPS ssssssssssessssssessossesesstssesssssessstsessstssessssseesstseesssseesssieeesateeeesnieeeesee 221 CONFIGURE PICKUP FEATURE CODE sssssssssessssssssssssesssstesesstsessssissesstseesssseesssteeessteneenseeeeseee 221 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 4 of 317 CONNECTING THE WORL MUSIC ON HOLD oies ririn AEE E A 223 FANN 225 CONFIGURE FAX T 38 ssssesssssesssssscssssessssscessnecessssecsnsceesnscessncessnecesnssessnscessneeesnueeesnesessnecessneeesseeen 225 SAMPLE CONFIGURATION TO RECEIVE FAX FROM PSTN LINE csssssessssstesesssesessseeeessneseeeee 226 SAMPLE CONFIGURATION FOR FAX TO EMAIL cssssssssssessssesssseeesnecessnecessssessnsessnecessnecesneseen 228 ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE RESTRICTED ACCESS 229 FEL ME vn 231
123. NT LIST BLF The UCM6510 supports BLF monitoring for extensions ring group call queue conference room and parking lot For example on the user s phone configure the parking lot number 701 as the BLF monitored number When there is a parked call on 701 the LED for this BLF key will light up in red meaning a call is parked against this parking lot Pressing this BLF key can pick up the call from this parking lot A Note e Onthe Grandstream GXP phones the MPK supports Call Park mode which is normally used to park the call by configuring the MPK number as call park feature code e g 700 Users could also use Call Park mode to monitor and pick up the call on this parking lot by configuring the MPK number as parking lot number e g 701 EVENT LIST Besides BLF users can also configure the phones to monitor event list By using event list local extensions on the same UCM6510 or remote extensions on the VOIP trunk can be monitored The event list settings is under web GUl gt Call Features gt Event List e Click on Create New Event List to add a new event list e Click on to edit the event list configuration e Clickon to delete the event list Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 239 of 317 GRANDSTREAM NNECTIN 8 Create New Event List GI URI i Local Extensions G Remote Extensions G Special Extensions URI Local Extensions Remote Extensions Special Extensions
124. NTERNAL OPTIONS GENERAL Table 82 Internal Options General General Preferences Configure the global CallerID used for all outbound calls when no other Global OutBound CID CallerID is defined with higher priority If no CallerlD is defined for extension or trunk the global outbound CID will be used as CallerID Configure the global CallerID Name used for all outbound calls If Global OutBound CID Name configured all outbound calls will have the CallerID Name set to this name If not the extension s CallerID Name will be used Specify the operator extension which will be dialed when users presses 0 Operator Extension to exit voicemail application The operator extension can also be used in IVR option Configure the number of seconds to ring an extension before the call goes to the user s voicemail box The default setting is 60 Ring Timeout Note This is the global value used for each extension if Ring Timeout field is left empty on the extension configuration page If enabled users will hear voice prompt before recording is started or Record Prompt stopped For example before recording the UCM6510 will play voice prompt The call will be recorded The default setting is No Extension Preferences If enabled strong password will be enforced for the password created on the UCM6510 The default setting is enabled Enforce Strong Passwords Strong Password Rules 1 Password for voicemail voicemail group outbound rou
125. ONERE T DAL irasra oo ae 233 IT EN end oss E E ET KE 235 CALLBACK FEA URE eer Pe eer en nena ease en eee nnmnnn nnmnnn 237 BLT IND EVENT LS TE 239 BLF esken bane sseduniccnon sveriexagtapeconeesedendinenna ondiexaghpeconespeteadiaenadientlorach amen 239 EVENT LIST esccssssccsssscssssccssssecssssecsussessuscessuseessasecssscessuscessaseessasecsuscessaseessaseessacessaneessaseessaseesnatersasses 239 DARBY NAME ne 243 DIAL BY NAME CONFIGURATION ssssesssssessssseesssseesssecessscesssceesnscessnecesnuecesnssessnscessnesesnnesestsses 243 ACTIVE CALLS AND MONITOR nrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnr 247 ROTINE GAS E TATU S cesses ntact cesta cea bed cede cOder chute cenhdeteenndshearbadee 247 HANG UP ACTIVE CALLS ccsssscsssssssssesesssecessseesssscessnscessnscesnnscesnseessnscessnscessneeessssessnscessnesesnnesesteses 248 GET 6 0 EE 248 GE TE geeceieeeies E ASE 251 FEATURE CODES ecccssssscsssseccsssecssssessusecssusecsssecsuseessussessaseessasecsuseessuseessasesssasessuacessuseessaseesnasessasses 251 CALL RECORDING eeccsssesssssesssssesesnseessnseessnscesnsscesnseessnscessuecessncesnseessnscesnnesesauecesnseesanesessuesesneeees 254 MM 255 L 255 RETRIEVE THE PARKED CALL 0nrrrrrrvrrrrrsssrrrssserssssrssssersssserssssrrssseressserssssersssseressserssseressseresenn 255 EINES A 256 INTERNAL OP HONS Luer 257 INTERNAL OPTIONS GENERAL csssssssssessossessssseessnssessnecessnscesnseeesnscessnscesanecess
126. OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online The default setting is 60 seconds The maximum number of concurrent calls using the trunk The default settings 0 which means no limite Select Fax mode The default setting is None e None Disable Fax e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 Enable SRTP for the VoIP trunk The default setting is No CC Settings Enable CC CC Max Agents CC Max Monitors If enabled the system will automatically alert the user when a called party is available given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated for this channel In other words this number serves as the maximum number of CC requests this channel is allowed to make The minimum value is 1 Configure the maximum number of monitor structures which may be created for this device In other words this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time The minimum value is 1 Table 58 SIP Peer Trunk Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Provider Name Host Name Transport
127. Options gt Language The dropdown list shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6510 To add more languages in the list please download voice prompt package by selecting Check Prompt List under web UI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Language Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to the extension when putting the active on hold UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 118 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE Ww te eo Table 36 IAX Extension Configuration Parameters Media Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for each remote IP Max Number of Calls dd address Configure to enable disable requiring call token If set to Auto it might lock out users who depend on backward compatibility when peer Require Call Token oa l l authentication credentials are shared between physical endpoints The default setting is Yes SRTP Enable SRTP for the call The default setting is disabled Select Fax Mode The default setting is None e None Disable Fax This is the default setting e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 This option controls how the extension can be used on
128. PORT ING sarte 273 ill ane e S E A E E E EA E E E AR 273 SEE ER 273 NE Ne 274 EE a E E ee eee ee 276 CONFERENCE ROOMS ests cstctereszeesatesseinnp ede stnabntikcnadehaexdeststsieadecirgeteteiandieandaseelenpadstdarardetbe 276 NEDSLITTE 277 NE NN 279 NN 280 SEEE e E E E E E E 281 EL 282 FUN 282 SOE USAC ENE 283 RESOURCE EEE 283 SYSTEM EVENTS o cecssessssssssssssscssneesnscesneesnsesnscesnsesnscesnsesnscennsesnscesnsesnsesneeesneesneeensesneeesnsesneeeneeenesee 284 METTET Tr 284 ME 286 EE EEE EEE 288 OOR 2 288 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 6 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM DE 291 TN 293 RECORDING FILE ce a ee ee ee cee er ee 293 CDR API CONFIGURATION FILES csscsssssssessssessecssessscssuesestesssesssesssesnscsneteratesatecatenaneeasensaes 294 UPGRADING AND MAINTENANCE rennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 301 FN hhv 301 UPGRADING VIA NETWORK rnrrrrvrrrvrnrersrnssrnssenssrssrrssrrsserssrrssressenssensserssersserssersserssrsssrnssensnnn 301 UPGRADING VIA LOCAL UPLOAD nrrrrvrnrnrnvrssvnssrrssrrssrrssrrsssrsssressenssrnssersserssersserssrrsserssrnssensnnn 302 NO LOCAL FIRMWARE EEE 304 Pave 304 GO EEE 305 MIN 306 RESTORE CONFIGURATION FROM BACKUP FILE s sssesseesseesseessessssssssesesnsennsenneenneenneenneeen 307 NE ENE 308 RESET AND REBOOT EEE 309 SO EEE EE 310 TEN NN 311 ETHERNET ON EEE NN 311 Pep 311 TRACEROUTE EEE EEE NS 312 PRI SS7 MFC R2 SIGNALING TRA CE EE EE 313 Kolei 50
129. Policy Categories Select the checkbox on the left of the parameter you would like to configure to active the dropdown list for this parameter The following tables list the Global Policy configuration parameters for the SIP end device Table 23 Global Policy Parameters Localization Language settings Language Select the LCD display language on the SIP end device Date and Time Date Format Configure the date display format on the SIP end device s LCD l Configure the time display in 12 hour or 24 hour format on the SIP end Time Format l device s LCD Configure the URL or IP address of the NTP server The SIP end device NTP Server l may obtain the date and time from the server Time Zone Configure the time zone used on the SIP end device Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 87 of 317 SRANDSTREAM Table 24 Global Policy Parameters Phone Settings Dial PI Configure the default dial plan rule For syntax and examples please refer ial Plan to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details When enabled Do Not Disturb Call Forward and other call features Enable Call Features can be used via the local feature code on the phone Otherwise the ITSP feature code will be used l If set to Yes pressing the number key will immediately dial out the Use as Dial Key l vr input digits If set to Yes the phone will automatically turn on the speaker phone
130. Remote Party ID should be sent or not The default setting is No Configure whether the UCM6510 should generate inband ringing or not The default setting is Never e Yes The UCM6510 will send 180 Ringing followed by 183 Session Progress and in band audio e No The UCM6510 will send 180 Ringing if 183 Session Progress has not been sent yet If audio path is established already with 183 then send in band ringing e Never Whenever ringing occurs the UCM6510 will send 180 Ringing as long as 2000K has not been set yet Inband ringing will not be generated even the end point device is not working properly Configure the user agent string for the UCM6510 If enabled compact SIP headers will be sent The default setting is No If enabled user phone will be added to URI that contains a valid phone number The default setting is No UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 268 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD VALUE ADDED FEATURES FAX SENDING The UCM6510 supports sending Fax via web Ul access This feature can be found on web Ul gt PBX gt Value added Features gt Fax Sending page In order to send fax pre setup for analog trunk and outbound route is required After making sure analog trunk or VolP Trunk is setup properly and UCM6510 can reach out to PSTN numbers via the trunk on Fax Sending page enter the fax number and upload the file to be faxed Then click on Send to start The progress of sending fax will be
131. Retry the host is banned The default setting is 10 Please make sure this option is properly configured as it will override the MaxRetry value under Global Settings CHANGE PASSWORD After logging in the web GUI for the first time it is highly recommended for users to change the default password admin to a more complicated password for security purpose Follow the steps below to change the web GUI access password 1 Go to web GUl gt Settings gt Change Password page 2 Enter the old password first 3 Enter the new password and retype the new password to confirm The new password has to be at least 4 characters The maximum length of the password is 16 characters 4 Click on Save and the user will be automatically logged out 5 Once the web page comes back to the login page again enter the username admin and the new password to login LDAP SERVER The UCM6510 has an embedded LDAP server for users to manage corporate phonebook in a centralized manner e By default the LDAP server has generated the first phonebook with PBX DN ou pbx dc pbx dc com based on the UCM6510 user extensions already e Users could add new phonebook with a different Phonebook DN for other external contacts For example ou people dc pbx dc com e All the phonebooks in the UCM6510 LDAP server have the same Base DN dc pbx dc com e cn ou and dc are parts of LDAP data Interchange Format accordin
132. SCOVEred DEVICES Lade 86 Global Policy Categories Langes v0 obaee nacdenaewasencesal ag vicdocatacdpecu taceteawsederaceuss iene 87 Ei Global Template asta cacaccistsadeaaesirocsgiecindsadcsassaecteecwaleadnaedeacsatenticcdvactteete A i Ra ei dR nR Ei 94 o 168114 910 09 EEE 97 Template Management EEE reenn 98 Create New Device cccccccsssseccccceeseeceeeceuseecececsaaeeceescsaaeeeesseaaeeeeessaueeeeessaueeeessuaaseeeesssanseeees 99 Manage Devices eciiswcevnaniasscnsdaeenancriunrentacanasinandanaucidawanenctiwssandstaiessnaysnerenidansacnettiencendatacsveausnaceaudaus 99 Edl DOVII bn 100 Edit Customize Device SettinGS ccccccccsseeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaceeeessaaseeeeesaaeseeesesaaess 102 Add P Value in Customize Device Settings ccccccsceeccceecseseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeeeceeessaeeeeeeeesaeeeees 103 Modify Selected Devices Same Model ccccccsseeecceceeeeeeceeecueeeeeeceueuseeeessaaeeeeeessaaeeeeessaaages 104 Modify Selected Devices Different MOdelS ccccccssseeeececseseeeeecseauseeeeesueaeceeeeseaeeeeessaaaees 105 Device List in NN 106 Zero Config Sample Global POlicy rrrrnnrnrnnrnnnnnnvvnnnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnsrnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnnnsenn 107 Zero Config Sample Device Preview 1 rrrrrrnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnnvnvrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnrrennnnnnnnrnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsenn 108 Zero Config Sample Device Preview 2 rrrnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnvnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnsennn
133. SH G Action REJECT r G Type p G Interface 1 Service Figure 29 Create New Firewall Rule Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 57 of 317 5 GRANDSTREAM Table 14 Firewall Rule Settings Rule Name Specify the Firewall rule name to identify the firewall rule Select the action for the Firewall to perform Action rd e REJECT e DROP Select the traffic type e IN Type If selected users will need specify the network interface LAN WAN or Both for the incoming traffic e OUT Select the service type e FTP e SSH e Telnet e TFTP Service e HTTP e LDAP e Custom If selected users will need specify Source IP and port Destination IP and port and Protocol TCP UDP or Both for the service Please note if the source or the destination field is left blank it will be used as Anywhere The new rule will be listed at the bottom of the page with sequence number rule name action protocol type source destination and operation Users can click on to edit the rule or click on to delete the rule Save the change and reboot the device for the configuration to take effect DYNAMIC DEFENSE Dynamic defense can blacklist hosts dynamically when the UCM6510 is set to Route under web GUI gt Settings gt Network Settings gt Basic Settings Method If enabled the traffic via TCP connection coming into the UCM6510 can be monitored which helps prevent
134. Server 192 168 40 184 Outbound Proxy SIP User ID 1005 Authenticate ID 1005 Authenticate Password admini English Support Template voicemail User ID 97 6 Global Templates Selected Spanish Support Template Default Model Template Localization Available Language Settings Selected Language Date and Time a Global Policy Date Format P Modify Global Policy Time Format 24 Hour Clock Figure 72 Zero Config Sample Device Preview 2 Select Spanish Support Template in Model Template The preview of the device settings is displayed on the right side and we can see the language is set to Espa ol since Model Template has the higher priority for the option Language which overrides the value configured in default model template 9 For the GXV3275 used by the customer support supervisor select an available extension for account 1 on Basic settings and click on Save Users can see the preview of the device configuration in Advanced settings There is no model template configured for GXV3275 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 109 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Fdit Device 000B82642EEO Modify Customize Settings a Model Templates Accounts Available Account 1 Account Active Yes Account Name 1008 SIP Server 192 168 40 77 Outbound Proxy SIP User ID 1008 Authenticate IO 1008 Authenticate Password admini Unavailable Vo
135. THER PARTIES TO JOIN CONFERENCE esseccssseessvssesssssessssssesssssesssssteesssesessseeessee 189 DURING THE CONFERENCE innoorrrvsvrrvrsssrrrrsvsrrresssrsessrrresssrreessrrressseresssereesssereessereessrresssenen 190 RECORD CONFERENCE T 191 NN O 193 CONFIGURE I EEE 193 CREATE IVR PROMPT scsssssessssssesssssesssssssesssssessssssssstsesestssessstsesssnseessstssesstsessssieessstesessteeeesseeeeesee 195 RECORD NEW IVR PROMPT ccsssscssssesessvssessssssesssssesssssseessssesssssessssssessssiesessiesssniseessivesesieeeesee 195 UPLOAD IVR 21 01 2 EEE ieteasdecteses aphcatbiaacd 196 LANGUAGE SETTINGS FOR VOICE PROMPT cccccccssssssseeeseeeees 197 DOWNLOAD AND INSTALL VOICE PROMPT PACKAGE csssssesssssesssssessssessssesssstesesssecesseeeesteces 197 VEL 201 CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL sssssessssssessossessssssesssssesesstseesstssessstsessstseesssiseesstsessssseesssteetssteeeessseeeseee 201 NOSSA ON 202 VOICEMAIL EMAIL SETTINGS ssssscssssssessossessssssecssstssesstsesssstssssstssessssssesstsessstseesssiesessteeeesneeeeeee 203 CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL GROUP sssssessssssessossesssstseesssseessstseesstseesssissesstsessssseessstecesnseeeesseeessee 205 EN GROP re 207 CONFIGURE RING GROUP sssssssssssesssssessosssesssssssesstseessssssesstsessstseessstesesstsessssieessstecessseeeesneeeessee 207 REMOTE EXTENSION IN RING GROUP sssssssssssssssssesssssessssteesssssesssssssesstsesssiesesstecessseneeesseeeen 209 PAGING A
136. UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 287 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD ALERT CONTACT Users could add administrator s Email address under web GUI gt Status gt System Events gt Alert Contact to send the alert notification to Up to 10 Email addresses can be added CDR A Call Detail Record CDR is a data record produced by telephone exchange activities or other telecommunications equipment documenting the details of a phone call that passed through the PBX The CDR is composed of the following data fields on the UCM6510 e Start Time Format 2013 03 27 16 47 03 e Call From Format John Doe lt 6012 gt e Call To Format 6005 e Call Time Format 0 00 10 e Talk Time Format 0 00 10 e Status Format NO ANSWER BUSY ANSWERED or FAILED e Options Voice record playing downloading deleting Users could filter the call report by specifying the date range and criteria depending on how the users would like to include the logs to the report Then click on View Report button to display the generated report Call Detail Report gs gs Inbound Trunks sipustest1 Outbound Trunks sipustest1 test peer test peer G Inbound calls G Outbound calls Start Time End Time Internal calls Caller Number Caller Name External calls eai Callee Number Download Search Result s Download All Records Figure 166 CDR Filter Table 105 CDR Filter Criteria Inbound calls Inbound calls are calls ori
137. UI configuration interface e The LCD displays hardware software and network information Users could also navigate in the LCD menu for device information and basic network configuration e The LED indication at the front of the device provides interface connection and activity status e The web GUI gives users access to all the configurations and options for UCM6510 setup This section provides step by step instructions on how to use the LCD menu LED indicators and web GUI of the UCM6510 Once the basic settings are done users could start making calls from UCM6510 extension registered on a SIP phone as described at the end of this section USE THE LCD MENU e Default LCD Display By default when the device is powered up the LCD will show device model e g UCM6510 hardware version e g V1 4A and IP address Press Down button and the system time will be displayed e g 2014 10 21 14 20 e Menu Access Press OK button to start browsing menu options Please see menu options in Table 3 LCD Menu Options e Menu Navigation Press the Down arrow key to browser different menu options Press the OK button to select an entry e Exit If Back option is available in the menu select it to go back to the previous menu For Device Info Network Info and Web Info which do not have Back option simply press the OK button to go back to the previous menu Additionally the LCD will disp
138. User Manual Page 251 of 317 Audio Mix Record GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Options Disable Allow Caller Enable the feature code on caller side only Allow Callee Enable the feature code on callee side only Allow Both Enable the feature code on both caller and callee Default code 3 Enter the code followed by or SEND to start recording the audio call and the UCM6510 will mix the streams natively on the fly as the call is in progress Options Disable Allow Caller Enable the feature code on caller side only Allow Callee Enable the feature code on callee side only Allow Both Enable the feature code on both caller and callee DND Call Forward Do Not Disturb DND Activate Do Not Disturb DND Deactivate Call Forward Busy Activate Call Forward Busy Deactivate Call Forward No Answer Activate Call Forward No Answer Deactivate Call Forward Unconditional Activate Call Forward Unconditional Deactivate Default code 77 Default code 78 Default Code 90 Enter the code and follow the voice prompt Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call Default Code 91 Default Code 92 Enter the code and follow the voice prompt Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call Default Code 93 Default Code 72 Enter the code and follow the voice prompt Or enter the code followed by the extension to forward the call Default Code 73 Feature
139. WORLD The line build out LBO is the distance between the operators and the PBX Please use the default value 0dB unless the distance is long Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of digital port The valid range is from 24dB to 12dB Configure the TX Gain for the transmitting channel of digital port The valid range is 24dB to 12dB Select alaw or ulaw If set to default alaw will be used for E1 Advanced Settings Frame Coding CRC Called Nature of Address Indicator Calling Nature of Address Indicator D chan International Prefix National Prefix Subscriber Prefix Unknown Prefix Select HDB3 or AMI Select whether to use CRC4 or not Indicates the type of the called number The receiving switch may use this indicator during translations to apply the number s proper dial plan Users can select Unknown Subscriber National International or Dynamic Indicates the type of the calling number The receiving switch may use this indicator during translations to apply the number s proper dial plan Users can select Unknown Subscriber National International or Dynamic Indicates the D channel for control Configure the prefix in Called Nature of Address Indicator and Calling Nature of Address Indicator for each type Table 50 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 MFC R2 Basic Settings Clock Variant Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 All E1 T1 J1 spans generate a clo
140. X that the SIP end device will request for new firmware every X minutes Specify how firmware upgrading and provisioning request to be sent Configure the administrator password for admin level login Configure the end user password for the end user level login Select HTTP or HTTPS as the web access protocol Configure the port for web access The valid range is 1 to 65535 Enable Telnet SSH access for the SIP end device If the SIP end device UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 91 of 317 Syslog Server Syslog Level Send SIP Log IP Address Layer 3 QoS Layer 2 QoS Tag Layer 2 QoS Priority Value STUN Server Keep Alive Interval Screen Resolution 1024 x 600 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM supports Telnet access this option controls the Telnet access of the device if the SIP end device supports SSH access this option controls the SSH access of the device Configure the URL IP address for the syslog server Select the level of logging for syslog Configure whether the SIP log will be included in the syslog message Table 27 Global Policy Parameters Network Settings Configure how the SIP end device shall obtain the IP address DHCP or PPPoE can be selected e DHCP Once selected users can specify the Host Name option 12 of the SIP end device as DHCP client and Vendor Class ID option 60 used by the client and server to exchange vendor class ID information e PPPoE Once selected users need s
141. al Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated for this channel In other words this number serves as the maximum CC Max Agents l number of CC requests this channel is allowed to make The minimum value is 1 Configure the maximum number of monitor structures which may be i created for this device In other words this number tells how many callers CC Max Monitors l Ja i l NE may request CC services for a specific device at one time The minimum value Is 1 Ring Simultaneously Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along EE EE with the extension If a register trunk is used for outbound the register i imu u number will be used to be displayed for the external number as caller ID number Set the external number to be rang simultaneously is the connection External Number l l character which will be ignored Time Condition for Ring Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the Simultaneously basis of this time condition Other Settings Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail voicemail is enabled or hang up voicemail is disabled If not specified the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6510 which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting Ring Timeout under web GUI gt Internal Options gt IVR Prompt General Preference The valid range is betwe
142. allowed For example 192 168 40 3 255 255 255 255 denies access from all IP addresses except 192 168 40 3 The format of the HTTPS request for the CDR API is as below https UCM IP Port cdrapi option1 value amp option2 value amp Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 294 of 317 By default the port number for the API is 8443 SRANDSTREAM The options included in the request URI control the record matching and output format For CDR matching parameters all non empty parameters must have a match to return a record Parameters can appear in the URI in any order Multiple values given for caller or callee will be concatenated The following table shows the parameter list used in the CDR API Field format numRecords offset caller callee startTime endTime Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 108 CDR API URI Parameters Value csv xml json Number 0 1000 Number Comma separated extensions ranges of extensions or regular expressions Example caller 5300 5302 5304 4 OR caller 5300 amp caller 5302 5304 amp caller 4 Matches extensions 5300 5302 5303 5304 and any extension containing 4 as the second digit character Date and or time of day in any of the following formats YYYY MM DDTHH MM UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Details Define the format for output of matching CDR rows Default is csv comma separated values Number of re
143. alls Internal calls All calls External calls Figure 174 CDR Statistics Table 106 CDR Statistics Filter Criteria Trunk Type Select one of the following trunk type e All e SIP Calls e PSTN Calls Call Type Select one or more in the following checkboxes e Inbound calls e Outbound calls e Internal calls e External calls e All calls Time Range e By month of the selected year e By week of the selected year e By day of the specified month for the year e By hour of the specified date e By range For example 2013 01 To 2013 03 RECORDING FILES The recording files recorded by Auto Record per extension per trunk or via feature code Audio Mix Record are listed here Users could click on to play the recording file click on to download the recording file in wav format click on to delete the recording file or click on Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 293 of 317 Delete Selected Recording Files Delete All Recording Files click GRANDSTREAM to delete multiple recording files at one To sort the recording file click on the title Caller Callee or Call Time for the corresponding column Click on the title again can switch the sorting mode between ascending order and descending order CDR API CONFIGURATION FILES The UCM6510 supports third party billing interface API for external billing software to access CDR on the PBX The API uses HTTPS to request
144. and Firmware Source as follows Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 106 of 317 GRANDSTREAM INE GTV GEL Language Settings G Language Date and Time G Date Format GJ Time Zone Upgrade and Provision G Firmware Source Source URL Upgrade via HTTPS Server Path fm grandstream com gs File Prefix File Posfix Gi Allow DHCP Option 43 66 Figure 70 Zero Config Sample Global Policy Go to web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Model Templates create a new model template English Support Template for GXP2140 Add option Language and set it to English Then select the option Default Model Template to make it the default model template Go to web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Model Templates create another model template Spanish Support Template for GXP2140 Add option Language and set it to Espanol After 9 devices are powered up and connected to the LAN network use Auto Discover function or Create New Device function to add the devices to the device list on web UI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Zero Config On web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Zero Config page users could identify the devices by their MAC addresses or IP addresses displayed on the list Click on to edit the device settings Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 107 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD 7 For each of the 5 phon
145. apsulation Local IP Subnet Mask Remote IP DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 Default Interface Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM Table 55 Data Trunk Configuration Parameters Select the checkbox to enable disable data trunk Users can also click on the ON OFF switch in data trunk web page to enable disable this Select the digital channel group from the dropdown list to be used for data trunk Users will need create a new group under web UI gt PBX gt Ports Config gt Digital Hardware page for this purpose Select the protocol used for the data trunk The UCM6510 supports HDLC HDLC ETH PPP Cisco and Frame Relay Configure the local IP address for the data port This IP address shouldn t conflict with the WAN or LAN side IP of the UCM6510 Configure the subnet mask for the data port Configure the remote IP address for the data port This IP will be the gateway IP address if Default Interface is enabled for the datat trunk Configure DNS server 1 Configure DNS server 2 If enabled this data port will be used as the default interface for Internet connection The Remote IP will be the gateway IP address This has higher priority than the Default Interface assignment LAN 1 or LAN 2 under web Ul gt Settings if Dual is selected as the network method UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 162 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM VOIP TRUNKS VOIP TRUNK CONFIGURATION VoIP trunks can be configured in UCM651
146. are shown on the Call Queue page Click on Y to download the recording file in wav format click on to delete the recording file To delete multiple recording files by one click select several recording files to be deleted and click on Delete Selected Recording Files or click on Delete All Recording Files to delete all recording files Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 218 of 317 GRANDSTREAM NNECTIN 8 EXTENSION GROUPS The UCM6510 extension group feature allows users to assign extensions to different groups to better manage the configurations on the PBX For example when configuring Enable Filter on Source Caller ID users could select a group instead of each person s extension to assign This feature simplifies the configuration process and helps manage and categorize the extensions for business environment CONFIGURE EXTENSION GROUPS Extension group can be configured via web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Extension Groups e Click on Create New Extension Group to create a new extension group e Clickon to edit the extension group Select extensions from the list on the left side to the right side Edit Extension Group AccountingDept AccountingDept Available Extensions Selected Extensions E Q Figure 119 Edit Extension Group e Clickon U to delete the extension group USE EXTENSION GROUPS Here is an example where the extension group can be used Go to web
147. at the Grandstream device model it is It is divided into two levels e Web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Global Policy e Web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Global Templates e Global Templates configuration has higher priority to Global Policy configuration Global Policy can be accessed in web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Global Policy page On the top of the configuration table users can select category in the Options dropdown list to quickly navigate to the category The categories are e Localization configure display language data and time e Phone Settings configure dial plan call features NAT call progress tones and etc Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 86 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD e Contact List configure LDAP and XML phonebook download e Maintenance configure upgrading web access Telnet SSH access and syslog e Network Settings configure IP address QoS and STUN settings e Customization customize LCD screen wallpaper for the supported models Global Policy The selected configuration under Global Policy will be attempted to apply to all the devices if the model provides the matching configuration upgrade Maintenance Localization UTEGE and Provision Contact List Automatic UJELE Firmware MERE Rule Firmware Source Phone Settings Zero Config Allow DHCP Option 43 66 Maintenance Network Settings Customization Cancel Save Figure 58 Global
148. ate NER Allow DHCP Option Yes Unavailable 43 66 Figure 67 Modify Selected Devices Same Model If selected devices are of different models the configuration dialog is like the following figure Click on to view more devices of other models Users are only allowed to make modifications in Global Templates and Global Policy level Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 104 of 317 GRANDSTREAM BONNESTING THE WORLD Modify Selected Devices Advanced A Available only for single model A Available only for single model 4 Model Templates J Available only for single model Default Model Template A Available only for single model 2 Global Templates Available lvl Selected Figure 68 Modify Selected Devices Different Models A Warning Perform batch operation will override all the configurations made when editing a single device For example if the user configures a GXP2140 to use template TempA in Global Templates level by editing a single device and then selects several devices including that GXP2140 to batch modify devices selecting TempB in Global Templates level the user will see the global templates changed to TempB when viewing the configurations for the GXP2140 After the above configurations save the changes and go back to web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Zero Config page Users could then click on O to send NOTIFY to the SIP end point device and trig
149. atic route Example IP address 192 168 66 4 IP subnet 192 168 66 0 Configure the subnet mask for the above destination address If left blank the default value is 255 255 255 255 Example 255 255 255 0 Configure the gateway address so that the UCM6510 can reach the destination via this gateway Gateway address is optional Example 192 168 40 5 Specify the network interface LAN WAN or Data trunk 1 Data Trunk 1 option will show only when the data trunk is enabled on the UCM6510 to reach the destination using the static route The following diagram shows a sample application of static route usage on UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 51 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Network 192 168 66 0 192 168 66 238 l gt A VPN connection is established between network 192 168 40 0 and network 192 168 66 0 1 192 168 40 126 192 168 69 131 j lt LAN 1 192 168 69 91 d GXP1160 2 Network 192 168 69 0 UC M6510 Network settings method Dual mode LAN 1 connected to 192 168 69 0 network GXP2130 and GXP1160 LAN 2 connected to 192 168 40 0 network Call each other Figure 22 UCM6510 Static Route Sample The network topology of the above diagram is as below e Network 192 168 69 0 has IP phones registered to UCM6510 LAN 1 address e Network 192 168 40 0 has IP phones registered to UCM6510 LA
150. ation Press 3 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 4 Enable Destination Default Destination Press 5 Enable Destination Default Destination Settings PBX gt gt Call Features gt gt One Key Dial Extension Voicemail Conference Rooms Voicemail Group IVR Ring Group Queues Page Group Fax DISA Dial By Name External Number 3000 tom li Extension GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Maintenance Figure 132 One Key Dial Destinations Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 234 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING 8 DISA In many situations the user will find the need to access his own IPPBX resources but he is not physically close to any one of his extensions However he does has access to his own cell phone In this case we can use what is commonly known as DISA Direct Inward System Access Under this scenario the user will be able to call from the outside first whether it s using his cell phone pay phone regular PSTN and etc and then call into a SIP trunk or PSTN trunk connected to UCM6510 as it is an internal extension The UCM6510 supports DISA to be used in IVR or inbound route Before using it create new DISA under web GUI gt Call Features gt DISA e Click on Create New DISA to add a new DISA e Clickon to edit the DISA configuration e Clckon to delete the DISA Create New DISA G Name i Password G Permission Internal
151. be displayed in this web page as well CONFERENCE BRIDGE CONFIGURATIONS e Click on Create New Conference Room to add a new conference bridge e Click on to edit the conference bridge e Click on to delete the conference bridge Extension Password Admin Password Enable Caller Menu Record Conference Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 65 Conference Bridge Configuration Parameters Configure the conference number for the users to dial into the conference When configured the users who would like to join the conference call must enter this password before accessing the conference bridge Note e f Public Mode is enabled the password is not required to join the conference bridge thus this field is invalid e The password has to be at least 4 characters Configure the password to join the conference bridge as administrator Conference administrator can manage the conference call via IVR if Enable Caller Menu is enabled as well as invite other parties to join the conference by dialing 0 permission required from the invited party or 1 permission not required from the invited party during the conference call Note e f Public Mode is enabled the password is not required to join the conference bridge thus this field is invalid e The password has to be at least 4 characters If enabled conference participant could press the key to access the conference bridge menu The default setting is No If e
152. between enabled disabled for the selected model templates Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 97 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD MODEL UPDATE UCM6510 zero config feature supports provisioning all models of Grandstream SIP end devices Templates for most of the Grandstream models are built in with the UCM6510 already Templates for GXP16XX GSWave and Surveillance products requires user to download on UCM6510 web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Model Update first as those products are more often used as needed After downloading the model template it will show in the dropdown list for Model selection when editing the model template e Click on to download the template e User could also upload model template package to UCM6510 Update Model Packages Upload Model Template Package Choose Model Package to Upload Upload Model Template Package List Grandstream GSWave Grandstream GXP1610 Grandstream GXP1620 Grandstream GXP1625 Grandstream Surveillance Total 5 Show 1 1 Goto Figure 61 Template Management DEVICE CONFIGURATION On web GUI page PBX gt Zero Config gt Zero Config users could create new device delete existing device s make special configuration for a single device or send NOTIFY to existing device s CREATE NEW DEVICE Besides configuring the device after the device is discovered users could also directly create a new device and configu
153. c com Root DN cn admin dc pbx dc com Root Password Confirm Root Password Figure 31 LDAP Server Configurations The UCM6510 LDAP server supports anonymous access read only by default Therefore the LDAP client doesn t have to configure username and password to access the phonebook directory The Root DN and Root Password here are for LDAP management and configuration where users will need provide for authentication purpose before modifying the LDAP information The default phonebook list in this LDAP server can be viewed and edited by clicking on for the first phonebook under LDAP Phonebook Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 62 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD ou pbx dc pbx dc com Figure 32 Default LDAP Phonebook DN Edit Phonebook ou pbx dc pbx dc com LDAP Attributes Contact List AccountNumber 5000 John Doe CallerlbName John Doe Stacy Green Email Tam Lin FirstName 3 Ricky Chan LastName OO Front Desk Warehouse Department Sales MobileNumber Tech Support HomeNumber Customer Service Ooo Oo 8 08 add 0 Fax 008 RMA Shipping Test Figure 33 Default LDAP Phonebook Attributes LDAP PHONEBOOK Users could use the default phonebook edit the default phonebook as well as add new phonebook on the LDAP server The first phonebook with default phonebook dn ou pbx dc pbx dc com displayed on the LDAP server page is for extensions in this PBX
154. c time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page Ring Simultaneously Enable this option to have an external number ring simultaneously along EET RE with the extension If a register trunk is used for outbound the register i imu u o number will be used to be displayed for the external number as caller ID number Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 120 of 317 External Number Time Condition for Ring Simultaneously GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Set the external number to be rang simultaneously is the connection character which will be ignored Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the basis of this time condition Other Settings Ring Timeout Auto Record Skip Trunk Auth Time Condition for Skip Trunk Auth Dial Trunk Password Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail voicemail is enabled or hang up voicemail is disabled If not specified the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6510 which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting under web GUI gt Internal Options gt IVR Prompt General Preference The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds Note If the end point also
155. can be uploaded from the web GUI gt Internal Options gt Custom Prompt or click the Prompt to add additional recorded Select available users from the left side to the paging intercom group member list on the right UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 213 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD e Click on p to edit the paging intercom group e Clickon to delete the paging intercom group e Click on Paging Intercom Group Settings to edit Alert Info Header This header will be included in the SIP INVITE message sent to the callee in paging intercom call Paging Intercom Group Settings Paging amp Intercom Settings CD Alertnfo Header Intercom Paging Intercom Feature Code Settings cp Custom Prompt None Prompt Please goto Feature Codes Configure the paging intercom feature code Figure 116 Page Intercom Group Settings e The UCM6510 has pre configured paging intercom feature code By default the Paging Prefix is 81 and the Intercom Prefix is 80 To edit page intercom feature code click on Feature Codes in the Paging Intercom Group Settings dialog Or users could go to web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Feature Codes directly Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 214 of 317 GRANDSTREAM L CALL QUEUE The UCM6510 supports call queue by using static agents or dynamic agents Call Queue system can accept more calls than the available agents Incoming calls will be h
156. cccccceccceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaaseeeeeeas 68 UCM6510 Email SENNGS xc sciscicascdewsesececrcaeseie cnet eieren as ehenebaneneneterenecetAceyeceuedeteaet 70 UCM6510 Email Settings Send Test Email rrrrnrnnnnnnronnnnnnnnrvnnrnnnnnrennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsennnnne 70 SENTE NANGA EEE 72 Create New Office Time cccccccccssseeccccceeesecececeeeeeceeecaeaeeeeseeeaeceeessaaseceeessaaeeeeessaseeeeessaneeeees 73 Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time cccccccssseeccecceeeeeeeecceeeeeeeeeceaeseeeeeseeeseeeesssaaseeeeessageeeess 74 Create New Holiday cccccssssecccccesseeceecceeeeececeseeeeeceeeceeaeeeeeessaasecesessaaseeeessseaeeeeeessaaseeeesssagseeees 75 Settings gt Time Settings sHoliday Lassen lead eee 76 Settings gt Recordings Storage ccccccccccseseeceeeceeeeeceeecsaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseseeeeeessegseeeeessagseeees 77 Recordings Storage Prompt Information rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrvvnnnnnnnvnnrnnnnnrennnnnnnnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsseennnnne 78 Recording Storage Category rrrrnnnnnrvnnrnnnnnrvvnrnnnnrrvnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnsnsrnnnnnnsnsrnnnnnnnssennnnnnssernnnnne 78 PES Nr 79 Zero Config Configuration Architecture for End Point Device rrrnrrnrrnnnnnnnnevnrnnnrnrenvrnnnnrrrnnnnnn 82 te BP 1 Ge REE EEE 83 Auto Provision Settings cccccccccsssesceeeceeeseeececeeeseceeecaeeseceeeseaeeeeeecsaaeeeesssaaseceeessaseeessssaaeeeees 84 UG DE do EE ER EA E EE ME 86 DI
157. cecueusnsusueaeteusnsusneaenuensnsusesaueusnsnsusaeteusnsusnsueeensnenens 37 CREATE NEW WEB UI USER siccinvcccdccseeiivcvevaccicdavbaccenelocctecisessentetecaiieadbacddealegatecsteiiuntaleccioeatiecsded 38 SEPT 40 CONCURRENT MULTI USER LOGIN u cccccccccecsccccccecececencueucececeusnsnenecectensnsnsusateueusnsusueseeensnsnens 41 OPERATION OLE 41 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 1 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM CHANGE BINDING EVNE shcpinipecersnsiatenmns i ere nnie rE aE iS 43 NE TW ORR ETTING SN 44 2 SEES F N EEE EE EE eee 44 Ve 49 ST INGO EEE EEE 50 PORT FORTWO ROIN vr 53 OON S ET TN he E TEE AE E E A E E ee 55 FRE Le re ee E 56 TING DE ho re ee ee ee ene eee E eee ee eee ee 56 NE DEFEN Ed 58 LEN 60 GANGE PASSWORD ve 61 FAP SPR VER ete E E EO E E T Re 61 LDAP SERVER CONFIGURATION aasicedacsnasetccantaataccdoccesattoeidesesonseacanesacelasanseseeracnasecrbacapaacen 62 HAP ROMA NN 63 LDAP CLIENT CONFIGURATIONS rrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnerrrrrnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnneerrrrnnnnnnnnsssnnneeennnnnneeee 66 IP EVE 68 ENIA UE te AE WINS yee aa ahora ath nae oe gee E tee eee ee eden ye seat ence ete setae 69 MME SPIN SN 71 AUTO TIME UPDATING eda 71 SET IME MAN pe beds 72 FETE hr 73 OED REE EEE EEE EEE 74 Me gg EE EEE EE NE 76 RECORDINGS STORAGE inesi nsa one A a REE E E REE ia 11 LOGIN METT SETTING SR 79 PRONT IN e A 81 SE EN 81 CONFIGURATION ARCHITECTURE FOR END POINT DEVICE 81 AUTO PROVISIONING SETN See 82
158. ceeccseeseceeesseeececesseueceeesseaeceeessaaseeeeesseseeeessageeeeseaas 311 NO 2 312 MAUS go EE EN emdioad dete 312 Troubleshooting Analog Trunks ccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesseaeeeeseeeaeeeeseesegeeeeeeeas 313 E amp M Immediate Record Trace cccccccsccccccssesceeecaesecceecseeeceeeesaeeecesesseaeeeesessaaeeeeeessageeeeeeaas 314 SKO EEE EE 314 Se ga 0 EE EEE EE EEE 315 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 15 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CHANGE LOG This section documents significant changes from previous versions of the UCM6510 user manual Only major new features or major document updates are listed here Minor updates for corrections or editing are not documented here FIRMWARE VERSION 1 0 2 7 e Added PRI 1310 configuration Table 48 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 PRI NET PRI CPE e Added Announcements Center ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER FIRMWARE VERSION 1 0 2 5 e Added option to enable disable SSH access via LCD or web UI SSH ACCESS e Added ability to select voicemail storage Email WAV is supported Table 70 Voicemail Email Settings e Added support to allow remote peer extensions in ring group REMOTE EXTENSION IN RING GROUP e Added ability to strip and prepend digits in inbound routes Table 64 Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters e Added ability to search extensions on Extension page e SEARCH AND EDIT EXTENSION e Added user portal for users to log in with exten
159. ck signal on their transmit side The parameter determines whether the clock signal from the far end of the E1 T1 J1 is used as the master source of clock timing If the far end is used as the master the PBX system clock will synchronize to It e Master The port will never be used as a source of timing This is appropriate when you know the far end should always be a slave to you e Slave The equipment at the far end of the E1 T1 link is the preferred source of the master clock MFC R2 multinational adaption UCM6510 supports MFC R2 standards by ITU and MFC R2 standards in different countries or regions including UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 151 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Argentina Brazil China Czech Republic Colombia Ecuador Indonesia Mexico the Philippines and Venezuela If enabled the callee side will request the caller to send caller number first and then called number Get ANI First Note Options Get ANI First and Skip Category cannot be enabled at the same time Select the category of the caller UCM6510 supports four categories Category National Subscriber National Priority Subscriber International Subscriber and International Priority Subscriber The line build out LBO is the distance between the operators and the Bo PBX Please use the default value OdB unless the distance is long RX Gain Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of digital port The valid range is from 24dB to 12dB TX Gai
160. clid gt amp quot on01 amp quot amp lt 5300 amp gt lt clid gt lt channel gt SIP 5300 00000000 lt channel gt lt dstchannel gt SIP 5301 00000001 lt dstcha nnel gt lt lastapp gt Dial lt lastapp gt lt lastdata gt SIP 5301 60 lt lastdata gt lt start gt 2013 12 03 14 01 41 lt start gt lt answer gt 2013 12 03 14 01 43 lt answer gt lt end gt 2013 12 03 14 01 46 lt end gt lt duration gt 5 lt duration gt lt billsec gt 3 lt billsec gt lt disposition gt ANSWERED lt disposition gt lt a maflags gt DOCUMENTATION lt amaflags gt lt uniqueid gt 1386 100901 0 lt uniqueid gt lt userfield gt EX IT lt userfie ld gt lt channel ext gt 5300 lt channel ext gt lt dstchannel ext gt 5301 lt dstchannel_ ext gt lt service gt s lt service gt lt cdr gt lt cdr gt lt Acctld gt 64 lt Acctld gt lt accountcode gt lt accountcode gt lt src gt 5300 lt src gt lt dst gt 5301 lt dst gt lt dcontext gt from internal lt dcontext gt lt clid gt amp quot on01 amp quot amp It 5300 amp gt lt clid gt lt channel gt SIP 5300 00000002 lt channel gt lt dstchannel gt SIP 5301 00000003 lt dstcha nnel gt lt lastapp gt Dial lt lastapp gt lt lastdata gt SIP 5301 60 lt lastdata gt lt start gt 2013 12 03 14 02 23 lt start gt lt answer gt 2013 12 03 14 02 27 lt answer gt lt end gt 2013 12 03 14 02 31 lt end gt lt duration gt 8 lt duration gt lt billsec gt 4 lt billsec gt lt disposition gt ANSWERED lt disposition gt lt a maflags g
161. conditional feature is deactivated The Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 114 of 317 CFU Time Condition Call Forward No Answer CFN Time Condition Call Forward Busy CFB Time Condition Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM default setting is deactivated Select time condition for Call Forward Unconditional CFU takes effect only during the selected time condition The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific Note e Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period e Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number If not configured the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated The default setting is deactivated Select time condition for Call Forward No Answer The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Note e Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific e Specific tim
162. cords to return Default is 1000 which is also the maximum allowed value Number of matching records to skip This will be combined with numRecords to receive all matches over multiple responses Default is 0 Filters based on src caller or dst callee value matching any extension contained in the parameter input string Patterns containing one or more wildcards or _ will match as a regular expression and treat as a literal hyphen rather than a range signifier The wildcard matches any number of characters including zero while matches any single character Otherwise patterns containing a single hyphen will be matching a range of numerical extensions with non numerical characters ignored while patterns containing multiple hyphens will be ignored The pattern 0 0 will match all non numerical and empty strings Filters based on the start call start time value Calls which start within this period inclusive of boundaries will match regardless of the call answer or end time An empty value for either field will be interpreted as range with no minimum or maximum respectively Page 295 of 317 5 GRANDSTREAM YYYY MM DDTHH MM SS Strings without a date have a default value of 2000 01 01 Strings without a time of day have a default YYYY MM DDTHH MM SS SSS l l l l value of of 00 00 UTC while strings with a time of day literal T character separator in specified may also optionally specif
163. d Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number If not configured Call Forward No Answer the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated The default setting is deactivated Select time condition for Call Forward No Answer The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Note e Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFN Time Condition terms of time period Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific e Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page SA EAA ELG Configure the Call Forward Busy target number If not configured the Call j Forward Busy feature is deactivated The default setting is deactivated Select time condition for Call Forward Busy The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific Note e Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFB Time Condition terms of time period e Specifi
164. devices within different types of network Allow All Device in any network can register this extension Local Subnet Only Only the user in specific subnet can register this extension Up to three subnet addresses can be specified A Specific IP Address Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension The default setting is Allow All Strategy Select audio and video codec for the extension The available codecs are Codec Preference PCMU PCMA GSM AAL2 G 726 32 G 726 G 722 G 729 G 723 ILBC ADPCM H 264 H 263 and H 263p Table 37 IAX Extension Configuration Parameters Features Call Transfer Configure the Call Forward Unconditional target number If not Call Forward Unconditional configured the Call Forward Unconditional feature is deactivated The default setting is deactivated Select time condition for Call Forward Unconditional CFU takes effect only during the selected time condition The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific CFU Time Condition Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 119 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Note e Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period e Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the ad
165. digital ports Table 48 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 PRI NET PRI CPE Table 49 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 SS7 e Added support for Ring simultaneously feature for extensions Table 31 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters e Added support for Music On Hold selection per extension Table 31 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 17 of 317 GRANDSTREAM e Added support to disable this extension per extension Table 31 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters e Added ability to set personal password for making outbound calls per extension Table 31 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters e Added TEL URI configuration for SIP extension VoIP trunk Table 31 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Table 56 Create New SIP Trunk e Added E amp M Immediate and E amp M Wink signaling for T1 e Renamed the network backup settings items to data sync DATA SYNC e Added Download Search Result in CDR CDR e Added office time and holiday setting support OFFICE TIME HOLIDAY e Added time condition for call forward EXTENSIONS e Added support to monitor FXO trunk using SLA SLA STATION e Added One Key Dial function ONE KEY DIAL e Added Follow Me support FOLLOW ME e Supported external number as the key pressing event of an IVR e Improved APIs for Zero Config templates and settings PROVISIONING e Support
166. dress Backup Time Data Sync Configuration Enable Data Sync Account Password Server Address Sync Time Test Connection Figure 182 Data Sync Table 110 Data Sync Configuration Enable the auto backup function The default setting is No Enter the Account name on the SFTP backup server Enter the Password associate with the Account on the SFTP backup server Enter the SFTP server address Enter 0 23 to specify the backup hour of the day Before saving the configuration users could click on Test Connection The UCM6510 will then try connecting the server to make sure the server is up and accessible for the UCM6510 Save the changes and all the backup logs will be listed on the web page RESTORE CONFIGURATION FROM BACKUP FILE To restore the configuration on the UCM6510 from a backup file users could go to web GUI gt Maintenance gt Backup gt Backup Restore e Alist of previous configuration backups is displayed on the web page Users could click on 3 of the desired backup file and it will be restored to the UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 307 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD e f users have other backup files on PC to restore on the UCM6510 click on Upload Backup File first and select it from local PC to upload on the UCM6510 Once the uploading is done this backup file will be displayed in the list of previous configuration backups for r
167. e e Export phonebook to your computer from UCM6510 LDAP server Select the checkbox for the LDAP phonebook and then click on Export Selected Phonebook to export the selected phonebook The exported phonebook can be used as a record or a sample CSV file for the users to add more contacts in it and import to the UCM6510 again LDAP Phonebook Import Phonebook Export Selected Phonebook Note The first phone book is for extensions in this PBX The contacts cannot be added or deleted directly To add or delete the contacts please modify the accounts in Extensions page first To modify the read only attributes please edit the corresponding items in Extension page and the phone book will be automatically updated when the change is saved and applied Users can add other phone books for external accounts For those phone books users can edit LDAP attributes add or delete contacts directly View 5 v ou pbx dc pbx dc com Ps Total 1 Show 11 Co EG First Prev Next Last Figure 39 Export Selected LDAP Phonebook LDAP CLIENT CONFIGURATIONS The configuration on LDAP client is similar when you use other LDAP servers Here we provide an example on how to configure the LDAP client on the SIP end points to use the default PBX phonebook Assuming the server base dn is dc pbx dc com configure the LDAP clients as follows case insensitive Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 66 of 3
168. e default setting is Yes Specify ON OFF or a value the power of 2 from 32 to 1024 as the number of taps of cancellation Echo Cancellation Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 123 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Note When configuring the number of taps the number 256 is not translated into 256ms of echo cancellation Instead 256 taps means 256 8 32 ms The default setting is ON which is 128 taps 3 Way Callin Configure to enable disable 3 way calling feature on the user The default Wa i z setting is enabled Send CallerID After Configure the number of rings before sending CID Default setting is 1 For FXS extension there are three options available in Fax Mode The default setting is None e None Disable Fax e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address Fax Mode configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 e Fax Gateway If selected the UCM6510 can support conversation and processing of Fax data from T 30 to T 38 or T 38 to T 30 This feature is only available for FXS or FXO port Table 41 FXS Extension Configuration Parameters Features Call Transfer Configure the Call Forward Unconditional target
169. e Barge In Barge mode the extension monitoring the call can talk to both parties in the active call The call will be established similar to three way conference Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 248 of 317 GRANDSTREAM L 4 Enable or disable Require Confirmation option If enabled the confirmation of the invited monitor s extension is required before the active call can be monitored This option can be used to avoid adding participant who has auto answer configured or call forwarded to voicemail 5 Click on Add An INVITE will be sent to the monitor s extension The monitor can answer the call and start monitoring If Require Confirmation is enabled the user will be asked to confirm to monitor the call Another way to monitor active calls is to dial the corresponding feature codes from an extension Please refer to Table 81 UCM6510 Feature Codes and ENABLE SPY section for instructions Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 249 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING eS Wo eto This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 250 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD CALL FEATURES The UCM6510 supports call recording transfer call forward call park and other call features via feature code Feature Codes settings can be found at web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Feature Codes This section list
170. e E 164 number If set to Enable Tel will be used instead of SIP in the SIP request The default setting is disabled SRTP Enable SRTP for the call The default setting is disabled Select Fax mode The default setting is None e None Disable Fax e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be Fax Mode detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 This option controls how the extension can be used on devices within different types of network Allow All Device in any network can register this extension a Local Subnet only Only the user in specific subnet can register this extension Up to three subnet addresses can be specified A Specific IP Address Only the device on the specific IP address can register this extension The default setting is Allow All Select audio and video codec for the extension The available codecs are Codec Preference PCMU PCMA GSM AAL2 G 726 32 G 726 G 722 G 729 G 723 ILBC ADPCM H 264 H 263 and H 263p Table 33 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Features Call Transfer 7 Configure the Call Forward Unconditional target number If not Call Forward Unconditional l E l configured the Call Forward Un
171. e Extensions Pickup Group Members Figure 121 Edit Pickup Group e Clickon to delete the pickup group CONFIGURE PICKUP FEATURE CODE When picking up the call for the pickup group member the user only needs to dial the pickup feature code It s not necessary to add the extension number after the pickup feature code The pickup feature code is configurable under Web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Feature Codes The default pickup feature code is 8 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 221 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD 2 modify the password and bind ji DENS Status Settings Maintenance G Feature Code Digits Timeout 1000 G Call Park D Parking Lots 701 720 Use parklot as extension Internal Options Parking Timeout s 300 Feature Codes Reset All Default All Voicemail Access Code 9g G My Voicemail Agent Pause 83 Agent Unpause Paging Prefix 81 Intercom Prefix Blacklist Add 40 Call Pickup on Ringing Direct Dial Voicemail Prefix Call Completion Request Call Completion Cancel Enable Spy Listen Spy 54 Whisper Spy Barge Spy Figure 122 Edit Pickup Feature Code Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 222 of 317 GRANDSTREAM B ONNESTING THE WORLD MUSIC ON HOLD Music On Hold settings can be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Music On Hold In this page users could configure m
172. e Invitation From web GUI rrrrnnnnnrnnrnnnrnrrvrrnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnsrennnnnsnsennnnnnsnnennnnnnenee 189 Figure 101 Conlorence Recording jai niwinswsnintsscamintnaiaeceininansunarioimeneiimenanencuaudmniatiainuseiicneuaniameusdudiads 191 Figure 102 Click On Prompt To Create IVR Prompt cccccccssseeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeesseaeeeeesssaaeeeess 195 Figure 103 Record New IVR Prompt cccccssseccceeseeeccesscecceeseeeceauececeeseeeseaseeecsauseeessseesssseeessaneeesseags 195 Figure 104 Upload IVR Prompt cccccssccccceeseeeceseeeceeececseuseeecsegeeeeseuseeeseuseeessaseeessueeessueeessageeesseass 196 Figure 105 Language Settings for Voice Prompt cccccccssseecceeeececceseecceeseeecsaueeecseuseeessaueeessagseesseaes 198 Figure 106 Voice Prompt Package LISt cccccccsssececeeeseecceseeecsaeeecseseeeseaseeessauseeeseseesssaseeessaneeesseags 198 Figure 107 New Voice Prompt Language Added cccccccseeeeccseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeseeesseeeeeesaaeeeeesaneesesaeeeeessegs 199 Figure 108 Voicemail Email Settings ccccecccccssseccceesececseeseeecseuececseuseeeseaseeecsaseeessaseeessageesssaneeesseass 204 Figure 109 VEN GOUD ensacar E 205 Fe IT RANN 207 Fig re 111 Ring Group Configuratio ccncrosasirecostacnosetceoxnccsescusceaateecseubsoencetdlsenacetscovecetaneedeenbeqnedataiieneccnieeues 209 Figure 112 Sync LDAP Server option ccecccceccceseeceeeceeees
173. e between two peer UCM6510 Specify an outbound rule for LDAP sync feature The UCM6510 will automatically modify the remote contacts by adding prefix parsed from this rule Specify the prefix for LDAP sync feature The UCM6510 will automatically modify the remote contacts by adding this prefix CC Settings Enable CC CC Max Agents CC Max Monitors Type Provider Name Host Name Keep Trunk CID Username Password Disable This Trunk Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 If enabled the system will automatically alert the user when a called party is available given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason Configure the maximum number of CCSS agents which may be allocated for this channel In other words this number serves as the maximum number of CC requests this channel is allowed to make The minimum value is 1 Configure the maximum number of monitor structures which may be created for this device In other words this number tells how many callers may request CC services for a specific device at one time The minimum value is 1 Table 59 Create New IAX Trunk Select the VoIP trunk type e Peer IAX Trunk e Register IAX Trunk Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules inbound rules and etc Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP provider s server of the trunk If enabled the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension s CID when the extension has CID con
174. e call Conference Rooms G Figure 152 Conference Room Status Other operations are also available in conference room status section e Click on Conference Rooms the web page will redirect to conference room configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Conference e Click on O to refresh the conference room status e Click on to expand the conference room details e Click on to hide the conference room details INTERFACES STATUS This section displays interface connection status on the UCM6510 for USB SD Card LAN WAN LAN PoE Heartbeat Power 1 Power 2 Digital FXS and FXO ports Table 100 Interface Status Indicators FXO Disconnected Connected but not configured Connected and idle Connected and in use L Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 277 of 317 Connected but not configured GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD a Connected and idle r Connected and in use SD Card SD Card plugged in SD Card unplugged p USB plugged in p USB unplugged LAN PoE z PoE is used E Lo PoE is not used Power 1 2 Power supply Is working Power supply is abnormal E wf No power supply LAN WAN Heart Beat O O OD O pen D Q Not connected Digital Port T1 E1 J1 ry Connected and working Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 278 of 317 lt GRANDSTR
175. e call on hold has no Music On Hold Suggest setting Specify which Music On Hold class to suggest to the bridged channel when putting the call on hold Configure the bandwidth for IAX settings The default setting is Low AX SETTINGS REGISTRATION Table 87 IAX Settings Registration IAX Registration Options Min Reg Expire Max Reg Expire IAX Thread Count IAX Max Thread Count Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Configure the minimum period in seconds of registration The default setting is 60 Configure the maximum period in seconds of registration The default setting is 3600 Configure the number of IAX helper threads The default setting is 10 Configure the maximum number of IAX threads allowed The default setting is 100 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 261 of 317 Auto Kill Authentication Debugging Codec Priority Type of Service lt GRANDSTREAM ORLO If set to yes the connection will be terminated if ACK for the NEW message is not received within 2000ms Users could also specify number in milliseconds in addition to yes and no The default setting is yes If enabled authentication traffic in debugging will not show The default setting is No Configure codec negotiation priority The default setting is Regonly e Caller Consider the callers preferred order ahead of the host s e Host Consider the host s preferred order ahead of the caller s e Disabled Disable the considerati
176. e can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page Configure the Call Forward Busy target number If not configured the Call Forward Busy feature is deactivated The default setting is deactivated Select time condition for Call Forward Busy The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific Note e Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period e Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 115 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD CC Settings If enabled UCM6510 will automatically alert this extension when a called Enable CC party is available given that a previous call to that party failed for some reason By default it s disabled Two modes for Call Completion are supported Normal This extension is used as ordinary extension CC Mode i ee f e For Trunk This extension is registered from a PBX The default setting is Norm
177. e distance is long RX Gain Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of digital port The valid range is from 24dB to 12dB TX Gain Configure the TX Gain for the transmitting channel of digital port The valid range is 24dB to 12dB Codec Select alaw or ulaw If set to default ulaw will be used for T1 J1 This configured whether to play the ringback tone from local UCM6510 or not If enabled the local UCM6510 will play ringback tone to the caller Play Local RBT rea Otherwise the caller will listen to the tone from peer device The default setting is disabled Advanced Settings Select switch type Switch Type e EurolSDN EurolSDN common in Europe Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 153 of 317 Coding PRI Dial Plan PRI Local Dial Plan D chan International Prefix National Prefix Local Prefix Private Prefix Unknown Prefix PRI T310 PRI Indication Reset Interval PRI Exclusive Facility Enable Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM e Nl2 National ISDN type 2 common in the US e DMS100 Nortel DMS100 e 4ESS AT amp T 4ESS e 5ESS Lucent 5ESS e NI1 old national ISDN type 1 e QSIG Select B8ZS or AMI This setting is used to specify the type of the callee number The service provider will usually verify this The default setting is unknown In some very unusual circumstances you may need set to Dynamic or Redundant Note When one type is se
178. e imported file on the UCM6510 EMAIL TO USER Once the extensions are created with Email address the PBX administrator can click on button Email To User to send the account registration and configuration information to the user Please make sure Email setting under web Ul gt Settings gt Email Settings is properly configured and tested on the UCM6510 before using Email To User When click on Email To User button the following message will be prompted in the web page Click on OK to confirm sending the account information to all users Email addresses Prompt information Are you sure you want to send the account infomations to the user s email cI C3 Figure 78 Email To User Prompt Information The user will receive Email including account registration information and LDAP configuration A QR code is also generated for Mobile applications to scan it and get automatically provisioned QR code provisioning is supported on Grandstream Softphone GS Wave Android application Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 134 of 317 GRANDSTREAM Account Name 1001 SIP Server 192 168 2 1 SIP User ID 1001 Authenticate ID 1001 Authenticate Password t 297 eoS 1h Name This is the QR code of this account Figure 79 Email To User Account Registration Information and QR Code Server Address 192 168 2 1 Port 389 Base dc pbx dc com Tis is the QR code of this
179. e level the call will be allowed to go through Select an audio file to play as the welcome prompt for the IVR Click on Welcome Prompt Prompt to add additional audio file under web GUI gt Internal Options gt IVR Prompt Configure the timeout between digit entries After the user enters a digit the user needs to enter the next digit within the timeout If no digit is detected within the timeout the UCM6510 will consider the entries complete The default timeout is 3 seconds After playing the prompts in the IVR the UCM6510 will wait for the DIMF entry within the timeout in seconds If no DTMF entry is detected within Digit Timeout Response Timeout Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 193 of 317 Response Timeout Prompt Invalid Prompt Response Timeout Repeat Loops Invalid Repeat Loops Language lt GRANDSTREAM ORLO the timeout a timeout prompt will be played The default setting is 10 seconds Select the prompt message to be played when timeout occurs Select the prompt message to be played when an invalid extension is pressed Configure the number of times to repeat the prompt if no DTMF input is detected When the loop ends it will go to the timeout destination if configured or hang up The default setting is 3 Configure the number of times to repeat the prompt if the DTMF input is invalid When the loop ends it will go to the invalid destination if configured or hang
180. e original file name will be used as the directory name and the file will be renamed as phonebook xml under that directory Configure the phonebook download interval in Minute If set to 0 automatic download will be disabled Valid range is 5 to 720 If set to Yes when XML phonebook is downloaded the entries added manually will be automatically removed Table 26 Global Policy Parameters Maintenance Firmware source via ZeroConfig provisionoing could a URL for external server address local UCM directory or USB media if plugged in to the UCM6510 Select a source to get the firmware file e URL If select to use URL to upgrade complete the configuration for the following four parameters Upgrade Via Server Path File Prefix and File Postfix e Local UCM Server Firmware can be uploaded to the UCM6510 internal storage for firmware upgrade If selected click on Manage Storage icon next to Directory option upload firmware file and select directory for the end device to retrieve the firmware file e Local USB Media If selected the USB storage device needs to be plugged into the UCM6510 and the firmware file must be put under a folder named UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 90 of 317 Upgrade via Server Path File Prefix File Postfix Allow DHCP Option 43 66 Automatic Upgrade Firmware Upgrade Rule Admin Password End User Password Web Access Mode Web Server Port Disable
181. e parking lot details e Click on to hide the parking details SYSTEM STATUS The UCM6510 system status can be accessed via web GUI gt Status gt System Status which displays the following system information e General e Network e Storage Usage e Resource Usage Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 281 of 317 GENERAL GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Under web GUI gt Status gt System Status gt General users could check the hardware and software information for the UCM6510 Please see details in the following table Table 103 System Status gt General Status gt System Status gt General Model Part Number System Time Up Time Idle Time Boot Core Base Program Recovery NETWORK Product model Product part number Current system time The current system time is also available on the upper right of each web page System up time since the last reboot System idle time since the last reboot Boot version Core version Base version Program version This is the main software release version Recovery version Under web GUI gt Status gt System Status gt Network users could check the network information for the UCM6510 Please see details in the following table Table 104 System Status gt Network Status gt System Status gt Network MAC Address IP Address Gateway Subnet Mask DNS Server Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Global unique ID of dev
182. e password of Enter the current login user credential for UCM6510 the account Email Address Email Address is used to retrieve password when password is lost NETWORK SETTINGS After successfully connecting the UCM6510 to the network for the first time users could log in the web GUI and go to Settings gt Network Settings to configure the network parameters for the device Select each tab in web GUI gt Settings gt Network Settings page to configure LAN WAN settings 802 1X and Port Forwarding A Note To connect the UCM6510 to network T1 E1 J1 data trunk can also be used instead of using the WAN LAN port Please see section DATA TRUNK to use UCM6510 data trunk to connect the device to Internet BASIC SETTINGS Please refer to the following tables for basic network configuration parameters on the UCM6510 Table 8 UCM6510 Network Settings gt Basic Settings Select Route Switch or Dual mode on the network interface of UCM6510 The default setting is Route e Route WAN port interface will be used for uplink connection LAN port interface will be used to serve as router e Switch WAN port interface will be used for uplink connection LAN port interface will be used as bridge for PC connection e Dual Both ports can be used for uplink connection Users will need assign LAN 1 or LAN 2 as the default interface in option Default Interface and configure Gateway IP for this interface if static
183. e phone only after you are informed Figure 84 UCM6510 PSTN Detection Semi Auto Detect Detect Model Semi auto Detect Source Channel The source channel to be detected Destination Number The number to be dialed for detecting This number could be a cell phone number or other PSTN number that can be reached from the source channel PSTN number 5 Click Detect to start detecting The source channel will initiate a call to the destination number For Auto Detect the call will be automatically answered For Semi auto Detect the UCM6510 web GUI will display prompt to notify the user to answer or hang up the call to finish the detecting process 6 Once done the detected result will show Users could save the detecting result as the current UCM6510 settings Table 46 PSTN Detection for Analog Trunk Select Auto Detect or Semi auto Detect for PSTN detection e Auto Detect Please make sure two or more channels are connected to the UCM6510 and in idle status before starting the detection During the detection one channel will be used as caller Source Channel and another channel will be used as callee Destination Channel The UCM6510 will control the call to be established and hang up between caller and callee to finish the detection Detect Model e Semi auto Detect Semi auto detection requires answering or hanging up the call manually Please make sure one channel is connected to the UCM6510 and in
184. e the most basic options that could apply to all Grandstream SIP devices during provisioning via Zero Config e Model In this layer users can define model specific options for the configuration template e Device This is the highest layer Users can configure device specific options for the configuration for individual device here Each layer also has its own structure in different levels Please see figure below The details for each layer are explained in sections GLOBAL CONFIGURATION MODEL CONFIGURATION and DEVICE CONFIGURATION Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 81 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Device Layer Special Settings Advanced Settings Model Templates ModelLayer Default Model Templates Global Layer Figure 53 Zero Config Configuration Architecture for End Point Device The configuration in model layer and device layer have all the options in global layers already i e the options in global layer is a subset of the options in model layer and device layer If an option is set in all three layers with different values the highest layer value will override the value in lower layer For example if the user selects English for Language setting in Global Policy and Spanish for Language setting in Default Model Template the language setting on the device to be provisioned will use Spanish as model layer has higher priority than global layer To sum up configurations in higher layer will always
185. each conference bridge will be listed 1 Click on do to kick a participant from the conference 2 Click on to mute the participant rs 3 Click on to lock this conference bridge so that other users cannot join it anymore 4 Click on do to invite other users into the conference bridge e Manage the conference call from IVR If Enable Caller Menu is enabled conference participant can input to enter the IVR menu for the conference Please see options listed in the table below Table 66 Conference Caller IVR Menu Conference Administrator IVR Menu 1 Oo N O FP O N Mute unmute yourself Lock unlock the conference bridge Kick the last joined user from the conference Decrease the volume of the conference call Increase the volume of the conference call Decrease your volume Increase your volume More options e 1 List all users currently in the conference call e 2 Kick all non Administrator participants from the conference call e 3 Mute Unmute all non Administrator participants from the conference call e 4 Enable disable conference call recording e 8 Exit the caller menu and return to the conference Conference User IVR Menu 1 Mute unmute yourself Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 190 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Decrease the volume of the conference call Increase the volume of the conference call Decrease your volume Increase your v
186. ected Holidays Independence Day Default 4 Office closed Labor Day Default 1 Office closed Total 2 Show 1 1 Goto Time Settings Figure 48 Settings gt Time Settings gt Holiday e Clickon to edit the holiday mi e Clickon to delete the holiday e Click on Delete Selected Holidays to delete multiple selected holidays at once A Note For more details on how to use office time and holiday please refer to the link below http www grandstream com products ucm_series ucm61xx documents how to use office time and hol iday ucm6100 pdf NTP SERVER The UCM6510 can be used as a NTP server for the NTP clients to synchronize their time with To configure the UCM6510 as the NTP server set Enable NTP server to Yes under web GUI gt Settings gt Time Settings gt NTP Server On the client side point the NTP server address to the UCM6510 IP address or host name to use the UCM6510 as the NTP server Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 76 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD RECORDINGS STORAGE The UCM6510 supports call recordings automatically or manually and the recording files can be saved in external storage plugged in the UCM6510 or on the UCM6510 locally To manage the recording storage users can go to UCM6510 web GUI gt Settings gt Recordings Storage page and select whether to store the recording files in USB Disk SD card or locally on the UCM6510
187. ed GXP16XX Surveillance and GS wave models in Zero Config PROVISIONING e Added advanced settings for devices discovered in Zero Config DE VICE CONFIGURATION e Added ability to delete multiple recording files at one time RECORDING FILES e Added call queue destination if no answer timeout Table 74 Call Queue Configuration Parameters e Added call queue Music on Hold customization Table 74 Call Queue Configuration Parameters e Added restricted AMI access ASTERISK MANAGER INTERFACE RESTRICTED ACCESS Warning Please do not enable AMI on the UCM6510 if it is placed on a public or untrusted network unless you have taken steps to protect the device from unauthorized access It is crucial to understand that AMI access can allow AMI user to originate calls and the data exchanged via AMI is often very sensitive and private for your UCM6510 system Please be cautious when enabling AMI access on the UCM6510 and restrict the permission granted to the AMI user By using AMI on UCM6510 you agree you understand and acknowledge the risks associated with this e Added ability to choose the type s of files to be cleaned in cleaner CLEANER e Added DIMF configuration per SIP trunk Table 56 Create New SIP Trunk e Added ability to upload and play ring group announcement Table 72 Ring Group Parameters e Added ability to upload and play paging call announcement PAGING AND INTERCOM GROUP e Added Alert info configuration for distinctive ringing on inb
188. ed in web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt General will be used Configure the new name of the caller when the extension has no CallerID Name configured Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk for SIP trunk UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 157 of 317 GRANDSTREAM only The default setting is disabled The recording files are saved in external storage device if plugged in and can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files Enable to detect Fax signal from the trunk during the call and send the received Fax to the default Email address in Fax setting page under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 Fax Detection Note If enabled Fax Pass through cannot be used DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING DOD VIA DIGITAL TRUNKS Please refer to section DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING DOD VIA VOIP TRUNKS DIGITAL TRUNK TROUBLESHOOTING After configuring the digital trunk on the UCM6510 as described above if it doesn t work as expected users can go to capture signaling trace on the UCM6510 web UI for troubleshooting purpose Depending on the signaling selected for the digital trunk users can go to the following pages to capture trace e PRI Signaling Trace web GUI gt Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt PRI Signaling Trace e SS7 Signaling Trace web GUI gt Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt SS7 Signaling Trace e MFC R2 Signaling Trace web GUI gt Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt MFC R2 S
189. edentials Specify the domain name to be used in the Email when using type MTA Specify the SMTP server when using type Client For example if using Gmail as the SMTP server you can configure it as smtp gmail com 465 Username is required when using type Client Normally it s the Email address Password to log in for the above Username Email address is required when using type Client Specify the display name in the FROM header in the Email UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 69 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Specify the sender s Email address For example pox example mycompany com Sender The following figure shows a sample Email settings on the UCM6510 assuming the Email is using smto gmail com as the SMTP server and the port number is 465 Email settings TLS Enable Yes Type Client Server smip gmail com 465 Username pbx company gir Password re Display Name Company PBX sender pox company gmail com Figure 42 UCM6510 Email Settings Once the configuration is finished click on Save first Then click on Test button to make sure the Email setting is working The following figure shows the new dialog prompted to test the Email setting Fill in a valid Email address to send a test Email to verify the Email settings on the UCM6510 Send atest Email to the Email address below Email Address testucm6510 mycompany pbx com Figure 43 UCM6510 Email Sett
190. eeaeeeeeessaeeeeeenas 34 Figure 7 User Management Page Display rrrrrnnnnrnnnnnnrvnnnnnnvnvnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnvnvnnnnsnnnnnnsnnnnnnsrnnnnnnrnnnnnnsnnnnnnee 37 Figure 8 Create New USE rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnrennnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnsennnnnnnnssnnnnnnsssennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnssnn 39 Figure 9 User Management New USETSS cccccseeseeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeessaeeeeeeessaaaeeeeessaaeeeesessageeeeeeeas 39 Figure 10 Edit User Information by Super Admin arrrrvnrrnnnnnrevvrnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnrnnvnnnnnsrnnrnnnsnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnssnn 40 FET FE PAN avse GEN 40 Figure 12 User Portal Layout ve 41 Figure 13 Multiple User Operation Error Prompt cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeseseaeeeeeessaeeeneeeas 41 Figure 14 Operation LOS ccccccccccssssececcceeseceeseeesseeeecsaeueeeeeseeeseeeeessauseceeesseuseeeesssauueeeesssaeeeeessaageeeeesaas 42 RET ANNE EN 43 Figure 16 NEPAL 43 Figure 17 UCM6510 Network Interface Method ROUute ccccccccccssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeas 47 Figure 18 UCM6510 Network Interface Method Switch rrrnrrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrrnvnnnnnnennrnnnnnrennnnnnnnrennrnnnnnnenn 48 Figure 19 UCM6510 Network Interface Method Dual rrrnnnnrennnnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnrnnvnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnennrnnnsnnenn 49 Figure 20 UCM6510 Using 802 1X as Client rrrrrrnnnnnnrnrrnnnnnrornrnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnrrnrnnnnnrrennnnnnnrennrnnnnn
191. eeccceseeeensccseeceeeccosseeeeescceseeeesscceceeeessccens 287 Ede EE EEE 287 COR 1 EN 288 e SOI EE EEE 289 Call Report Entry with Audio Recording File rrrnnrrrrrrrnnnnnrrrrrnnnnnrvnrrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnsennnnnsnnsennnnnn 290 Automatic Download Settings ccccccccsseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseceeeseaeeeceeeeseaseeeeeseeaseeeesseaeeeeeseaeages 290 Downloaded CDR File Sample Call TO Shows sS rrrnernrnnnnnnvnvrnnnnnernrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnennnnnnsnnnnn 291 Downloaded CDR File Sample Source Channel and Dest Channel 1 rrannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 291 Downloaded CDR File Sample Source Channel and Dest Channel 2 rrnnrnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnn 292 Downloaded CDR File Sample Source Channel and Dest Channel 3 rrnnrrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnn 292 CDR SUSU Sintec dec reece a E RA R R a aR R 293 Net UN 301 ole 0 oe 0 gt EE EE EE NE 302 Upgrading Firmware FICS ooyace santas censcenocettnenecotsvevecestiPeeacentsqee lt nddlzenccauanouecesaiaencendceravedsveescennceyet 303 Reboot UCIMGS 10 onde casincicnssanetencntinnncunaseuticnsnts doawennendsiousennnenteuesdcacateusecdsanetiinsktennendaanelcncleenecds 303 VENNENE 305 BACKUP RESTO NN ENE 306 POC AES ACK OG EEE EEE 306 BEE 50 E E ie cause T AE E E E E E 307 Restore UCM6510 from Backup File csescccicsccscnceaneeciciceesnncteesaecassacasedenaceriesewandtaneedeneduaeeareess 308 GS PE EEE EE NE 309 Mesei and REDOOL EEE EEE EE nia 310 Ethernet Capture ccccccccccccccsssscececseese
192. eeeeeeaeeeeeeeceeaeceeesseaeeceeessaaeeeesesseeeeeeessaeeeees 210 Fig re 113 AN Synt LDAP SNE 210 Figure 114 Ring Group Remote Extension cccccccccccssececceeseecceeseeccceseeeseaseeecsaseeessseeessageeessaneeesseass 211 Figure 115 Paging Intercom Group cccsccccsssseecsseseeeceeeececseuseeecseeeeeseuseeessaseeessageeeeseeeesssaueeessagseesseass 213 Figure 116 Page Intercom Group SettinGS ccccccsccccecccsesssceeeeseeeeceeecseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeesseeeeeeeessaeeeees 214 ET MN eE E T cungecice aes E EE EE EE 215 Figure 118 Agent Login CUMING EE 218 Figure 119 Edit Extensi n Group iiuiscvicetindvsacincavanntduvincandusandeaadvecdinowenuaiaeviwcuiiidbesedasavecdbacweavaddavincawnninds 219 Figure 120 Select Extension Group in Outbound Route rrrrrnnrrvrrnnnrevvnnnnrvnnnnnrennnnerennnnnnrennnnerennnnsnrnnnnn 220 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 13 of 317 Figure 121 Figure 122 Figure 123 Figure 124 Figure 125 Figure 126 Figure 127 Figure 128 Figure 129 Figure 130 Figure 131 Figure 132 Figure 133 Figure 134 Figure 135 Figure 136 Figure 137 Figure 138 Figure 139 Figure 140 Figure 141 Figure 142 Figure 143 Figure 144 Figure 145 Figure 146 Figure 147 Figure 148 Figure 149 Figure 150 Figure 151 Figure 152 Figure 153 Figure 154 Figure 155 Figure 156 Figure 157 Figure 158 Figure 159 Figure 160 Figure 161 Firmware V
193. en 5 seconds and 600 seconds Note If the end point also has a ring timeout configured the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension The default Auto Record setting is disabled The recording files can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files Skip Trunk Auth If set to yes users can skip entering the password when making Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 116 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD outbound calls If set to By Time users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls during the selected time condition If set to No users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls Time Condition for Skip Trunk If Skip Trunk Auth is set to By Time select a time condition during which Auth users can skip entering password when making outbound calls Dial Trunk Password Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk Table 34 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Specific Time Specific Time Time Condition Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension CREATE NEW IAX EXTENSION The UCM6510 supports Inter Asterisk eXchange IAX protocol IAX is used for transporting VoIP telephony sessions between servers and terminal devices IAX is similar to SIP but also has its own characteristic For
194. ensions Table 44 Batch Add IAX Extension Parameters Start Extension Create Number Permission Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Configure the starting extension number of the batch of extensions to be added Specify the number of extensions to be added The default setting is 5 Assign permission level to the user The available permissions are Internal Local National and International from the lowest level to the highest level The default setting is Internal UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 129 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Note Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule s privilege in order to make outbound calls from this rule Enable Voicemail Enable Voicemail for the user The default setting is Yes Configure the SIP IAX password for the users Three options are available to create password for the batch of extensions e User Random Password SIP IAX Password A random secure password will be automatically generated It is recommended to use this password for security purpose e Use Extension as Password e Enter a password to be used on all the extensions in the batch Configure Voicemail password digits only for the users e User Random Password l l A random password in digits will be automatically generated It is Voicemail Password recommended to use this password for security purpose e Use Extension as Password e Enter a password to be used
195. ent and AC Impedance as predefined for your country s analog line characteristics The default setting is United States of America USA Configure to enable or disable override Two Wire Impedance Synthesis TISS The default setting is No FXS TISS Override If enabled users can select the impedance value for Two Wire Impedance Synthesis TISS override The default setting is 6000 PCMA Override Select the codec to be used for analog lines North American users should Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 144 of 317 Boost Ringer Fast Ringer Low Power Ring Detect FXS MWI Mode Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 gt GRANDSTREAM choose PCMU All other countries unless already known should be assumed to be PCMA The default setting is PCMU Note This option requires system reboot to take effect Configure whether normal ringing voltage 40V or maximum ringing voltage 89V for analog phones attached to the FXS port is required The default setting is Normal Configure to increase the ringing speed to 25HZ This option can be used with Low Power option The default setting is Normal Configure the peak voltage up to 50V during Fast Ringer operation This option is used with Fast Ringer The default setting is Normal If set to Full Wave false ring detection will be prevented for lines where Caller ID is sent before the first ring and proceeded by a pola
196. ent Name Type 7 Start Time fra End Time Delete Search Result s Delete All View 10 2014 12 28 16 53 58 System Crash Generate Alert System crashed System has restored automatically The core dump file is Here 2014 12 26 05 33 54 System Crash Generate Alert System crashed System has restored automatically The core dump file is Here 2014 12 23 20 03 50 System Crash Generate Alert System crashed System has restored automatically The core dump file is Here 2014 12 21 14 43 50 System Crash Generate Alert System crashed System has restored automatically The core dump file is Here 2014 12 19 08 01 23 System Crash Generate Alert System crashed System has restored automatically The core dump file is Here Figure 164 System Events gt Alert Log User could also filter alert logs by selecting a certain event category type of alert log and or specifying a certain time period The matching results will be displayed after clicking on SE Alert logs are classified into two types by the system 1 Generate Alert Generated when alert events happen for example alert logs for disk usage exceeding the alert threshold 2 Restore to Normal Generated when alert events being cleared for example logs for disk usage dropping back below the alert threshold User could filter out alert logs of Generate Alert or Restore to Normal by specifying the type according to need The following figure shows an example of filt
197. er Please see a sample diagram below Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 46 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Method Route A 192 168 2 x 172 18 25 x LAN Port WAN Port DHCP Server 192 168 2 1 IP address 172 18 25 10 Figure 17 UCM6510 Network Interface Method Route e Method Switch WAN port interface is used for uplink connection LAN port interface is used as bridge for PC connection Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 47 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD gS Method Switch LAN Internet Ethernet 0 0 IP Address 192 168 40 1 I Ekarne Switch Subnetmask 255 255 255 0 PC 192 168 40 15 WAN Port IP address 192 168 40 10 Figure 18 UCM6510 Network Interface Method Switch e Method Dual Both WAN port and LAN port are used for uplink connection WAN port will be mapped to LAN 1 interface LAN port will be mapped to LAN 2 interface Users will need assign LAN 1 or LAN 2 as the default interface in option Default Interface and configure Gateway IP if static IP is used for this interface Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 48 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Method Dual x SE Router a2 x IP Address 192 168 40 1 Router E IP Address 172 18 25 1 192 168 40 x 172 18 25 x 4 LAN 1 WAN Port IP address 192 168 40 10 IP address 172 18 25 10 78 g LAN 2 LAN Port 3
198. ering out alert logs of type of Restore to Normal Alert Log Event Name All Type Restore to normal v Start Time End Time Delete Search Result s Delete All Time View 10 2014 10 20 10 03 25 2014 10 20 09 44 27 2014 10 20 09 21 10 2014 10 20 09 17 53 2014 10 20 09 08 55 2014 10 20 08 54 53 2014 10 20 08 52 37 2014 10 20 08 23 32 2014 10 20 08 21 20 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SIP Peer Trunk Status SIP Peer Trunk Status SIP Peer Trunk Status SIP Peer Trunk Status SIP Peer Trunk Status SIP Peer Trunk Status SIP Peer Trunk Status SIP Peer Trunk Status SIP Peer Trunk Status Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is HZPBX Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is MoroccoPBX Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is MoroccoPBX Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is VenezuelaUCM Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is MoroccoPBX Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is HZPBX Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is MoroccoPBX Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is VenezuelaUCM Restore to normal SIP peer trunk service return to normal Trunk name is VenezuelaUCM Figure 165 Filter for Alert Log
199. ersion 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM Edit Pickup Group EE SN NM NE 221 EPER 222 Music On Hold Default Class rrrrnnrnnnnnnonnrnnnnnrrnnrnnnnnrrnnrnnnnnsennrnnnnnsennnnnnnnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsenn 223 Configure Analog Trunk without Fax Detection rrrrrrrnnrnrorrrnnnrnvrrrrnnnnnvvnrnnnnnnrennnnnnnnennnnnnn 226 Configure Extension For Fax Machine rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnvnrnnnnnrrnnrnnnnnrennnnnnnnsennnnnnnnsennnnnsnnsennnnnn 227 Gokigure INbOUNG RUE TOR FAG uendrede 227 Create Fax Extension EEE ER 228 Inbound Route to Fax Extension ccccsceececeseeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeessenseesseeeeesseeeeesaeeeeneas 228 Create Follow MC cccccccccssssececceseseeceecceeeeeeesseeuseceeseueaeeeeessuaaeeeeessuaueeeeesseaueeeeesseageeeessaaaass 231 BIL OM NIG criin T E E E 231 Configure One Key Dial rrrrrrnnnnrvnnnnnnnnrvnnrnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnsssnnnnnnnssennnnnnnssennnnnn 233 One Key Dial Destinations rrrrrrnnnrnrvrrrnnnnnvvnrnnnnnrrnnrnnnnnrennnnnnnnsnnnnnnnsnsennnnnnnssrnnnnnnsssnnnnnnsnee 234 Greate ERE EE 235 ANNEN 240 Create Dial By Name Group rrnrennnnnnnnnvnvnnnnnnrrnvrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnsernnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnsssennnnnn 243 Dial By Name Group In IVR Key Pressing Events rrrrrnnnnrrnrnnnnevrnnnnrnnnnnnrennnnerennnnnnrnnnnnnnen 244 Dial By Name Group In Inbound Route rrrrrrnnnnnrvnrrnnnnrrrnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnennnnnnsnsennrnnnsnsennnnnnsnsenn 244 Configu
200. es a new user Department Fax Email Address First Name Enter the necessary information to keep a record for this user Last Name Home Number Phone Number Once created the Super Admin can edit the users by clicking on or delete the user by clicking on i Privilege admin Super Admin 2014 11 06 14 55 18 support Admin sales Admin Tota 3 Show 14 Cot EG Figure 9 User Management New Users Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 39 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD USER PORTAL The user could log in web UI user portal using the extension number and password When there is an extension created in the UCM6510 the corresponding user account for the extension is automatically created The user portal allows limited access including user information extension configuration and CDR information of the extension The login username is the extension number and the password is configured by Super Admin The following figure shows the dialog of editing the account information by Super Admin The User Name must be the extension number and it s not configurable Edit User Information 1001 User Name 1001 User Password AVHJL1y Privilege Consumer Department Support G Fax i Email Address 19ya tan grandstream com G First Name Last Name Tan G Home Number G Phone Number Figure 10 Edit User Information by Super Admin The following figure shows a
201. es used by English speaking customer support in Basic settings select an available extension for account 1 and click on Save Then click on Advanced settings tab to bring up the following dialog Users will see the English support template is applied since this is the default model template A preview of the device settings will be listed on the right side Edit Device 000B62576F 12 Modify Customize Settings 4 Model Templates Accounts Available Account 1 Account Active Yes Account Name 1000 Selected SIP Server 192 168 40 184 Outbound Proxy SIP User ID 1000 Authenticate IOD 1000 Authenticate Password admin1 English Support Template Voicemail User ID 97 l Temol 4 i ikani v Lanquage Settings Defaut Model Template D Language TT Date and Time Global Policy Date Format P Modify Global Policy Time Format 24 Hour Clock Figure 71 Zero Config Sample Device Preview 1 8 For the 3 phones used by Spanish support in Basic settings select an available extension for account 1 and click on Save Then click on Advanced settings tab to bring up the following dialog Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 108 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Edit Device 000B82578F12 5 Customize Device Settings E Preview Modify Customize Settings Phone 4 Model Templates Accounts pee Account 1 Account Active Yes Account Name 1005 SIF
202. est level required Only users with international level can use this rule This setting is used to compare with the outbound trunk s permission level when the inbound call dials out via a trunk on the UCM6510 Therefore it s usually used only when the Default Destination is set to By DID Select the default destination for the inbound call Extension Voicemail UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 182 of 317 Strip Prepend Prepend Trunk Name Dial Trunk DID Destination Alert Info Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM e Conference Room e Call Queue e Ring Group e Paging Intercom e Voicemail Group e Fax e DISA e IVR e By DID When By DID is used the UCM6510 will look for the destination based on the number dialed which could be local extensions conference call queue ring group paging intercom group IVR voicemail groups and Fax extension as configured in DID destination If the dialed number matches the DID pattern the call will be allowed to go through e Dial By Name Specify the number of digits to strip from the beginning of the DID This is used when By DID is selected in Default Destination Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped If enabled the trunk name will be added to the caller id name as the displayed caller id name Configure to allow the inbound call to dial o
203. estore purpose Click on D to restore from the backup file e User could also restore using the backup file saved in SD card or USB device plugged into the UCM6510 List of Previous Configuration Backups The files saved in the local disk backup_2015jan05_113832 tar 2015 01 05 14 43 06 UTC 05 00 Total 1 Show 1 1 coto The files saved in the external USB disk backup_2015jan05_113832 tar 2015 01 05 09 38 12 UTC 05 00 Total 1 Show 14 cow EG The files saved in the external SD card backup_2015jan05_113832 tar 2015 01 05 09 38 12 UTC 05 00 Total 1 Show 1 1 cow Figure 183 Restore UCM6510 from Backup File A Note e The uploaded backup file must be a tar file with no special characters like 4 amp space in the file name e The uploaded back file size must be under 10MB CLEANER Users could configure to clean the Call Detail Report Voice Records Voice Mails FAX automatically under web GUI gt Maintenance gt Cleaner Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 308 of 317 CDR Cleaner G Enable CDR Cleaner G CDR Clean Time G Clean Interval Voice Records Cleaner G Enable VR Cleaner G Choose Cleaner File G VR Clean Threshold G VR Clean Time G VR Clean Interval Enable CDR Cleaner CDR Clean Time Clean Interval Enable VR Cleaner Choose Cleaner File VR Clean Threshold VR Clean Time Clean Interval GRANDSTREAM Recordin
204. f users need scan the entire network segment enter 255 for example 192 168 40 255 instead of a specific IP address Then click on Save to start discovering the devices within the same network To successfully discover the devices Zero Config needs to be enabled on the UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Auto Provisioning Settings Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 85 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Auto Discover The PBX can automatically discover the new devices by ARP or PING It can scan the entire network segment or single IP address Gi Scan Method Ping Gi Scan IP Figure 56 Auto Discover The following figure shows a list of discovered phones The MAC address IP Address Extension if assigned Version Vendor Model Connection Status Create Config Options Edit Delete Update are displayed in the list MAC Address 000B82000000 GRANDSTREAM GXV3175v2 000B82201D5E 67 110 250 188 GRANDSTREAM GXV3140 E Ep 000B8227F2F7 GRANDSTREAM GXP2124 000B8227FB79 67 110 250 175 GRANDSTREAM GXV3240 000B822A852C 192 168 40 3 GRANDSTREAM GXP2100 000B822B0B34 GRANDSTREAM GXP2120 000B822B2D94 192 168 40 143 GRANDSTREAM GXP2110 Ei amp 8 8 Ep Figure 57 Discovered Devices GLOBAL CONFIGURATION GLOBAL POLICY Global configuration will apply to all the connected Grandstream SIP end point devices in the same LAN with the UCM6510 no matter wh
205. figured The default setting is No Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider when Register IAX Trunk type is selected Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider when Register IAX Trunk type is selected If selected the trunk will be disabled UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 170 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE WORLD Table 60 IAX Register Trunk Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Provider Name Host Name Keep Trunk CID Disable This Trunk Caller ID Caller ID Name Username Password Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules inbound rules and etc Configure the IP address or URL for the VolP provider s server of the trunk If enabled the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension s CID when the extension has CID configured The default setting is No If selected the trunk will be disabled Configure the Caller ID This is the number that the trunk will try to use when making outbound calls For some providers it might not be possible to set the CallerID with this option and this option will be ignored When making outgoing calls the following rules are used to determine which CallerID will be used if they exist e The CallerID configured for the extension will be looked up first e f no CallerID configured for the extension the CallerID configured for the trunk will be used e If the above two are m
206. fully IVR Create New IVR Extension 7000 Permission internal 2014 11 04 18 51 38 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Login User Name admin 2014 11 04 18 03 08 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Login User Name admin Total 69 Show 47 Goto Figure 14 Operation Logs The operation log can be sorted and filtered for easy access Click on the header of each column to sort For example clicking on Date will sort the logs according to operation date and time Clicking on Date again will reverse the order Table 6 Operation Log Column Header Date The date and time when the operation is executed User Name The username of the user who performed the operation IP Address The IP address from which the operation is made Results The result of the operation l The page where the operation is made For example login logout delete user Page Operation create trunk and etc Specific Operation Click on to view the options and values configured by this operation User could also filter the operation logs by time condition IP address and or username Configure these View Operation Logs conditions and then click on Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 42 of 317 GRANDSTREAM B ONNESTING THE WORLD Operation Log From Date 2014 11 01 00 00 To Date 2014 11 06 15 38 IP Address 192 168 40 173 User Name support v View Operation Logs Delete Searched O
207. g 1s on 1s off Connected but the link is only working one way UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 31 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD USE THE WEB GUI ACCESS WEB GUI The UCM6510 embedded Web server responds to HTTP HTTPS GET POST requests Embedded HTML pages allow users to configure the device through a Web browser such as Microsoft IE version 8 Mozilla Firefox Google Chrome and etc e F ndstean UCM6510 IPPBX Appliance ve Password I Figure 4 UCM6510 web GUI Login Page To access the web GUI 1 Connect the computer to the same network as the UCM6510 2 Ensure the device is properly powered up and shows its IP address on the LCD 3 Open a web browser on the computer and enter the IP address in the address bar The web login page will display as shown above 4 Enter the administrator s login and password to access the web configuration menu The default administrator s username and password is admin and admin It is highly recommended to change the default password after login for the first time Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 32 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM A Note By default the UCM6510 has Redirect From Port 80 enabled Therefore if users type in the UCM6510 IP address in the web browser the web page will be automatically redirected to the page using HTTPS and port 8089 For example if the LCD shows 192 168 40 167 please enter 192 168 40 167 i
208. g Files Conference Queue Voicemail Fax Figure 184 Cleaner Table 111 Cleaner Configuration Enable the CDR Cleaner function Enter 0 23 to specify the hour of the day to clean up CDR Enter 1 30 to specify the day of the month to clean up CDR Enter the Voice Records Cleaner function Select the file type s to be cleaned automatically Specify the Voice Records threshold from 0 to 99 by using local storage status in percentage Enter 0 23 to specify the hour of the day to clean up Voice Records Enter 1 30 to specify the day of the month to clean up Voice Records All the cleaner logs will be listed on the bottom of the page RESET AND REBOOT Users could perform reset and reboot under web GUI gt Maintenance gt Reset and Reboot To factory reset the device select the mode type first There are two different types for reset e User Data All the data including voicemail recordings IVR Prompt Music on Hold CDR and backup files will be cleared Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 309 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L e All All the configurations and data will be reset to factory default Reset amp Reboot Factory Reset User Data All Reboot Figure 185 Reset and Reboot SYSLOG On the UCM6510 users could dump the syslog information to a remote server under web GUI gt Maintenance gt Syslog Enter the syslog server hostname or IP address and select the module level for the s
209. g to RFC 2849 which is how the LDAP tree is filtered Cn Common Name ou Organization Unit dc Domain Component e Here is an example of how the search for ou pbx dc pbx dc com is performed in LDAP server query Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 61 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM From the dc com Domain Component find the dc pbx Domain Component first In the dc pbx Domain Component find the Organizational Unit called pbx ou pbx and then find the object that has a Common Name of admin If users have the Grandstream phone provisioned by the UCM6510 the LDAP directory has been set up on the phone and can be used right away for users to access all phonebooks generated in the UCM6510 Additionally users could manually configure the LDAP client settings to manipulate the built in LDAP server on the UCM6510 If the UCM6510 has multiple LDAP phonebooks created in the LDAP client configuration users could use dc pbx dc com as Base DN to have access to all phonebooks on the UCM6510 LDAP server or use a specific phonebook DN for example ou people dc pbx dc com to access to phonebook with Phonebook DN ou people dc pbx dc com only To access LDAP Server settings go to web GUI gt Settings gt LDAP Server LDAP SERVER CONFIGURATIONS The following figure shows the default LDAP server configurations on the UCM6510 LDAP Server configurations Base DN dc pbx dc com PBX DN ou pbx dc pbx d
210. ger the provisioning process The device will start downloading the generated configuration file from the URL contained in the NOTIFY message Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 105 of 317 GRANDSTREAM BONNESTING THE WORLD Manage Zero Config Create New Device Delete Selected Devices Modify Selected Devices Reset All Extensions Filter Al v View 30 v a MAC Address 000B8262B023 192 168 40 161 GRANDSTREAM GXP2140 MH O 000B8262B024 192 168 40 157 GRANDSTREAM GXP2140 P d t gt 000B82661BA9 192 168 40 166 _ GRANDSTREAM GXP2160 5 KA v 000B8266ED61 192 168 40 125 GRANDSTREAM GXV3240 Va M tv gt Total 4 Show 11 Goto First Prev Next Last Figure 69 Device List in Zero Config In this web page users can also click on Reset All Extensions to reset the extensions of all the devices SAMPLE APPLICATION Assuming in a small business office where there are 8 GXP2140 phones used by customer support and 1 GXV3275 phone used by customer support supervisor 3 of the 8 customer support members speak Spanish and the rest speak English We could deploy the following configurations to provisioning the office phones for the customer support team 1 Goto web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Auto Provision Settings select Enable Zero Config 2 Go to web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Global Policy configure Date Format Time Format
211. ginated from a non internal source like a VolP trunk and sent to an internal extension Outbound calls Outbound calls are calls sent to a non internal source like a VolP trunk from an internal extension Internal calls Internal calls are calls from one internal extension to another extension which are not Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 288 of 317 External calls Inbound Trunks Outbound Trunks Caller Number Caller Name Callee Number Start Time End Time GRANDSTREAM sent over a trunk External calls are calls sent from one trunk to another trunk which are not sent to any internal extension Select certain inbound trunk s and the CDR of calls going inbound through the trunk s will be filtered out Select certain outbound trunk s and the CDR of calls going outbound through the trunk s will be filtered out Enter the caller number to filter the CDR report CDR with the matching caller number will be filtered out User could specify a particular caller number or enter a pattern matches zero or more characters only appears in the end X matches any digit from O to 9 case insensitive repeatable only appears in the end For example 3XXX It will filter out CDR that having caller number with leading digit 3 and of 4 digits length 3 It will filter out CDR that having caller number with leading digit 3 and of any length Enter the caller name to filter the CDR
212. gt Announcements Center The following example demonstrates the usage of this feature Click EAE ee to create new group Give a name to the newly created group s Create a group number which is used with code to send voice message gt oO y Select the extensions to be included in the group who will receive the voice message Create New Group Name Test G Number 666 Available Extensions 1000 Testi 1001 Test 1002 Tests Figure 145 Announcements Center Group Configuration In this example group Test has number 666 Extension 1000 1001 and 1002 are in this group Create New Annoucements Center Click to create a new Announcement Center Give aname to the newly created Announcement Center Specify the code which will be used with group number to send the voice message to OND au Select the message that will be used by the code from the Custom Prompt drop down menu To create a new Prompt please click Prompt link and follow the instructions in that page Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 271 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Create New Annoucements Center Name Gi Code G Custom Prompt Ring Timeout Figure 146 Announcements Center Code Configuration Code and Group number are used together to direct specified message to the target group All extensions in the group will receive the message For example we can se
213. gure the end time for office hour Week Select the work days in one week Check this options to show advanced options Once selected please Show Advanced Options rom eae specify Month and Day below Month Select the months for office time Day Select the work days in one month Select Start Time End Time and the day for the Week for the office time The system administrator can also define month and day of the month as advanced options Once done click on Save and then Apply Change for the office time to take effect The office time will be listed in the web page as the figure shows below Settings gt gt Time Settings gt gt Office Time Office Time Create New Office Time Delete Selected Office Times View 30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 3 24 25 26 27 28 Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul 1 08 00 18 00 Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Aug Sept Oct Nov Dec Total 4 Show 1 4 coto Figure 46 Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time e Clickon to edit the office time e Clickon to delete the office time e Click on Delete Selected Office Times to delete multiple selected office times at once HOLIDAY On the UCM6510 the system administrator can define holiday which can be used to configure time condition for extension call forwarding schedule and inbound rule schedule To configure holiday go to Web GUI gt Settings
214. hart Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 283 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING TRE WORLD Resource Usage CPU Usage Memory Usage Figure 156 System Status gt Resource Usage SYSTEM EVENTS The UCM6510 can monitor important system events log the alerts and send Email notifications to the system administrator ALERT EVENTS LIST The system alert events list can be found under web GUI gt Status gt System Events gt Alert Events List Click on to configure the parameters for each event 1 Disk Usage Alert Settings Disk Usage G Detect Cycle minute s G Alert Threshold Figure 157 System Events gt Alert Events Lists Disk Usage e Detect Cycle The UCM6510 will perform the internal disk usage detection based on this cycle Users can enter the number and then select second s minute s hour s day s to configure the cycle e Alert Threshold If the detected value exceeds the threshold in percentage the UCM6510 system will send the alert Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 284 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD 2 Modify Admin Password Alert Settings Modify Admin Password G Detect Cycle minute s Cancel Save Figure 158 System Events gt Alert Events Lists Modify Admin Password e Detect Cycle The UCM6510 will initiate the admin password check based on this cycle Users can enter the number and then select second s minute s
215. has a ring timeout configured the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension The default setting is disabled The recording files can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files e f set to Yes users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls e If set to By Time users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls during the selected time condition e If set to No users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls If Skip Trunk Auth is set to By Time select a time condition during which users can skip entering password when making outbound calls Configure personal password when making outbound calls via trunk Table 38 IAX Extension Configuration Parameters Specific Time Specific Time Time Condition CREATE NEW FXS EXTENSION Click to add Time Condition to configure specific time for this extension The UCM6510 supports Foreign eXchange Subscriber FXS interface FXS is used when user needs to connect analog phone lines or FAX machines to the UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 121 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD To manually create new FXS user go to Web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions Click on Create New User gt Create New FXS Extension and a new dialog window will show f
216. he Subject and Message content to be used in the Email when sending the Fax to the users The template variables are e CALLERIDNUM Caller ID Number e CALLERIDNAME Caller ID Name e RECEIVEEXTEN The extension to receive the Fax e FAXPAGES Number of pages in the Fax e S VM DATE The date and time when the Fax is received UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 225 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE ne e Clickon to edit the Fax extension e Click on to delete the Fax extension SAMPLE CONFIGURATION TO RECEIVE FAX FROM PSTN LINE The following instructions describe how to use the UCM6510 to receive Fax from PSTN line on the Fax machine connected to the UCM6510 FXS port Connect Fax machine to the UCM6510 FXS port Connect PSTN line to the UCM6510 FXO port Go to web GUI gt PBX gt Analog Trunks page oN 2s Create or edit the analog trunk for Fax as below Fax Detection Make sure Fax Detection option is set to No Edit Analog Trunk FAX UNE Channels 1 2 GQ Trunk Name FAX LINE Advanced Options GJ Enable Polarity Reversal Current Disconnect a Gi Ring Timeout Thresholdims RX Gain 0 G TX Gain Use CallerlD GJ Fax Detection G Caller ID Scheme Bellcore Telcordia i Auto Record Figure 124 Configure Analog Trunk without Fax Detection 5 Goto UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions page 6 Create or edit the extension for FXS port
217. he user to make a new call The default setting is No Once successfully created users can configure the inbound route destination as DISA or IVR key event as DISA When dialing into DISA users will be prompted with password first After entering the correct password a second dial tone will be heard for the users to dial out Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 236 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CALLBACK FEATURE Callback is mainly designed for users who often use their mobile phones to make long distance or international calls which may have high service charges The callback feature provides an economic solution for reduce the cost from this The callback feature works as follows Configure a new callback on the UCM6510 On the UCM6510 configure destination of the inbound route for analog trunk to callback Save and apply the settings The user calls the PSTN number of the UCM6510 using the mobile phone which goes to callback destination as specified in the inbound route Once the user hears the ringback tone from the mobile phone hang up the call on the mobile phone The UCM6510 will call back the user The user answers the call The call will be sent to DISA or IVR which directs the user to dial the destination number The user will be connected to the destination number 2 NY gt O ONO In this way the calls are placed and connected through trunks on the UCM6510 instead of to the mobile
218. hed Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 247 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTIN ORLD On Active Calls page click on O to refresh the status of active calls HANG UP ACTIVE CALLS To hang up an active call click on icon in the active call dialog Users can also click on babi to hang up all active calls shown on the Active Calls page CALL MONITOR During an active call click on icon and the Monitor dialog will pop up Monitor Monitors Extension Monitored Extension GJ Spy Modes Gi Require Confirmation Figure 141 Configure to Monitor an Active Call In the Monitor dialog configure the following to monitor an active call 1 Enter an available extension for Monitor s Extension which will be used to monitor the active call 2 Monitored Extension must be one of the parties in the active call to be monitored 3 Select spy mode There are three options in Spy Mode e Listen In Listen mode the extension monitoring the call can hear both parties in the active call but the audio of the user on this extension will not be heard by either party in the monitored active call e Whisper In Whisper mode the extension monitoring the call can hear both parties in the active call The user on this extension can only talk to the selected monitored extension and he she will not be heard by the other party in the active call This can be usually used to supervise calls
219. hrough a FXO while Long distance 10 digit dials through a low cost SIP trunk Users can also set up a failover trunk to be used when the primary trunk fails Go to web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Outbound Routes to add and edit outbound rules Click on Create New Outbound Rule to add a new outbound route e Click on to edit the outbound route e Click on to delete the outbound route e On the UCM6510 the outbound route priority is based on Best matching pattern For example the UCM6510 has outbound route A with pattern 1xxx and outbound route B with pattern 10xx configured When dialing 1000 for outbound call outbound route B will always be used first This is because pattern 10xx is a better match than pattern 1xxx Only when there are multiple outbound routes with the same pattern configured users can click on to move the outbound route up down to arrange the priority among those outbound routes Table 63 Outbound Route Configuration Parameters Configure the name of the calling rule e g local long distance and etc Calling Rule Name el Letters digits and are allowed e All patterns are prefixed with the _ e Special characters X Any Digit from 0 9 Z Any Digit from 1 9 Pattern TE N Any Digit from 2 9 Wildcard Match one or more characters Wildcard Match zero or more characters immediately Example 12345 9 Any digit from 1 to 9 Configure the password for users to
220. ial Plan for each type Configure PRI T310 Timer in seconds The default value is 10 seconds Select the PRI Indication e outofoand Use RELEASE DISCONNECT or other messages with CAUSE to indicate call progress e g cause unassigned number or user busy e inband use in band tones to play busy or congestion signal to the other side This is the default setting The interval that restarts idle channels This setting is used to set up the ChannellD in SETUP message If enabled only the specified B channel can be used Otherwise select one UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 149 of 317 Facility Enable NSF lt GRANDSTREAM of the channels in B channel If you need override the existing channels selection routine and force all PRI channels to be marked as exclusively selected please enable it If selected transmission of facility based ISDN supplementary services such as caller name from CPE over facility will be enabled Some switches AT amp T especially require network specific facility megacom Currently the supported values are none sdn tollfreemegacom accunet Table 49 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 SS7 Basic Settings Clock SS7 Variant Originating Point Code Destination Point Code First CIC Assign CIC To D channel Network Indicator Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 All E1 T1 J1 spans generate a clock signal on their transmit side The parameter determines
221. ice in HEX format The MAC address can be found on the label coming with original box and on the label located on the bottom of the device IP address Default gateway address Subnet mask address DNS Server address UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 282 of 317 GRANDSTREAM NNECTING TH ww ts eo STORAGE USAGE Users could access the storage usage information from web GUI gt Status gt System Status gt Storage Usage It shows the available and used space for the following partitions e Configuration partition This partition contains PBX system configuration files and service configuration files e Data partition Voicemail recording files IVR file Music On Hold files and etc e USB disk USB disk will display if connected e SD Card SD Card will display if connected Storage Usage Configuration Partition Total 96MB Available 54 MB E Used 40 MB USB Disk a Partition 1 Total 1 888MB Available 1 855 MB E Used 31 MB Data Partition Total 3 168MB Available 3 071 MB E Used 95 MB SD Card 1 Partition 1 Total 3 808MB Available 3 455 MB E Used 351 MB Figure 155 System Status gt Storage Usage RESOURCE USAGE When configuring and managing the UCM6510 users could access resource usage information to estimate the current usage and allocate the resources accordingly Under web GUI gt Status gt System Status gt Resource Usage the current CPU usage and Memory usage are shown in the pie c
222. icemail User ID 97 Giova Templates Lv Date and Time Selected OP petaut model Template l Date Format hall W Time Format 24 Hour Clock cova rory P Modify Global Policy Upgrade and Provision Figure 73 Zero Config Sample Device Preview 3 10 Click on Apply Changes to apply saved changes 11 On the web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Zero Config page click on O to send NOTIFY to trigger the device to download config file from UCM6510 Now all the 9 phones in the network will be provisioned with an unique extension registered on the UCM6510 3 of the phones will be provisioned to display Spanish on LCD and the other 5 will be provisioned to display English on LCD The GXV3275 used by the supervisor will be provisioned to use the default language on LCD display since it s not specified in the global policy Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 110 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD EXTENSIONS CREATE NEW USER CREATE NEW SIP EXTENSION To manually create new SIP user go to web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions Click on Create New User gt Create New SIP Extension and a new dialog window will show for users to fill in the extension information The configuration parameters are as follows Create New SIP Extension General Extension 1002 CallerlD Number G Permission Internal SIPNAX Password DW8 5Ra5 Support Hot Deski
223. ick to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6510 Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 480 x 272 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored File If URL is selected as source specify the URL of the wallpaper file If Local UCM Server is selected as source click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6510 Check this option if the SIP end device supports 320 x 240 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored File If URL is selected as source specify the URL of the wallpaper file If Local UCM Server is selected as source click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6510 Global Templates can be accessed in web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Global Templates Users can create multiple global templates with different sets of configurations and save the templates Later on when the user configures the device in Edit Device dialog gt Advanced Settings the user can select to use one of the global template for the device Please refer to section MANAGE DEVICES for more details on using the global templates When creating global template users can select the categories and the parameters under each categories to be used in the template The global policy and the selected global template will both take effect when generating the config file However the selected global template has higher priorit
224. ignaling Trace e E amp M Trace web GUI gt Maintenance gt Troubleshooting gt E amp M Immediate Record Trace Here is the step to capture trace 1 Click on Start to start capturing trace The output result shows Capturing 2 Once the test is done click on Stop to stop the trace 3 Click on Download to download the trace Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 158 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Gre PBX Settings if set GS Maintenance gt gt Troubleshooting gt gt PRI Signaling Trace PRI Signaling Trace al Start ai ial Output Result Troubleshooting Figure 88 Troubleshooting Digital Trunks For E amp M Immediate Signaling user could configure Record Direction and Record File Mode After capturing the trace users can download it for basic analysis Or you can contact Grandstream Technical support in the following link for further assistance if the issue is not resolved http www grandstream com index php support Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 159 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 160 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD DATA TRUNK The UCM6510 E1 T1 J1 interface also supports data trunk function that allows users to access Internet Users can select HDLC HDLC ETH Cisco and PPP protocol f
225. ile Music On Hold Class l tracking the user By default it is enabled and user will be asked to press 1 to accept the call l i or to press 2 to reject the call after answering a Follow Me call Confirm When Answering A l l If it is disabled the Follow Me call will be established once after the user answers it The added numbers are listed here Click on to arrange the order Follow Me Numbers l l Click on to delete the number Click on to add new numbers Add a new Follow Me number which could be a Local Extension or New Follow Me Number External Number The selected dial plan should have permissions to dial the defined external number Select the order in which the Follow Me destinations will be dialed to reach Dialing Order the user ring all at once or ring one after the other 5 Click on Follow Me Options to enable or disable the options listed in the following table Table 77 Follow Me Options Playback Incoming Status If enabled the PBX will playback the incoming status message before Message starting the Follow Me steps If enabled the PBX will record the caller s name from the phone so it can Record the Caller s Name be announced to the callee in each step Playback Unreachable Status If enabled the PBX will playback the unreachable status message to the Message caller if the callee cannot be reached Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 232 of 317 GRANDSTREAM
226. ill be used in the From header as the name field If no From User is configured the user field of the URI in the From header will be filled with this value SIP Domain Support Domain Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Configure the domain for the UCM6510 Incoming INVITE and REFER messages can be matched against a list of allowed domains each of which can direct the call to a specific context if desired By default all UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 263 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD domains are accepted and sent to the default context or the context associated with the user peer placing the call Register to non local domains will be automatically denied if a domain list is configured Up to 10 domains can be added Configure the domain in the From header of the SIP message lt may be From Domain ae required by some providers for authentication If enabled the UCM6510 will add local host name and local IP to domain Auto Domain ee list The default setting is No If enabled requests for external domains that are not served by the Allow External Domains l EN UCM6510 will be allowed The default setting is Yes SIP SETTINGS MISC Table 90 SIP Settings Misc Outbound SIP Registrations Register Timeout Configure the register retry timeout in seconds The default setting is 20 Configure the number of registration attempts before the UCM6510 gives Register Attempts up The default setting is 0
227. ill result in no records returned the appropriate container header for the output format will be the only output If the format parameter is in error the CSV header will be used Error messages will appear in the Asterisk log along with errors stemming from failed database connections etc e Other errors which return no records include Multiple hyphens in an extension range e g caller 5300 5301 6300 Empty parameter value e g caller Extension values starting with comma or with consecutive commas e g caller 5300 5303 Unknown parameters e g caler 5300 or URI ending with amp Except for caller and callee multiple instances of the same parameter within the URI e g minDur 5 amp minDur 10 Example Output The following are examples of each of the output formats for the same data set CSV Acctld accountcode src dst dcontext clid channel dstchannel lastapp lastdata start answer end duration billsec disposition amaflags uniqueid userfield channel_ ext dstchannel_ ext service 62 5300 5301 from internal pn01 lt 5300 gt SIP 5300 00000000 SIP 5301 00000001 Dial SIP 5301 60 2013 12 03 11 46 40 2013 12 03 11 46 43 2013 12 03 11 46 49 9 6 ANSWERED DOCUMENTATION 1386092800 0 EXT 5300 5301 s 63 5300 5301 from internal pn01 lt 5300 gt SIP 5300 00000000 SIP 5301 00000001 Dial SIP 5301 60 2013 12 03 14 01 41 2013 12 03 14 01 43 2013 12 03 14 01 46 5 3 ANSWERED DOCUMENTATION 1386100901 0 EXT 5300
228. ime Only one of the two headers is allowed to be contained in the SIP INVITE message Select to enable outbound proxy in this trunk The default setting is No When outbound proxy support is enabled enter the IP address or URL of the outbound proxy Configure where to get the destination ID of an incoming SIP call from SIP Request line or To header The default is set to Request line Configure the default DTMF mode when sending DTMF on this trunk e Default The global setting of DTMF mode will be used The global setting for DTMF Mode setting is under web Ul gt PBX gt SIP Settings gt ToS e RFC2833 Send DTMF using RFC2833 e Info Send DTMF using SIP INFO message e Inband Send DTMF using inband audio This requires 64 bit codec i e PCMU and PCMA e Auto Send DTMF using RFC2833 if offered Otherwise inband will be used If enabled the UCM6510 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online The default setting is No When Enable Qualify option is set to Yes configure the timeout in ms for the Qualify SIP message If no response is received within the timeout the device is considered offline The default setting is 1000ms UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 166 of 317 Qualify Frequency Maximum Number of Call Lines Fax Mode SRTP GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD When Enable Qualify option is set to Yes configure the interval in seconds of the SIP
229. ings Send Test Email Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 70 of 317 GRANDSTREAM TIME SETTINGS AUTO TIME UPDATING The current system time on the UCM6510 is displayed on the upper right of the web page It can also be found under web GUI gt Status gt System Status gt General To configure the UCM6510 to update time automatically go to web GUI gt Settings gt Time Settings gt Auto Time Updating A Note The configurations under Web GUl gt Settings gt Time Settings gt Time Auto Updating page require reboot to take effect Please consider configuring auto time updating related changes when setting up the UCM6510 for the first time to avoid service interrupt after installation and deployment in production Table 19 Auto Time Updating Specify the URL or IP address of the NTP server for the UCM6510 to Remote NTP Server synchronize the date and time The default NTP server is ntp ipvideotalk com If set to Yes the UCM6510 is allowed to get provisioned for Time Zone Enable DHCP Option 2 from DHCP Option 2 in the local server automatically The default setting is Yes If set to Yes the UCM6510 is allowed to get provisioned for NTP Server Enable DHCP Option 42 from DHCP Option 42 in the local server automatically This will override the manually configured NTP Server The default setting is Yes Select the proper time zone option so the UCM6510 can display correct time acc
230. issing the Global Outbound CID defined in Web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt General will be used Configure the name of the caller to be displayed when the extension has no CallerID Name configured Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider Advanced Settings Codec Preference Enable Qualify Qualify Timeout Qualify Frequency Maximum Number of Call Lines Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Select audio and video codec for the VolP trunk The available codecs are PCMU PCMA GSM AAL2 G 726 32 G 726 G 722 G 729 G 723 ILBC ADPCM H 264 H 263 H 263p If enabled the UCM6510 will regularly send SIP OPTIONS to the device to check if the device is still online The default setting is No When Enable Qualify option is set to Yes configure the timeout in ms for the Qualify SIP message If no response is received within the timeout the device is considered offline The default setting is 1000ms When Enable Qualify option is set to Yes configure the interval in seconds of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online The default setting is 60 seconds The maximum number of concurrent calls using the trunk The default settings 0 which means no limited UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 171 of 317 Fax Mode GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE WORLD Select Fax mode The default setting is
231. ithout notice The latest electronic version of this user manual is available for download here http www grandstream com support Reproduction or transmittal of the entire or any part in any form or by any means electronic or print for any purpose without the express written permission of Grandstream Networks Inc is not permitted Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 19 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 20 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD PRODUCT OVERVIEW FEATURE HIGHTLIGHTS e 1 GHz quad core Cortex A9 application processor large memory 1GB DDR3 RAM 32GB Flash and dedicated high performance multi core DSP array for advanced voice processing e 1 Integrated 1 T1 E1 J1 interface 2 PSTN trunk FXO ports 2 analog telephone Fax FXS ports with lifeline capability in case of power outage and up to 50 SIP trunk accounts e Hardware DSP based 128ms tail length carrier grade line echo cancellation LEC hardware based caller ID call progress tone and smart automated impedance matching for various countries e Gigabit network port s with integrated PoE USB SD card integrated NAT router with advanced QoS support e Strong defense against malicious attacks Fail2ban Whitelist Blacklist alerts etc e Data communication via T1 E1 J1 and data voice combined communication via T1 E1 J1 with SS7
232. k Settings gt DDNS Settings enable DDNS service and configure username password and host name DDNS Settings DONS allows you to access your network using domain names instead of IP address DDNS Settings DDNS Server no ip com Enable DDNS il Username hao_grandstream Password 28200088 Host Name haograndstream ddns net Figure 27 UCM6510 DDNS Setting Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 55 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD 3 Now you can use domain name instead of IP address to connect to the UCM6510 web Ul haograndstream ddns net 8089 G 2 e F nistreat Settings Maintenance Trying Lnavailane Ports 1 Figure 28 Using Domain Name to Connect to UCM6510 FIREWALL The UCM6510 provides users firewall configurations to prevent certain malicious attack to the UCM6510 system Users could configure to allow restrict or reject specific traffic through the device for security and bandwidth purpose The UCM6510 also provides Fail2ban feature for authentication errors in SIP REGISTER INVITE and SUBSCRIBE To configure firewall settings in UCM6510 go to web GUI gt Settings gt Firewall page STATIC DEFENSE Under web GUI gt Settings gt Firewall gt Static Defense page users will see the following information e Current service information with port process and type e Typical firewall settings e Custom firewall settings The following table shows a sam
233. klist by CallerlD is used for all inbound routes Blacklist Enable Blacklist Manage Biacklistlist A 12345678 _ Total 2 Add Blacklist Number c gt Figure 99 Blacklist Configuration Parameters Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 185 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM L e Select the checkbox for Blacklist Enable to turn on Blacklist feature for all inbound routes Blacklist is disabled by default e Enter a number in Add Blacklist Number field and then click to add to the list e To remove a number from the Blacklist select the number in Blacklist list and click on Ht Users could also add a number to the Blacklist or remove a number from the Blacklist by dialing the feature code for Blacklist Add default 40 and Blacklist Remove default 41 from an extension The feature code can be configured under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Feature Codes Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 186 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM CONFERENCE BRIDGE The UCM6510 supports Conference Bridge allowing 64 participants with up to 8 bridges at the same time The conference bridge configurations can be accessed under web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Conference In this page users could create edit view invite manage the participants and delete conference bridges The conference bridge status and conference call recordings if recording is enabled will
234. l not be Dynamic Defense blocked by the UCM6510 For example Whitelist 192 168 1 3 192 168 1 4 The following figure shows a configuration example like this e lfahost at IP address 192 168 40 7 initiates more than 20 TCP connections to the UCM6510 within 1 minute it will be added into UCM6510 blacklist e This host 192 168 40 7 will be blocked by the UCM6510 for 300 seconds e Since IP address 192 168 40 5 is in whitelist if the host at IP address 192 168 40 5 initiates more than 20 TCP connections to the UCM6510 within 1 minute it will not be added into UCM6510 blacklist It can still establish TCP connection with the UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 59 of 317 FAILZBAN GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Settings gt gt Firewall gt gt Dynamic Defense gt Dynamic Defense Dynamic Defense Dynamic Defense Enable wf Periodic Time Intervalimin 1 Blacklist Update Intervalis 300 Connection Threshold 20 Dynamic Defense Whitelist 192 168 40 5 Figure 30 Configure Dynamic Defense Fail2Ban feature on the UCM6510 provides intrusion detection and prevention for authentication errors in SIP REGISTER INVITE and SUBSCRIBE Once the entry is detected within Max Retry Duration the UCM6510 will take action to forbid the host for certain period as defined in Banned Duration This feature helps prevent SIP brute force attacks to the PBX system Table 16 Fail2Ban Settings Gl
235. laced Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped Use Failover Trunk Failover Trunk Strip Prepend INBOUND ROUTES Failover trunks can be used to make sure that a call goes through an alternate route when the primary trunk is busy or down If Use Failover Trunk is enabled and Failover trunk is defined the calls that cannot be placed via the regular trunk may have a secondary trunk to go through Example The user s primary trunk is a VoIP trunk and the user would like to use the PSTN when the VoIP trunk is not available The PSTN trunk can be configured as the failover trunk of the VoIP trunk Allows the user to specify the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the dialed string before the call is placed via the selected trunk Example The users will dial 9 as the first digit of a long distance calls However 9 should not be sent out via analog lines and the PSTN line In this case 1 digit should be stripped before the call is placed Specify the digits to be prepended before the call is placed via the trunk Those digits will be prepended after the dialing number is stripped Inbound routes can be configured via web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Inbound Routes e Click on Create New Inbound Rule button to add a new inbound route e Click on Blacklist button to configure blacklist
236. lay default idle screen after staying in menu option for 15 seconds e LCD Backlight The LCD backlight will be on upon key pressing The backlight will go off after the LCD stays in idle for 30 seconds Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 29 of 317 SRANDSTREAM The following table shows the LCD menu options View Events Device Info Network Info Network Menu Factory Menu Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 3 LCD Menu Options Critical Events Other Events Hardware Hardware version number Software Software version number P N Part number WAN MAC WAN side MAC address LAN MAC LAN side MAC address Uptime System up time since the last reboot WAN Mode DHCP Static IP or PPPoE WAN IP IP address WAN Subnet Mask LAN IP IP address LAN Subnet Mask WAN Mode Select WAN mode as DHCP Static IP or PPPoE Static Routes Reset Click to reset the static route setting Reboot Factory Reset LCD Test Patterns Press OK to start Then press Down button to test different LCD patterns When done press OK button to exit Fan Mode Select Auto or On LED Test Patterns Select All On All Off or Blinking and check LED status for USB SD T1 E1 J1 Phone 1 Phone 2 Line 1 Line 2 ports After the LED test select Back in the menu and the device will show the LED actual status again RTC Test Patterns Select 2022 02 22 22 22 or 2011
237. lected you might not be able to dial another class of numbers For example if National is configured you won t be able to dial local or international numbers This setting is used to specify the type of the caller number The service provider will usually verify this Indicates the D channel for control Configure the prefix in PRI Local Dial Plan and PRI Dial Plan for each type Configure PRI T310 Timer in seconds The default value is 10 seconds Select the PRI Indication e outofoand Use RELEASE DISCONNECT or other messages with CAUSE to indicate call progress e g cause unassigned number or user busy e inband use in band tones to play busy or congestion signal to the other side This is the default setting The interval that restarts idle channels This setting is used to set up the ChannellD in SETUP message If enabled only the specified B channel can be used Otherwise select one of the channels in B channel If you need override the existing channels selection routine and force all PRI channels to be marked as exclusively selected please enable it If selected transmission of facility based ISDN supplementary services such as caller name from CPE over facility will be enabled UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 154 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Some switches AT amp T especially require network specific facility NSF Currently the supported values are none sdn megacom tollfreemegacom accu
238. led Nature of Address Indicator and Calling Subscriber Prefix Nature of Address Indicator for each type Unknown Prefix Table 53 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters T1 E amp M Immediate E amp M Wink Basic Setting All E1 T1 J1 spans generate a clock signal on their transmit side The parameter determines whether the clock signal from the far end of the E1 T1 J1 is used as the master source of clock timing If the far end is used as the master the PBX system clock will synchronize to it geek e Master The port will never be used as a source of timing This is appropriate when you know the far end should always be a slave to you e Slave The equipment at the far end of the E1 T1 J1 link is the preferred source of the master clock RX Gain Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of digital port The valid range is from 24dB to 12dB TX Gain Configure the TX Gain for the transmitting channel of digital port The valid range is 24dB to 12dB Codec Select alaw or ulaw The default codec is ulaw for T1 Coding Select B8ZS or AMI The default setting is B8ZS for T1 OutgoingDialDelay The option is only valid for E amp M Wink signaling The dial delay interval Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 156 of 317 rxwink gt GRANDSTREAM after received WINK event in an outgoing call The default value is 200ms Configure receive wink timing The default setting is 300ms DIGITAL TRUNK CONFIGURATION
239. led on the UCM6510 Disable This Extension Note The disabled extension still exists on the PBX but can t be used on the end device If enabled this extension will be added to LDAP Phonebook PBX list if Enable LDAP disabled this extension will be skipped when creating LDAP Phonebook User Settings Configure the first name of the user The first name can contain First Name AE characters letters digits and _ Configure the last name of the user The last name can contain Last Name characters letters digits and _ Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 122 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM l Fill in the Email address for the user Voicemail will be sent to this Email Email Address dd address Configure the password for user portal access A random numeric User Password password is automatically generated It is recommended to use the randomly generated password for security purpose Select the voice prompt language to be used for this extension The default setting is Default which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Language The dropdown list Language shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6510 To add more languages in the list please download voice prompt package by selecting Check Prompt List under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Language Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extension when putting
240. ll show in the list Users can then enter or select value for each option to be used in the global template On the left side of each added option users can click on to remove this option from the template On the right side of each option users can click on I to reset the option value to the default value e Click on Save to save this global template e The created global templates will show in the web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Global Templates page Users can click on to delete the global template or click on Delete Selected Templates to delete multiple selected templates at once e Click on Toggle Selected Template s to toggle the status between enabled disabled for the selected templates MODEL CONFIGURATION MODEL TEMPLATES Model layer configuration allows users to apply model specific configurations to different devices Users could create edit delete a model template by accessing web GUI page PBX gt Zero Config gt Model Templates If multiple model templates are created and enabled when the user configures the device in Edit Device dialog gt Advanced Settings the user can select to use one of the model template for the device Please refer to section MANAGE DEVICES for more details on using the model template For each created model template users can assign it as default model template If assigned as default model template the values in this model template will be applied to all the devices of thi
241. lt setting is No Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 163 of 317 NAT Disable This Trunk TEL URI Need Registration Username Password Auth ID Auto Record lt GRANDSTREAM Turn on this setting when the PBX is using public IP and communicating with devices behind NAT If there is one way audio issue usually it is related to NAT configuration or SIP RTP port support on the firewall If checked the trunk will be disabled Note If a current SIP trunk is disabled UCM6510 will send UNREGISTER message REGISTER message with expires 0 to the SIP provider If the trunk has an assigned PSTN telephone number this field should be set to User Phone Then a User Phone parameter will be attached to the Request Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate the E 164 number If set to Enable Tel will be used instead of SIP in the SIP request The default setting is disabled Select whether the trunk needs to register on the external server or not when Register SIP Trunk type is selected The default setting is No Enter the username to register to the trunk from the provider when Register SIP Trunk type is selected Enter the password to register to the trunk from the provider when Register SIP Trunk is selected Enter the Authentication ID for Register SIP Trunk type Enable automatic recording for the calls using this trunk for SIP trunk only The default setting is di
242. m Status gt Network rrrnrrnnnnnnonrrnnnnnvrnnrnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsssennnnnnssennnnnnsseennnnnn 282 RITA 288 CDR Statistics Filter Criteria rrrrrrrrnnnnnrrnrrnnnnnrrvrrnnnrrrnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsesrnnnnnnsseennnnnn 293 CDR API Configuration Files ccccccccccsssssececceeesecececaesseceeesaeaeceeeseaaeeeeesseaeeeeesauaeeeeesaaaess 294 GDR APLURI Parameters sccccteesizcoashenacodsinesicwanscateeaientaeag ea cu densitesaestetoniesiedewaensy enciecsds 295 Network Upgrade Configuration vaart seede sek 301 Dala Syne ONION 1 OU sesaria E EEE NARR 307 EEE 309 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 10 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM Table of Figures UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Figure 1 UCM6510 Front VEN ur gere edda neds to lt docenicdgacu konas ienekdee 25 Figure 2 UCM6510 Back View ccccccecccccccssssececcceeseececceaeeeeeeesseaseeeeessaeseeeeessauseceeesseaseceeessaeeeeesssageeeseseas 25 Figure 3 UCM6510 T1 E1 J1 Crossover Cable PIn OUt rrrnnrnrrnrrnnnnnrvnrnnnnnrennrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrennnnnnsnrrnnnnnnsnsenn 26 Figure 4 UCM6510 web GUI Login Page rrrrrnnnnnrnnrnnnnnrvnrrnnnnnnennnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsenn 32 Figure 5 UCM6510 web GUI Language rrnrrnnnnnnvnnnnnnnnrvnrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnrsennnnnnnsrnnnnnnsssennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnssnn 34 Figure 6 UCM6510 web GUI Apply Changes ccccccccsceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeees
243. mail address to receive the CDR records DOWNLOADED CDR FILE The downloaded CDR csv file has different format from the web Ul CDR Here are some descriptions e Call From Call To Call From the caller ID Call To the callee ID If Call From shows empty Call To shows s see highlight part in the picture below and the Source Channel contains DAHDI this means the call is from FXO PSTN line For FXO PSTN line we only know there is an incoming request when there is incoming call but we don t know the number being called So we are using s to match it where s means start call from call to context start time answer time end time call time talk time source channel dest channel status 610 19097622990 from internal 1 29 2014 14 28 1 29 2014 14 28 1 29 2014 14 31 153 150 SIP 610 00000074 DAHDI 1 1 ANSWERED default 1 29 2014 14 33 1 29 2014 14 33 0 DAHDI pseudo 149089967 NO ANSWER default 1 29 2014 14 33 1 29 2014 14 33 0 DAHDI pseudo 1067045536 NO ANSWER 688 from internal 1 29 2014 14 33 1 29 2014 14 33 1 29 2014 14 33 9 SIP 601 00000077 ANSWERED default 1 29 2014 14 34 1 29 2014 14 34 0 DAHDI pseudo 1124093033 NO ANSWER default 1 29 2014 14 34 1 29 2014 14 34 0 DAHDI pseudo 1719498666 NO ANSWER Figure 170 Downloaded CDR File Sample Call To Shows s e Context There are different context values that might show up in the downloaded CDR file The actual value can vary case by case Here are some sample values
244. massive connection attempts or brute force attacks to the device The blacklist can be created and updated by the UCM6510 firewall which will then be displayed in the web page Please refer to the following table for dynamic defense options on the UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 58 of 317 GRANDSTREAM Table 15 UCM6510 Firewall Dynamic Defense Dynamic Defense rer Enable dynamic defense The default setting is disabled Enable Configure the dynamic defense periodic time interval in minutes If the number Periodical Time of TCP connections from a host exceeds the Connection Threshold within this Interval period this host will be added into Blacklist The valid value is between 1 and 59 when dynamic defense is turned on The default setting is 59 Configure the blacklist update time interval in seconds The default setting is 120 This defines how long the IP will be blocked once added into the UCM6510 Blacklist Update Jer blacklist For example if it s set to 300 seconds the blocked IP address will only gene be able to establish TCP connection with the UCM6510 again after 300 seconds Sene Configure the connection threshold Once the number of connections from the same host reaches the threshold during Periodical Time Interval it will be Threshold added into the blacklist The default setting is 100 Configure the dynamic defense whitelist This is a list of los that wil
245. more information please refer to RFC5465 To manually create new IAX user go to web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions Click on Create New IAX Extension and a new dialog window will show for users to fill in the extension information The configuration parameters are as follows Table 35 IAX Extension Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Extension The extension number associated with the user Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls from this user CallerID Number Note The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VoIP provider Assign permission level to the user The available permissions are Internal Local National and International from the lowest level to the highest level The default setting is Internal Note Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule s privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule Permission Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 117 of 317 SIP IAX Password Enable Voicemail Voicemail Password Skip Voicemail Password Verification Disable This Extension Enable LDAP lt GRANDSTREAM Configure the password for the user A random secure password will be automatically generated It is recommended to use this password for security purpose Enable voicemail for the user The default setting is Yes
246. n to add Multiple global templates can be selected and users can arrange the priority by adjusting orders via A and v All the selected model templates will take effect If the same option exists on multiple selected model templates the value in the template with higher priority will override the one in the template with lower priority Click on W to remove the model template from the selected list 5 Customize Device Settings This is the highest level configuration in the Advanced settings of the device Click on Modify Customize Device Settings and following dialog will show Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 101 of 317 Edit Customize Device Settings 000B825E66E2 Model MAC Address IP Address Version GRANDSTREAM GAV3275 QO0BS25E66E2 192 168 40 148 1 0 1 50 Customize Fields GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Name Value Add New Field Accounts Account 1 Account Active Account Name SIP Server Outbound Proxy SIP User ID Authenticate ID Save Figure 65 Edit Customize Device Settings Scroll down in the dialog to view and edit the device specific options If the users would like to add more options which are not in the pre defined list click on Add New Field to add a P value number and the value to the configuration The following figure shows setting P value P1362 to en which means the display language on the LCD is set to
247. n Fixed jitter buffer or used as the initial time for adaptive jitter buffer The default setting is 100 Configure the maximum time in ms to buffer for Adaptive jitter buffer implementation or used as the jitter buffer size for Fixed jitter buffer implementation The default setting is 200 Configure the jitter buffer implementation on the sending side of a SIP channel The default setting is Fixed Fixed The size is always equal to the value of Max Jitter Buffer Adaptive The size is adjusted automatically and the maximum value equals to the value of Max Jitter Buffer INTERNAL OPTIONS RTP SETTINGS RTP Start Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 84 Internal Options RTP Settings Configure the RTP port starting number The default setting is 10000 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 259 of 317 RTP End Strict RTP RTP Checksums lt GRANDSTREAM Configure the RTP port ending address The default setting is 20000 Configure to enable or disable strict RTP protection If enabled RTP packets that do not come from the source of the RTP stream will be dropped The default setting is Disable Configure to enable or disable RTP Checksums on RTP traffic The default setting is Disable INTERNAL OPTIONS STUN MONITOR STUN Server STUN Refresh Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 85 Internal Options STUN Monitor Configures the IP address or URL of the STUN server to query If not specified STUN is di
248. n Configure the TX Gain for the transmitting channel of digital port The valid range is 24dB to 12dB This configured whether to play the ringback tone from local UCM6510 or not If enabled the local UCM6510 will play ringback tone to the caller Otherwise the caller will listen to the tone from peer device The default setting is disabled Advanced Settings Pur Coding Select HDB3 or AMI CRC Select whether to use CRC4 or not Play Local RBT l MFC R2 value in milliseconds for MF timeout Values smaller than 500ms MF Back Timeout ms are not recommended 1 represents default value MFC R2 value in milliseconds for the metering pulse timeout Metering pulse is sent by some telcos for some R2 variants during a call presumably Metering Pulse Timeout ms for billing purposes to indicate costs Should not last more than 500ms 1 represents default value and for Argentina the default value is 400ms for others is Oms Brazil has a special calling party category for collect calls llamadas por cobrar instead of using the operator as in Mexico The R2 spec in Brazil Alllow Collect Calls Says a special GB tone should be used to reject collect calls By default this is disabled which means collect calls will be blocked Some PBXs require a double answer process to block collect calls If users Double Answer have problem blocking collect calls using Group B signals please try enabling this option Firmware Version 1 0 2 7
249. n example of login page using extension number 1000 as the username UCM6510 IPPBX Appliance ane Password English v Figure 11 User Portal Login After login the web Ul displays is shown as below Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 40 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING TREGE WOR LO 2 English 1000 v e Fandstrean 2015 02 03 15 28 UTC 05 00 User Portal gt gt Basic Information gt gt User Information Basic Information i User Information User Name User Password admin1 Department support Fax Email Address abcdefg gmail com First Name Jane LastName Tan Home Number Phone Number Figure 12 User Portal Layout For the configuration parameter information in each page please refer Table 5 User Management Create New User for options in User Portal gt Basic Information gt User Information page please refer to EXTENSIONS for options in User Portal gt Basic Information gt Extension page please refer to CDR for User Portal gt Basic Information gt CDR page CONCURRENT MULTI USER LOGIN When there are multiple web UI users created concurrent multi user login is supported on the UCM6510 Multiple users could edit options and have configurations take effect simultaneously However if different users are editing the same option or making the same operation by clicking on Apply Changes a prompt will pop up as sh
250. n the PBX that allows caller to search a person by first or last name via his her phone s keypad The administrator can define the Dial By Name directory including the desired extensions in the directory and the searching type by first name or last name After dialing in the PBX IVR Auto Attendant will guide the caller to spell the digits to find the person in the Dial By Name directory This feature allows customers clients to use the guided automatic system to get in touch with the enterprise employees without having to know the extension number which brings convenience and improves business image for the enterprise DIAL BY NAME CONFIGURATION The administrators can create the dial by name group under web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Dial By Name Create New Dial By Name Name DialByNameGF1 Extension 7101 Available Extensions Selected Extensions 1001 1002 1003 Options CD Query Type e ByLast Name First Name By First Name Last Name Select Type e By Order By Menu Save Figure 135 Create Dial By Name Group 1 Group Name Enter the Group Name This is to identify the Dial By Name group The Dial By Name group can be Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 243 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD used as the destination for inbound route and key pressing event for IVR The group name defined here will show up in the destination list when configuring IVR and inbound route
251. n the agent is completed If set to 0 there will be no delay between calls to the queue The default setting is 15 seconds Configure the maximum number of calls to be queued at once This number does not include calls that have been connected with agents It only includes calls not connected yet The default setting is 0 which means UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 216 of 317 Report Hold Time Wait Time Auto Record Enable Destination Queue Timeout Default Destination 5 GRANDSTREAM unlimited When the maximum value is reached the caller will be treated with busy tone followed by the next calling rule after attempting to enter the queue If enabled the UCM6510 will report to the agent the duration of time of the call before the caller is connected to the agent The default setting is No If enabled users will be disconnected after the configured number of seconds The default setting is No Note It is recommended to configure Wait Time longer than the Wrapup Time If this option is enabled the calls using this extension or trunk will be automatically recorded This option will enable destination for call queue If it is enabled Wait Time will be disabled Configure the global timeout in seconds of this call queue It must be larger than the value of ring timeout The call will be transferred to fail over destination directly if this time is exceeded The call would be routed to this destination if
252. n this trunk If enabled the other stations can press the line button to join the call The default setting is Yes The hold option specifies hold permissions for this trunk If set to Open any station can place this trunk on hold and any other station is allowed to Hold Access i aoe retrieve the call If set to Private only the station that places the call on hold can retrieve the call The default setting is Yes Advanced Options If enabled a polarity reversal will be marked as received when an outgoing Enable Polarity Reversal call is answered by the remote party For some countries a polarity reversal is used for signaling the disconnection of a phone line and the call Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 137 of 317 Polarity on Answer Delay Current Disconnect Threshold ms Ring Timeout RX Gain TX Gain Use CallerID Fax Detection Caller ID Scheme FXO Dial Delay ms Auto Record Disable This Trunk DAHDI Out Line Selection Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM will be considered as hangup on a polarity reversal The default setting is No When FXO port answers the call FXS may send a Polarity Reversal If this interval is shorter than the value of Polarity on Answer Delay the Polarity Reversal will be ignored Otherwise the FXO will onhook to disconnect the call The default setting is 600ms This is the periodic time in ms that the UCM
253. n your web browser and the web page will be redirected to https 192 168 40 167 8089 The option Redirect From Port 80 can be configured under the UCM6510 web GUl gt Settings gt HTTP Server WEB GUI CONFIGURATIONS There are four main sections in the web GUI for users to view the PBX status configure and manage the PBX e Status Displays PBX status System Status System Events and CDR e PBX To configure extensions trunks call routes zero config for auto provisioning call features internal options IAX settings SIP settings as well as ports configuration for digital trunks e Settings To configure network settings firewall settings change password LDAP Server HTTP Server Email Settings Time Settings and NTP server e Maintenance To perform firmware upgrade backup configurations cleaner setup reset reboot syslog setup and troubleshooting WEB GUI LANGUAGES Currently the UCM6510 web GUI supports the following languages English Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese Spanish Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 33 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD French Portuguese Russian Italian Polish German Users can select the displayed language in web GUI login page or at the upper right of the web GUI after logging in Username English Password igi BR English ER English Sihir Espa ol ERRE l Fran ais Espa ol Francais Portugu s Portugu s
254. nabled the calls in this conference bridge will be recorded automatically UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 187 of 317 Quiet Mode Wait For Admin Enable User Invite Announce Callers Public Mode Play Hold Music For First Caller Music On Hold Skip Authentication When Inviting User via Trunk from web GUI JOIN A CONFERENCE CALL Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM in a wav format file All the recording files will be displayed and can be downloaded in the conference web page The default setting is No If enabled if there are users joining or leaving the conference voice prompt or notification tone won t be played The default setting is No Note Quiet Mode and Announce Callers cannot be enabled at the same time If enabled the participants will not hear each other until the conference administrator joins the conference The default setting is No Note If Quiet Mode is enabled the voice prompt for Wait For Admin will not be announced If enabled users could press 0 to invite other users with the users permission or press 1 to invite other users without the user s permission to join the conference The default setting is No Note Conference administrator can always invite other users without enabling this option If enabled the caller will be announced to all conference participants when there the caller joins the conference The default setting is No Note Quiet Mode
255. nal i Welcome Prompt None Figure 102 Click On Prompt To Create IVR Prompt Once the IVR prompt file is successfully added to the UCM6510 it will be added into the prompt list options for users to select in different IVR scenarios RECORD NEW IVR PROMPT In the UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Custom Prompt page click on Record New IVR Prompt and follow the steps below to record new IVR prompt Record New IVR prompt File Name Welcome Prompt 1 Format WAM Dial This User Extension to 6000 Record a New Voice Prompt Figure 103 Record New IVR Prompt e Specify the IVR file name e Select the format GSM or WAV for the IVR prompt file to be recorded e Select the extension to receive the call from the UCM6510 to record the IVR prompt e Click the Record button A request will be sent to the UCM6510 The UCM6510 will then call the extension for recording the IVR prompt from the phone Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 195 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE ORLD e Pick up the call from the extension and start the recording following the voice prompt e The recorded file will be listed in the IVR Prompt web page Users could select to re record play or delete the recording UPLOAD IVR PROMPT If the user has a pre recorded IVR prompt file click on Upload IVR Prompt in web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt IVR Prompt page to upload the file to the UCM6510
256. nd code 55 to group 666 by dialing 55666 from any extension registered to the UCM6100 All the members in group 666 which are extension 1000 1001 and 1002 will receive this voice message after they pick up the call Annoucements Center Create New Annoucements Center 55 p Total 4 Show 4 4 coto VER Group Create New Group Number he 666 1000 1001 1002 Total 1 Show 1 1 coto VER Figure 147 Announcements Center example Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 272 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD STATUS AND REPORTING PBX STATUS The UCM6510 monitors the status for Trunks Extensions Queues Conference Rooms Interfaces Digital Channels and Parking lot It presents administrators the real time status in different sections under web GUI gt Status gt PBX Status Trunks gt Conference Rooms G Status Not In Use Unmonitored PeerSIPTrunk Total 4 Show 1 4 Goto B Interfaces Status SD Card j Extensions TE Bil Analog 1AX SIP Heartbeat s t J Power 2 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 John Doe William Cheung Sandy Fang Steve Mitchell Nancy Lin Ted Smith Joseph White Messages 0 0 0 Messages 0 0 0 Messages 0 0 0 Messages 0 0 0 Messages 0 0 0 Messages 0 0 0 2 Messages 0 0 0 Total 7 Show 1 4 Goto E Queues G Parking Lot G No Parking Lot defined Figure 148 Status gt PBX Status
257. nd subscribes to the local UCM6510 event list it can obtain the remote extension status from this event list Once successfully configured the event list page will show the status of total extension and subscribers for each event list Users can also select the event URI to check the monitored extension s status and the subscribers details A Note e To configure LDAP sync please go to UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt VolP Trunk You will see Sync LDAP Enable option Once enabled please configure password information for the remote peer UCM6510 to connect to the local UCM6510 Additional information such as port number LDAP outbound rule LDAP Dialed Prefix will also be required Both the local UCM6510 and remote UCM6510 need enable LDAP sync option with the same password for successful connection and synchronization e Currently LDAP sync feature only works between two UCM6510s e Theoretically Remote BLF monitoring will work when the remote PBX being monitored is non UCM6510 PBX However it might not work the other way around depending on whether the non UCM6510 PBX supports event list BLF or remote monitoring feature Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 241 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 242 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING ORLD DIAL BY NAME Dial By Name is a feature o
258. net Table 52 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters T1 J1 SS7 Basic Settings All E1 T1 J1 spans generate a clock signal on their transmit side The parameter determines whether the clock signal from the far end of the E1 T1 J1 is used as the master source of clock timing If the far end is used as the master the PBX system clock will synchronize to it Clock l oe e Master The port will never be used as a source of timing This is appropriate when you know the far end should always be a slave to you e Slave The equipment at the far end of the E1 T1 link is the preferred source of the master clock SS7 Variant Select ITU ANSI or CHINA Originating point code is used to identify the node originating the message aa l always provided by the operator ISP Originating Point Code l e ITU Format decimal number e ANSI amp CHINA Format decimal number or XXX XXX XXX Destination point code is the address to send the message to always be JEG l provided by the operator ISP Destination Point Code e ITU Format decimal number e ANSI amp CHINA Format decimal number or XXX XXX XXX When Span Type is E1 ITU amp CHINA Range 0 4065 ANSI Range 0 16353 When Span Type is T1 J1 ITU amp CHINA Range 0 4072 ANSI Range 0 16360 If set to yes D channel will be assigned with a CIC Else D channel will First CIC Assign CIC to D Channel not be assigned with a CIC By default it is set to No
259. ng Mode AuthID Enable Voicemail Voicemail Password 6582616 Skip Voicemail Password l o Verification Disable This Extension Enable LDAP User Settings G First Name Last Name Email Address User Password Qfp38p0l Language Default Music On Hold default Figure 74 Create New Device SIP extension options are divided into four categories e Basic Settings e Media e Features e Specific Time Click on the tag to view or edit options belonging to that category The configuration parameters are as follows Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 111 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE U Rt Table 31 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Extension CallerID Number Permission SIP IAX Password Support Hot Desking Mode Auth ID Enable Voicemail Voicemail Password Skip Voicemail Password Verification Disable This Extension Enable LDAP User Settings The extension number associated with the user Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls from this user Note The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VolP provider Assign permission level to the user The available permissions are Internal Local National and International from the lowest level to the highest level The default setting is Internal Note Users need to have the
260. nks Trunk Mode Analog Ports Options fxo1 SLA 1 i Figure 95 Analog Trunk with SLA Mode Enabled 2 On the UCM6510 go to web Ul gt Basic Call Routes gt SLA Station page click on Create New SLA Station Please refer to section CREATE EDIT SLA STATION for the configuration parameters Users can create one or more SLA stations to monitor the analog trunk The following figure shows two stations 1002 and 1005 are configured to be associated with SLA trunk fxo1 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 176 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Station Name sla2 testsla Figure 96 SLA Example SLA Station e On the SIP phone 1 configure to register UCM6510 extension 1002 Configure the MPK as BLF mode and the value must be set to extension_trunkname which is 1002 fx01 in this case e On the SIP phone 2 configure to register UCM6510 extension 1005 Configure the MPK as BLF mode and value must be set to extension_trunkname which is 1005 fx01 in this case Account Description Value Busy Lamp Field BLF Account 2 1005 fxol 1005 fxol Figure 97 SLA Example MPK Configuration Now the SLA station is ready to use The following functions can be achieved by this configuration e Making an outbound call from the station extension using LINE key When the extension is in idle state pressing the line key for this extension on the phone to off hook Then dial the station s extension n
261. nnnnnrvnrrnnnnnrrvrrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnrsrnnnnnnnssrnnnnnnnssennnnnnssennnnnn 283 System Status gt Resource USage rrrrrrrrnnnnnrvnrrnnnrnrrnrrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnsnsnnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsssennnnnn 284 System Events gt Alert Events Lists Disk Usage rrnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnennennennnnnnnnn 284 System Events gt Alert Events Lists Modify Admin Password rrrnrnnnnrnnnnnnronnnnnnennnnnnennnnn 285 System Events gt Alert Events Lists Memory Usage errnnnnrrnvnnnnnnvrvvnnnnnnervvnnnnnnereennnnnvereennnnn 285 System Events gt Alert Events Lists System Reboot rrrrrnnnrerrnnnnrorrnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnn 285 System Events gt Alert Events Lists System Update rrrrnrnnnnrnnnnnnrerrnnnrenrnnnnrennnnnrennnnnnennnnn 286 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 14 of 317 Figure 162 Figure 163 Figure 164 Figure 165 Figure 166 Figure 167 Figure 168 Figure 169 Figure 170 Figure 171 Figure 172 Figure 173 Figure 174 Figure 175 Figure 176 Figure 177 Figure 178 Figure 179 Figure 180 Figure 181 Figure 182 Figure 183 Figure 184 Figure 185 Figure 186 Figure 187 Figure 188 Figure 189 Figure 190 Figure 191 Figure 192 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM System Events gt Alert Events Lists System Crash wrrnnnnrnvnnnnnnnrvvnnnnnnrrvrnrnnnnrreennnnnrrreennnnn 286 STENE NT 286 System Events gt Alert Log ccccccssccccecceeseeececcceseee
262. nnnsnsrnnnnnnnnsnen 109 Zero Config Sample Device Preview 3 rrrnrrnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnvnnvnnnnnnrnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnnnsenn 110 Create New Device cccccsssseeccccuensecececeeuseceeecseuseceeessauseceesssuaeeeeessseaeeceessaaeeeesssaaseeessssaaeesees 111 Manage gt GE 9 OS 132 EE NAN 133 EX OO iil gt SIONS EE EEE ETERRA RG 133 Email To User Prompt Information ccccccccceceesseeeeeeseeeeceeeceeeeeceesseeaeeeeessaaseeseessaeeeeeesaaees 134 Email To User Account Registration Information and QR Code rrnrnnnnnnrvvrnnnrenrnnrrennnnnnennnnn 135 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 12 of 317 GRANDSTREAM Figure 80 Email To User LDAP Client Information and QR Code rrnrnnnnrvnnnnnrvnvnnnnennnnnnrennnnerennnnnrnnnnn 135 Fig re g k UCMGS00 FXO Tone SENGS Leed 140 Figure 82 UCM6510 PSTN Detection rrrnrrnnnnnrvvrrnnnnrvrnrrnnnnrrnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnsennnnnnnnssnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsnee 141 Figure 83 UCM6510 PSTN Detection Auto Detect rrrrrrnnnrnrrvrrnnnnnrrvrrnnnnnrnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnsnnennnnnnnnnennnnnnsnee 141 Figure 84 UCM6510 PSTN Detection Semi Auto Detect rrrrrrrnnnrnrrnnrnnnnnvvnrrnnnnnennrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnrennnnnnsnee 142 Figure 85 FXS Ports Signaling Preferente Laumann aoameimmsedaemsndadnnk iemusemadndndmnnelis 143 Figure 86 FXO Ports ACIM Settings scvsossencicetanccpenesencterinndvsnninendscainpassisnesteonteninndsiueiniatinetasaaiareseaisintueiiiaeand 144
263. no one in this ring group answers the call It can be set to Extension Voicemail Queues Ring Group Voicemail Group IVR and External Number Select the available users to be the static agents in the call queue Choose Agents from the available users on the left to the static agents list on the right Click on amp amp to arrange the order e Click on to delete the call queue e Click on Agent Login Settings to configure Agent Login Extension Postfix and Agent Logout Extension Postfix Once configured users could log in the call queue as dynamic agent Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 217 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Agent Login Settings Agent Login Settings Agent Login Extension Postfix Agent Logout Extension Postfix Example Dial 6500 to log in dial 6500 tc Figure 118 Agent Login Settings For example if the call queue extension is 6510 Agent Login Extension Postfix is and Agent Logout Extension Postfix is users could dial 6510 to login to the call queue as dynamic agent and dial 6510 to logout from the call queue Dynamic agent doesn t need to be listed as static agent and can log in log out at any time e Call queue feature code Agent Pause and Agent Unpause can be configured under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Feature Codes The default feature code is 83 for Agent Pause and 84 for Agent Unpause e Queue recordings
264. ns in all levels will take effect for the device If there are same options existing in different level configurations with different value configured the higher level configuration will override the lower level configuration 1 Global Policy This is the lowest level configuration The global policy configured in web UI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Global Policy will be applied here Clicking on Modify Global Policy to redirect to page PBX gt Zero Config gt Global Policy 2 Global Templates Select a global template to be used for the device and click on to add Multiple global templates can be selected and users can arrange the priority by adjusting orders via O and oJ Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 100 of 317 GRANDSTREAM L All the selected global templates will take effect If the same option exists on multiple selected global templates the value in the template with higher priority will override the one in the template with lower priority Click on to remove the global template from the selected list 3 Default Model Template Default Model Template will be applied to the devices of this model Default model template can be configured in model template under web UI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Model Templates page Please see default model template option in Table 30 Create New Model Template 4 Model Templates select a model template to be used for the device and click o
265. ntenance gt Cleaner Maintenance gt Reset Reboot Settings gt User Management gt Operation Log Admin privilege users cannot create new users for login e Consumer A user account for web Ul login is created automatically by the system when a new extension is created The user could log in the web Ul with the extension number and password to access user information extension configuration and CDR of that extension CREATE NEW WEB UI USER When logged in as Super Admin click on 2555555 to create a new account for web Ul user The following dialog will prompt Configure the parameters as shown in below table Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 38 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Create New User User Name ITSupport User Password Gi Privilege Admin G Department IT Fax Q Email Address itsupport my pbx com First Name William Last Name Chung Home Number Gi Phone Number 1234567890 Figure 8 Create New User Table 5 User Management Create New User Configure a username to identify the user which will be required in web UI login Letters digits and underscore are allowed in the user name User Name Configure a password for this user which will be required in web Ul login Letters digits and underscore are allowed User Password This is the role of the web UI user Currently only Admin is supported when Privilege Super Admin creat
266. ntly supports E1 T1 and J1 digital hardware type When different signaling is selected for E1 T1 or J1 the settings in basic options and advanced options will be different The following tables list all the settings to configure digital ports when selecting each signaling Table 48 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 PRI NET PRI CPE Basic Settings Clock LBO RX Gain TX Gain Codec Play Local RBT Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 All E1 T1 J1 spans generate a clock signal on their transmit side The parameter determines whether the clock signal from the far end of the E1 T1 J1 is used as the master source of clock timing If the far end is used as the master the PBX system clock will synchronize to It e Master The port will never be used as a source of timing This is appropriate when you know the far end should always be a slave to you e Slave The equipment at the far end of the E1 T1 J1 link is the preferred source of the master clock The line build out LBO is the distance between the operators and the PBX Please use the default value ODb unless the distance Is long Configure the RX gain for the receiving channel of digital port The valid range is from 24Db to 12Db Configure the TX Gain for the transmitting channel of digital port The valid range is 24Db to 12Db Select alaw or ulaw If set to default alaw will be used for E1 This configured whether to play the ringback tone from local U
267. number If not Call Forward Unconditional configured the Call Forward Unconditional feature is deactivated The default setting is deactivated Select time condition for Call Forward Unconditional CFU takes effect only during the selected time condition The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific Note CEU Time Condition SPec Nas moner priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in terms of time period e Specific time can be configured on the bottom of the extension configuration dialog Scroll down the add Time Condition for specific time e Office Time and Holiday could be configured on page Settings gt Time Settings gt Office Time Holiday page Configure the Call Forward No Answer target number If not configured Call Forward No Answer the Call Forward No Answer feature is deactivated The default setting is deactivated Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 124 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Select time condition for Call Forward No Answer The available time condition are Office Time Out of Office Time Holiday Out of Holiday Note e Specific has higher priority to Office Times if there is a conflict in CFN Time Condition terms of time period Out of Office Time or Holiday and Specific e Specific
268. nvnnnnennnnnnrennnnnnennnnenennnnn 87 Table 24 Global Policy Parameters Phone Settings cccccccsssccccceseceeceeeceeseeeeceeseeeeesseeeeessaeeessaaes 88 Table 25 Global Policy Parameters Contact LiSt rrrrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnennnnnnrennnnnnennnnenennnnn 88 Table 26 Global Policy Parameters Maintenance ccccccesecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeceueceeseaeeceeseeeceessaeeeessaeeeessaaes 90 Table 27 Global Policy Parameters Network Settings ccccccssscccccessceeceeeeeeseeeeceeseeeceesseeeeseeeeessaaes 92 Table 28 Global Policy Parameters Customization rrrnnnrrnnannnonrnnnnerrnnnnronnnnnrnnrnnnnennnnnnrennnnnnennnnnnennnnn 92 Table 29 Create New Template ccccccccsesceecessceeceeseeeeeeeeceeceeeeeseeeeeeeseaeceeseeaeeeseeaecesseaeeessaeeessaneeeesaaes 94 Table 30 Create New Model Template cccccccccssscceceeeeceeceeeeceseeeeeesseeeceeseuaecesaeeecesseaeeeessaeeessaeeessaaes 96 Table 31 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Basic Settings rrrrnnrrrvrrrnnnrrrvrrrnnnnrrrnrrnnnnnrrnnnnnn 112 Table 32 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters M ia cccccccsseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeesaaeeseeeenaaees 113 Table 33 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Features ccccceccceceseeceeceeeeeeseeeeeesseeeeeeeaeeeeeeas 114 Table 34 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Specific Time rrrrrnnnrrnnnnnn
269. o send NOTIFY reboot event to the device which has an UCM6510 extension already registered To successfully reboot the user Zero Config needs to be enabled on the UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Zero Config gt Auto Provisioning Settings e Delete single extension melken Click on to delete the extension Or select the checkbox of the extension and then click on Delete Selected Extensions e Modify selected extensions Select the checkbox for the extension s Then click on Modify Selected Extensions to edit the extensions in a batch e Delete selected extensions Select the checkbox for the extension s Then click on Delete Selected Extensions to delete the extension s Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 132 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD EXPORT EXTENSIONS The extensions configured on the UCM6510 can be exported to csv format file with selected technology SIP IAX or FXS Click on Import Extensions scroll down to select Export Extensions button and select technology in the prompt Export Extensions Export Options Technology SIP Figure 76 Export Extensions The exported csv file can also serve as a template for users to fill in desired extension information to be imported to the UCM6510 IMPORT EXTENSIONS The capability to import extensions to the UCM6510 provides users flexibility to batch add ex
270. obal Settings Enable Fail2Ban Banned Duration Max Retry Duration MaxRetry Fail2Ban Whitelist Enable Fail2Ban The default setting is disabled Please make sure both Enable Fail2Ban and Asterisk Service are turned on in order to use Fail2Ban for SIP authentication on the UCM6510 Configure the duration in seconds for the detected host to be banned The default setting is 300 If set to 1 the host will be always banned Within this duration in seconds if a host exceeds the max times of retry as defined in MaxRetry the host will be banned The default setting is 5 Configure the number of authentication failures during Max Retry Duration before the host is banned The default setting is 10 Configure IP address CIDR mask or DNS host in the whiltelist Fail2Ban will not ban the host with matching address in this list Up to 5 addresses can be added into the list Local Settings Asterisk Service Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Enable Asterisk service for Fail2Ban The default setting is disabled Please make sure both Enable Fail2Ban and Asterisk Service are turned on in order to use UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 60 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Fail2Ban for SIP authentication on the UCM6510 Configure the listening port number for the service Currently only 5060 for UDP Protocol is supported Configure the number of authentication failures during Max Retry Duration before Max
271. oicemail enter 5000 as the transfer target number Default Code 11 This code is for the user who wants to use Call Completion to complete a call Default Code 12 This code is for the user who wants to cancel Call Completion request Check this box to enable spy feature codes This is the feature code to listen in on a call to monitor performance Monitor s line will be muted and neither party will hear from the monitor s extension The default setting is 54 This is the feature code to speak to one side of the call for example whisper to employees to help them handle a call Only one side will be able to hear from the monitor s extension The default setting is 55 This is the feature code to join in on the call to assist both parties The default setting is 56 The UCM6510 allows users to record audio during the call If Auto Record is turned on for extension or trunk the call will be automatically recorded when there is established call with the extension or trunk Otherwise please follow the instructions below to manually record the call 1 Make sure the feature code for Audio Mix Record is configured and enabled 2 After establishing the call enter the Audio Mix Record feature code by default 3 followed by or SEND to start recording Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 254 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD 3 To stop the recording enter the Audio Mix Rec
272. old until next representative is available in the system This sections describes the configuration of call queue under web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Call Queue CONFIGURE CALL QUEUE Call queue settings can be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Call Queue e Click on Create New Queue to add call queue Agen Login Settings Call Queue Name Strategy 6500 TechSupport1 Linear 6501 Warehouse Ringall 6502 Sales Ringall 6503 TechSupport2 Least Recent Figure 117 Call Queue e Click on to edit the call queue The call queue configuration parameters are listed in the table below Table 74 Call Queue Configuration Parameters Extension Configure the call queue extension Name Configure the call queue name to identify the call queue Select the strategy for the call queue e Ring All Ring all available Agents simultaneously until one answers e Linear Ring agents in the specified order e Least Recent Strategy Ring the agent who has been called the least recently e Fewest Calls Ring the agent with the fewest completed calls e Random Ring a random agent e Round Robin Ring the agents in Round Robin scheduling with memory Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 215 of 317 Music On Hold Leave When Empty Dial in Empty Queue Permission Dynamic Login Password Ring Time Out Wrapup Time Max Queue Length Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM The defaul
273. olume Om O N O A Exit the caller menu and return to the conference RECORD CONFERENCE The UCM6510 allows users to record the conference call and retrieve the recording from web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Conference To record the conference call when the conference bridge is in idle enable Record Conference from the conference bridge configuration dialog Save the setting and apply the change When the conference call Starts the call will be automatically recorded in wav format The recording files will be listed as below once available Users could click on to download the recording or click on Ul to delete the recording meetme conf rec 6300 1372865271 25 wav 2013 07 03 12 39 38 UTC 03 00 10 61 MB meetme conf rec 6300 1372451238 6 wav 2013 06 28 17 27 46 UTC 03 00 120 04 KB meetme cont rec 6300 13 72205127 347 wav 2013 06 25 21 05 56 UTC 03 00 82 86 KB meetme conf rec 6300 1372867161 40 wav 2013 07 03 13 10 29 UTC 03 00 10 47 MB meetme conf rec 6300 1372864546 12 wav 2013 07 03 12 16 01 UTC 03 00 35 67 KB meetme conf rec 6300 1372866438 36 wav 2013 07 03 12 47 47 UTC 03 00 322 86 KB meetme conf rec 6300 1372204987 337 wav 2013 06 25 21 03 30 UTC 03 00 315 98 KB meetme conf rec 6300 1372864583 17 wav 2013 07 03 12 16 36 UTC 03 00 65 67 KB meetme conf rec 6300 13 70385024 71 wav l 2013 06 04 19 35 28 UTC 03 00 4 22 MB Figure 101 Conference Recording Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 191
274. on 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 224 of 317 5 GRANDSTREAM FAX T 38 The UCM6510 supports T 30 T 38 Fax and Fax Pass through It can also convert the received Fax to PDF format and send it to the configured Email address Fax T 38 settings can be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt FAX T 38 CONFIGURE FAX T 38 e Click on Create New Fax Extension In the popped up window fill the extension name and Email address to send the received Fax to e Click on Fax Settings to configure the Fax parameters Enable Error Correction Mode Maximum Transfer Rate Minimum Transfer Rate Default Email Address Template Variables Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 75 FAX T 38 Settings Configure to enable Error Correction Mode ECM for the Fax The default setting is Yes Configure the maximum transfer rate during the Fax rate negotiation The possible values are 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 and 14400 The default setting is 14400 Configure the minimum transfer rate during the Fax rate negotiation The possible values are 2400 4800 7200 9600 12000 and 14000 The default setting is 2400 Configure the Email address to send the received Fax to if user s Email address cannot be found Note The extension s Email address or the Fax s default Email address needs to be configured in order to receive Fax from Email If neither of them is configured Fax will be not be received from Email Fill in t
275. on Configuration Parameters Specific Time cccscccceceseeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 126 Batch Add SIP Extension Parameters c ccccccccccccseseeceeecaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseaseeeeesseseeeeessenseeeeeeas 126 Batch Add IAX Extension Parameters iceniciicsivicutviaiunieisanetaararianecansnanatimuvsyadouawierdviancesaun 129 Analog Trunk Configuration Parameters ccccccseescceeceeeeeeeeeeceeeceeeeseeeeceeeseeaaeeeeessaaeeeeessaaees 137 PSTN Detection for Analog Trunk ccccccccccseseecccesseecceeseeeceeeeeceeueeecseaseesseaueeessageeeesegseesseaes 142 Analog Hardware Configuration Parameters ccccccssececcceeseeeceeeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeesauseeessaneeeesaeeess 144 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 PRI_NET PRI_CPE errrnnnrnvnnnnnnrrvennnnnnvrreens 148 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 SST rrrrnnnnnnnnnnronnnnnrnennnnnnrennnnnrennnnenennnnnnrnnnn 150 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 MFC R2 rrrnnnnnnnnnnnvnnnnnnrnnnnnnrennnnerennnnnnennnnn 151 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters T1 J1 PRILNET PRI_CPE eee 153 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters T1 J1 SS7 rrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnrennnnnnennnnenennnnnnennnnn 155 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters T1 E amp M Immediate E amp M Wink rrrrrrvnnnnnnvrveen 156 Digital Trunk Configuration Parameters cccccccccccsseeecceecaeeeeceeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeeesaeeeeeesseegseeeeeeas 15
276. on all the extensions in the batch Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is forwarded to voicemail voicemail is enabled or hang up voicemail is disabled If not specified the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6510 which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting Ring Timeout under web GUI gt Internal Options gt IVR Prompt General Preference The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds Note If the end point also has a ring timeout configured the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension The default Auto Record setting is disabled The recording files can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files l l l When user dials voicemail code the password verification IVR is skipped Skip Voicemail Password l f If enabled this would allow one button voicemail access By default this Verification er option is disabled l Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extensions when putting Music On Hold them on hold If enabled the batch added extensions will be added to LDAP Phonebook Enable LDAP PBX list if disabled the batch added extensions will be skipped when creating LDAP Phonebook Max Number of Calls Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for each remote IP Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 130 of 317 Require Call Token
277. on of codec preference all together e Regonly This is almost the same as Disabled except when the requested format is not available The call will only be accepted if the requested format is available Configure ToS bit for preferred IP routing PV Trunk Options Trunk Frequency Trunk Time Stamps Configure the frequency of trunk frames in milliseconds The default setting is 20 If enabled time stamps will be attached to trunk frames The default setting is No IAX SETTINGS STATIC DEFENSE Call Token Optional Max Call Numbers Max Unvalidated Call Numbers Call Number Limits IP or IP Range Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Table 88 IAX Settings Static Defense Enter a single IP address or a range of IP addresses for which call token validation is not required For example 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 22 22 22 22 Configure the maximum number of calls allowed for a single IP address Configure the maximum number of unvalidated calls for all IP addresses Configure to limit the number of calls for a give IP address of IP range Enter the IP address or a range of IP addresses to be considered for call number limits For example 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 22 22 22 22 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 262 of 317 ORLO lt GRANDSTREAM SIP SETTINGS The UCM6510 SIP global settings can be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt SIP Settings SIP SETTINGS GENERAL Realm For Digest Authentication Bind UDP Port
278. oo Ol oe le Select FXO or FXS for Record Ports If the issue happens on FXO 1 select FXO port 1 to record the Select Record Direction Select Record File Mode to separate the record per direction or mix Click on Start Make a call via the analog port that has the issue Once done click on Stop Click on Download to download the analog record trace status PBX Settings Maintenance gt gt Troubleshooting gt gt Analog Record Trace Analog Record Trace Record Ports FXO Ports 1 3 FXS Ports 1 2 Record Direction Both Record File Mode separate F Troubleshooting k Start a a Download Delete Output Result Capturing Analog record tracing has been stoped Compressing file now please wait Done Click on Download to download the captured packets Figure 189 Troubleshooting Analog Trunks Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 313 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L After capturing the trace users can download it for basic analysis Or you can contact Grandstream Technical support in the following link for further assistance if the issue is not resolved http www grandstream com index php support E amp M IMMEDIATE RECORD TRACE Before capturing the trace for E amp M user could configure Record Direction and Record File Mode Record File Mode can be separate one record per direction or mix Then click on Start to start to capture E amp M
279. or the data trunk To use data trunk 1 Go to web Ul gt PBX gt Ports Config gt Digital Hardware page and click ds to create a new group Designate a channel for data trunk usage in the group setting 2 Goto web Ul gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Data Trunks page click on to edit the data trunk 3 Save the configuration and click on Apply Changes for the change to take effect 4 Once connected the data trunk will periodically ping and check the status with status indicator shown for the data trunk on the web page The status indicator shows a if connected successfully pr 5 If the user happens to lost connection or experience unstable connection click on to reconnect to help resolve the problem 6 Users can always click on ON OFF switch ED ON in the web page to enable disable the configured data trunk PBX gt gt Basic Call Routes gt gt Data Trunk Data Trunk Configure digital channels for data communication Sometimes the line will have the problem of synchronization Please try to reconnec OFF Figure 89 Data Trunk Web Page Data Trunk Data Enable v Channel Group test Encapsulation HDLC Local IP 10 10 10 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Remote IP 10 10 10 11 DNS Server 1 4 2 2 2 DNS Server 2 4 2 2 1 Default Interface Figure 90 Data Trunk Configuration Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 161 of 317 Data Enable Channel Group Enc
280. or users to fill in the extension information The configuration parameters are as follows Table 39 FXS Extension Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Extension The extension number associated with the user Analog Station Select the FXS port to be assigned for this extension Configure the CallerID Number that would be applied for outbound calls from this user CallerID Number Note The ability to manipulate your outbound Caller ID may be limited by your VolP provider Assign permission level to the user The available permissions are Internal Local National and International from the lowest level to the highest level The default setting is Internal Permission Note Users need to have the same level as or higher level than an outbound rule s privilege in order to make outbound calls using this rule Enable Voicemail Enable voicemail for the user The default setting is Yes Configure voicemail password digits only for the user to access the l l voicemail box A random numeric password is automatically generated It Voicemail Password is recommended to use the random generated password for security purpose l l l When user dials voicemail code the password verification IVR is skipped Skip Voicemail Password l If enabled this would allow one button voicemail access By default this Verification canes option is disabled If selected this extension will be disab
281. ord feature code by default 3 followed by or SEND again Or the recording will be stopped once the call hangs up 4 The recording file can be retrieved under web GUI gt Status gt CDR Click on to play the recording or click on to download the recording file View Report Click on the title of the column to sort by column Click on the row to display full record View 10 Start Time 1 2013 07 03 17 55 04 6000 5001 0 00 18 0 00 16 2 2013 07 03 17 54 32 6000 5001 0 00 19 0 00 18 3 2013 07 03 17 53 11 6000 6300 0 00 11 0 00 11 Figure 142 Download Recording File from CDR Page The above recorded call s recording files are also listed under the UCM6510 web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files CALL PARK The UCM6510 provides call park and call pickup features via feature code PARK A CALL There are two feature codes that can be used to park the call e Feature Maps gt Call Park Default code 72 During an active call press 72 and the call will be parked Parking lot number default range 701 to 720 will be announced after parking the call e Feature Misc gt Call Park Default code 700 During an active call initiate blind transfer default code 1 and then dial 700 to park the call Parking lot number default range 701 to 720 will be announced after parking the call RETRIEVE THE PARKED CALL To retrieve the parked call simply dial the parking lot number and the call will be established If
282. ordingly Time Zone If Self Defined Tome Zone is selected please specify the time zone parameters in Self Defined Time Zone field as described in below option Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 71 of 317 Self Defined Time Zone SET TIME MANUALLY GRANDSTREAM If Self Defined Time Zone is selected in Time Zone option users will need define their own time zone following the format below The syntax is std offset dst offset start time end time Default is set to MT Z 6MDT 5 M4 1 0 M11 1 0 MTZ 6MDT 5 This indicates a time zone with 6 hours offset and 1 hour ahead for DST which is U S central time If it is positive the local time zone is west of the Prime Meridian A K A International or Greenwich Meridian If it is negative the local time zone is east M4 1 0 M11 1 0 The 15 number indicates Month 1 2 3 12 for Jan Feb Dec The 2 number indicates the nth iteration of the weekday 15 Sunday 3 d Tuesday Normally 1 2 3 4 are used If 5 is used it means the last iteration of the weekday The 3 number indicates weekday 0 1 2 6 for Sun Mon Tues Sat Therefore this example is the DST which starts from the First Sunday of April to the 1 Sunday of November To manually set the time on the UCM6510 go to Web GUI gt Settings gt Time Settings gt Set Time Manually The format is YYYY MM DD HH MI SS Set Time Manually G
283. ould specify extensions allowed to use this outbound route Privilege Level is automatically disabled if using Enable Filter on Source Caller ID The following two methods can be used at the same time to define the extensions as the source caller ID 3 Select available extensions extension groups from the left to the right This allows users to specify arbitrary single extensions available in the PBX l Custom Dynamic Route define the pattern for the source caller ID Enable Filter on Source Caller ID This allows users to define extension range instead of selecting them one by one e All patterns are prefixed with the e Special characters X Any Digit from 0 9 Z Any Digit from 1 9 N Any Digit from 2 9 Wildcard Match one or more characters I Wildcard Match zero or more characters immediately Example 12345 9 Any digit from 1 to 9 Send This Call Through Trunk Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 180 of 317 Use Trunk Strip Prepend lt GRANDSTREAM ORLO Select the trunk for this outbound rule Allows the user to specify the number of digits that will be stripped from the beginning of the dialed string before the call is placed via the selected trunk Example The users will dial 9 as the first digit of a long distance calls However 9 should not be sent out via analog lines and the PSTN line In this case 1 digit should be stripped before the call is p
284. ound route Table 64 Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters e Added ability to prepend digits trunk name to inbound calls caller ID Table 64 Inbound Rule Configuration Parameters e Modified Static Routes Interface display when network method is changed STATIC ROUTES FIRMWARE VERSION 1 0 0 25 e This is the initial version Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 18 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM L WELCOME Thank you for purchasing Grandstream UCM6510 IP PBX appliance The UCM6510 is an innovative IP PBX appliance for E1 T1 J1 networks that brings enterprise grade unified communications and security protection to enterprises small to medium businesses SMBs retail environments and residential settings in an easy to manage fashion Powered by an advanced hardware platform and revolutionary software functionalities the UCM6510 offers a breakthrough turnkey solution for converged voice video data fax security surveillance and mobility applications out of the box without any extra license fees or recurring costs A Caution Changes or modifications to this product not expressly approved by Grandstream or operation of this product in any way other than as detailed by this User Manual could void your manufacturer warranty A Warning Please do not use a different power adapter with the UCM6510 as it may cause damage to the products and void the manufacturer warranty This document is subject to change w
285. oup pickup group blacklist paging intercom and etc FCC Part 15 CFR 47 Class B Part 68 CE EN55022 Class B EN55024 EN61000 3 2 EN61000 3 3 EN60950 1 TBR21 RoHS A TICK AS NZS CISPR 22 Class B AS NZS CISPR 24 AS NZS 60950 AS ACIF S002 ITU T K 21 Basic Level UL 60950 power adapter T1 TIA 968 B Section 5 2 4 E1 TBR12 TBR13 E1 AS ACIF UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 23 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 24 of 317 GRANDSTREAM G THE WORLD INSTALLATION Before deploying and configuring the UCM6510 series the device needs to be properly powered up and connected to network This section describes detailed information on installation connection and warranty policy of the UCM6510 series EQUIPMENT PACKAGING Table 2 UCM6510 Equipment Packaging Main Case Yes x 1 Power Adapter Yes x 2 Ethernet Cable Yes x 1 Wall Mount Yes x 2 Screws Yes x 6 Quick Installation Guide Yes x 1 CONNECT YOUR UCM6510 CONNECT THE UCM6510 USB Port T1 E1 J1 Port Navigation Keys LEE aD C TA LE ieni PO eae SD Card Slot 2xFXS Port 2x FXO Port LED Indicators LCD Figure 1 UCM6510 Front View Ground 2x DC 12V Power Jack Reset LAN Port WAN Port Heartbeat Port Figure 2 UCM6510 Back View Follow the steps below to connect the UCM6510 for initial setup Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 25 of 317 GEAD DSTREAM
286. own in the following figure Operating too frequent or other users I are doing the same operation Please retry after 15 seconds Figure 13 Multiple User Operation Error Prompt OPERATION LOG Super Admin has the authority to view operation logs on UCM6510 web GuUI gt Settings gt User Management gt Operation Log page Operation logs list operations done by all the web UI users for example web UI login creating trunk creating outbound rule and etc There are 6 columns to record the operation details Date User Name IP Address Results Page Operation and Specific Operation Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 41 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONN ESTIN THE WORLD 2014 11 05 17 54 12 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Login User Name admin 2014 11 05 14 57 08 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Login User Name admin 2014 11 05 14 32 40 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully VoIP Trunks Create New SIP Trunk 2014 11 05 14 32 17 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Outbound Routes Create New Outbound Rule Privilege Level none 2014 11 05 13 34 46 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Login User Name admin 2014 11 04 21 02 42 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Login User Name admin 2014 11 04 19 01 32 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Callback Create New Callback 2014 11 04 19 01 13 admin 192 168 40 173 Operate Success
287. pecify the Account ID Password and Service Name for PPPoE Define the Layer 3 QoS parameter This value is used for IP Precedence Diff Serv or MPLS Valid range is 0 63 Assign the VLAN Tag of the Layer 2 QoS packets Valid range is 0 4095 Assign the priority value of the Layer 2 QoS packets Valid range is 0 7 Configure the IP address or Domain name of the STUN server Only non symmetric NAT routers work with STUN Specify how often the phone will send a blank UDP packet to the SIP server in order to keep the ping hole on the NAT router to open Valid range is 10 160 Table 28 Global Policy Parameters Customization Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 1024 x 600 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored e File If URL is selected as source specify the URL of the wallpaper file If UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 92 of 317 Screen Resolution 800 x 400 Screen Resolution 480 x 272 Screen Resolution 320 x 240 GLOBAL TEMPLATES lt GRANDSTREAM Local UCM Server is selected as source click to upload wallpaper file to the UCM6510 Check this option if the SIP end device shall use 800 x 400 resolution for the LCD screen wallpaper Source Configure the location where wallpapers are stored File If URL is selected as source specify the URL of the wallpaper file If Local UCM Server is selected as source cl
288. peration Logs Delete All Operation Logs View 10 2014 11 06 13 49 41 support 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Login User Name support 2014 11 06 13 50 01 support 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Logout User Name support 2014 11 06 15 02 25 support 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Login User Name support 2014 11 06 15 23 10 support 192 168 40 173 Operate Successfully Logout User Name support Total 4 Show 1 Goto EG First Prev Next Last Figure 15 Operation Logs Filter The above figure shows an example that operations made by user support on device with IP 192 168 40 173 from 2014 11 01 00 00 to 2014 11 06 15 38 are filtered out and displayed Delete Searched Operation Logs To delete operation logs users can perform filtering first and then click on to delete the filtered result of operation logs Or users can click on 22222255355 to delete all operation logs at once CHANGE BINDING EMAIL UCM6510 allows user to configure binding email in case login password is lost UCM6510 login credential will be sent to the designated email address The feature can be found under web Ul gt Settings gt User Management gt Change Binding Email Change Binding Email Enter the password of the account Email Address Figure 16 Change Binding Email Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 43 of 317 GRANDSTREAM Table 7 Change Binding Email option Enter th
289. phone directly Therefore the user will not be charged on mobile phone services for long distance or international calls To configure callback on the UCM6510 go to web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Callback page and click Create New Callback Configuration parameters are listed in the following table Table 79 Callback Configuration Parameters Name Configure a name to identify the Callback Configure the pattern of the callers allowed to use this callback The caller who places the inbound call needs to have the callerID match this pattern so that the caller can get callback after hanging up the call CallerID Pattern Note If leaving as blank all numbers are allowed to use this callback Configure the prepend digits to be added at before dialing the outside Outbound Prepend number The number with prepended digits will be used to match the outbound route is the connection character which will be ignored Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 237 of 317 Delay Before Callback Destination Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 gt GRANDSTREAM L Configure the number of seconds to be delayed before calling back the user Configure the destination which the callback will direct the caller to Two destinations are available e IVR e DISA The caller can then enter the desired number to dial out via UCM6510 trunk UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 238 of 317 GRANDSTREAM BLF AND EVE
290. ple current service status running on the UCM6510 Table 12 UCM6510 Firewall gt Static Defense gt Current Service Port Process Type 7777 Asterisk tcp lpv4 389 Slapd tcp lpv4 22 Dropbear tcp lpv4 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 56 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM 80 Lighthttpd tcp lpv4 8089 Lighthttpd tcp lpv4 69 Opentf tpd udp lpv4 9090 Asterisk udp lpv4 6060 zero config udp lpv4 5060 Asterisk udp lpv4 4569 Asterisk udp lpv4 5353 zero_config udp lpv4 37435 Syslogd udp lpv4 For typical firewall settings users could configure the following options on the UCM6510 Ping Defense Enable Ping of Death Defense Enable Table 13 Typical Firewall Settings If enabled ICMP response will not be allowed for Ping request The default setting is disabled To enable or disable it click on the check box for the LAN or WAN interface Enable to prevent Ping of Death attack to the device The default setting is disabled To enable or disable it click on the check box for the LAN or WAN interface Under Custom Firewall Settings users could create new rules to accept reject or drop certain traffic going through the UCM6510 To create new rule click on Create New Rule button and a new window will pop up for users to specify rule options The following figure shows a firewall rule example that will deny SSH access for the UCM6510 from WAN side Create new firewall rule GJ Rule Name RejectS
291. plugged in and can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files If selected the trunk will be disabled This is to implement analog trunk outbound line selection strategy Three options are available e Ascend When the call goes out from this analog trunk it will always try to use UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 138 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM the first idle FXO port The port order that the call will use to go out would be port 1 gt port 2 gt port 10 gt port 16 Every time it will start with port 1 if it s idle e Poll When the call goes out from this analog trunk it will use the port that is not used last time And it will always use the port in the order of port 1 gt 2 gt 10 gt 16 gt 1 gt 2 gt 10 gt 16 gt 1 gt 2 gt 10 gt 16 following the last port being used e Descend When the call goes out from this analog trunk it will always try to use the last idle FXO port The port order that the call will use to go out would be port 16 gt port 10 gt port 2 gt port 1 Every time it will start with port 16 if it s idle The default setting is Ascend mode Tone Settings Busy Detection is used to detect far end hangup or for detecting busy Busy Detection de signal The default setting is Yes If Busy Detection is enabled users can specify the number of busy tones to be played before hanging up The default setting is 2 Better results Busy Tone Count might be achieved if set to
292. port when the UCM6510 is behind a static NAT or PAT Configures the externally mapped TLS port when UCM6510 is behind a static NAT or PAT Specify a list of network addresses that are considered inside of the NAT network Multiple entries are allowed If not configured the external IP address will not be set correctly UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 266 of 317 SIP SETTINGS TOS ToS For SIP ToS For RTP Audio ToS For RTP Video Default Incoming Outgoing Registration Time Max Registration Subscription Time Min Registration Subscription Time Music On Hold Interpret Music On Hold Suggest Enable Relaxed DI MF DTMF Mode RTP Timeout RTP Hold Timeout Trust Remote Party ID Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 amp SRANDSTREAM A sample configuration could be as follows 192 168 0 0 16 Table 94 SIP Settings ToS Configure the Type of Service for SIP packets The default setting is None Configure the Type of Service for RTP audio packets The default setting is None Configure the Type of Service for RTP video packets The default setting is None Configure the default duration in seconds of incoming outgoing registration The default setting is 120 Configure the maximum duration in seconds of incoming registration and subscription allowed by the UCM6510 The default setting is 3600 Configure the minimum duration in seconds of incoming registration and subscription allowed by the UCM6510 The default set
293. pture The output result is in ocap format Therefore users could specify the capture filter as used in general network traffic capture tool host src dst net protocol port port range before starting capturing the trace IP PING Enter the target host in host name or IP address Then press Start button The output result will dynamically display in the window below Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 311 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD G TargetHost www google com Output Result 64 bytes from 4 125 224 1 9 seg 1 ttl 53 time 13 800 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seq 2 ttl 53 time 19 300 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seq 3 ttl 53 time 13 800 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seg 4 ttl 53 time 13 525 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seq 5 ttl 53 time 13 950 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seq 6 ttl 53 time 14 125 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seq ttl 53 time 17 425 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seg 6 ttl 53 time 13 500 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seq 9 ttl 53 time 13 875 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seg 10 ttl 53 time 14 100 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seg 11 ttl 53 time 14 175 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seg 12 ttl 53 time 14 025 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seg 13 ttl 53 time 14 150 ms 64 bytes from 74 125 224 179 seq 14 ttl 53 time 13 900 ms www google com ping statistics 15 packets transmitted 15 packets received 0
294. r ID number Set the external number to be rang simultaneously is the connection External Number l l l character which will be ignored Time Condition for Ring Ring the external number simultaneously along with the extension on the Simultaneously basis of this time condition Other Settings Ring Timeout Configure the number of seconds to ring the user before the call is Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 125 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD forwarded to voicemail voicemail is enabled or hang up voicemail is disabled If not specified the default ring timeout is 60 seconds on the UCM6510 which can be configured in the global ring timeout setting under web GUI gt Internal Options gt IVR Prompt General Preference The valid range is between 5 seconds and 600 seconds Note If the end point also has a ring timeout configured the actual ring timeout used is the shortest time set by either device Enable automatic recording for the calls using this extension The default Auto Record setting is disabled The recording files can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files e f set to Yes users can skip entering the password when making outbound calls Sacrum Aunt e f o to By Time users can skip onamo the Password when making outbound calls during the selected time condition e lf set to No users will be asked to enter the password when making outbound calls
295. re Extension First Name and Last Name rrunnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrennnnnnnnrennnnnnnnsennnnnn 245 Status gt PBX Status gt Active Calls RINQING ccccccsseecceeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeseeaeseeesseeaseeeessaaess 247 Status gt PBX Status gt Active Calls Call Established srrrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnn 247 Configure to Monitor an Active Call rrrnrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnvnvvrnnnnnrrnvnnnnnnrennnnnnnnrennnnnnnnnennnnnssnrennnnnn 248 Download Recording File from CDR Page rrrnnnnrnnrnnnnnnvnvvrnnnnnrnnvnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnsennnnnnsnsnnnnnnnsnsnnn 255 Fax Sending in Web Ua vuvvv4vvrrvvree ia EEN E aE a adiad aiT 269 Announcements Center ccceccccccsseseceecceeseeeeeeeeeeeceeesaeaseceeessaaseeeeeesaaseeeeeesaaeeeeesseageeeesssaaaes 270 Announcements Center Group Configuration rrrnnrnrrrrrnnnnnvrvrrnnnnrrvrrnnnnnrennrnnnnnrennnnnnnsennnnnn 271 Announcements Center Code Configuration ccccccsssccccccesseeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeessaaaaes 272 Announcements Center example rrrrrnrrrrrrrnnnrnvvrvrnnnnrrrnrnnnnnnvnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsnssnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsssennnnnn 272 SJEL Se gt EEE ER 273 TK St WS e R E R R R NE 273 DUS eg Eee EEE EEE 275 NMU IE 276 Fon SE ERE secestqnecatsiees onerous 277 Digital Channels Status rrrrrrnnnrrrrrrrnnnnrrvnrnnnnnnernnnnnnnnrnnnnnnsnsennrnnnnrsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnssnn 280 FN 281 System Status gt Storage UsSage rrrrnnnnrrvrr
296. re basic settings before the device is discovered by the UCM6510 Once the device is plugged in it can then be discovered and provisioned This gives the system administrator adequate time to set up each device beforehand Click on Create New Device and the following dialog will show Follow the steps below to create the configurations for the new device Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 98 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING TRE Wo RL O 1 Firstly select a model for the device to be created and enter its MAC address IP address and firmware version optional in the corresponding field 2 Basic settings will show a list of settings based on the model selected in step 1 Users could assign extensions to accounts assign functions to Line Keys and Multiple Purposed Keys if supported on the selected model 3 Click on Create New Device to save the configuration for this device Create New Device Model GRANDSTREAM GXV3275 v MAC Address 000B825E66E2 IP Address 192 168 40 132 Version 1 0 1 50 Basic Accounts Account 1 Account 6 Line Key Setting Line 1 E Figure 62 Create New Device MANAGE DEVICES The device manually created or discovered from Auto Discover will be listed in the web Ul gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Zero Config page Users can see the devices with their MAC address IP address vendor model and etc 0008822A852C 192 168 40 3 GRANDSTREAM GXP21
297. refix Firmware File Suffix D GJ HTTP HTTPS User Name HTTP HTTPS Password Figure 175 Network Upgrade Table 109 Network Upgrade Configuration Allow users to choose the firmware upgrade method TFTP HTTP or HTTPS Define the server path for the firmware server UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 301 of 317 GRANDSTREAM Firmware File Prefix If configured only the firmware with the matching encrypted prefix will be downloaded and flashed into the UCM6510 Firmware File Suffix If configured only the firmware with the matching encrypted postfix will be downloaded and flashed into the UCM6510 HTTP HTTPS User Name The user name for the HTTP HTTPS server HTTP HTTPS Password The password for the HTTP HTTPS server Please follow the steps below to upgrade the firmware remotely e Enter the firmware server path under web GUI gt Maintenance gt Upgrade e Click on Save Then reboot the device to start the upgrading process e Please be patient during the upgrading process Once done a reboot message will be displayed in the LCD e Manually reboot the UCM6510 when it s appropriate to avoid immediate service interruption After it boots up log in the web GUI to check the firmware version UPGRADING VIA LOCAL UPLOAD If there is no HTTP TFTP server users could also upload the firmware to the UCM6510 directly via web GUI Please follow the steps below to upload firmware locally 1 Download the latest U
298. reject calls from Follow Me Table 76 Follow Me Settings e Added option to specify port range in Port Forwarding configuration Table 11 UCM6510 Network Settings gt Port Forwarding e Added ability to go back to IVR menu from Dial By Name by pressing the star key DIAL BY NAME CONFIGURATION e Added support to upgrade SIP end device via SD card in Zero Config Table 26 Global Policy Parameters Maintenance e Added ability to filter alert logs ALERT LOG e Added ability to delete alert logs ALERT LOG e Added NAT option for peer trunk Table 63 Outbound Route Configuration Parameters e Improved Automatic Download CDR result format CDR e Fixed Digital Trunk SS7 signaling mode inbound outbound call problem e Fixed Asterisk is crashed while using external MCB and CEI FIRMWARE VERSION 1 0 1 12 e Added Active Calls feature to monitor call status and barge in active calls ACTIVE CALLS AND MONITOR e Added support to disable the trunk for VoIP trunk and analog trunk Table 56 Create New SIP Trunk Table 45 Analog Trunk Configuration Parameters e Added RBS support on T1 e Added Frame Relay support on Data Trunk DATA TRUNK e Added Assign CIC to D channel option on SS7 settings page Table 49 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 SS7 e Added First CIC option in SS7 configuration Table 49 Digital Hardware Configuration Parameters E1 SS7 e Added D Chan selection for PRI and SS7 in editing
299. rennnnnnsnsenn 49 Figure 21 UCM6510 Using 802 1X EAP MDBD ruurnnnnnnnrvnnnnnnnnrennrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnsnnrnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnsennnnnnsnernnnnnnnnsenn 50 Figure 22 UCM6510 Static Route Sample cc cceeccccccceseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeesseeeeeesssegeeeeeesas 52 Figure 23 UCM6510 Static Route Configuration cccccccccccccsseeeceeceeeeeceeecseeeceeeeeaeeeeeseseeeeeesssageeeeeenas 52 Figure 24 UCM6510 Port Forwarding Configuration cccccccssseeeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeceeesaeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseaegeeeeeesas 54 Figure 25 GXP2160 Web Access Using UCM6510 Port Forwarding ccccccecesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeas 54 Figure 26 Register Domain Name on NOIP COM ccccseeeceeeeeeeeceeeeeecaeeeeeeseaueeeesaeeessaeeeesaaeeeessaeeeessaeees 55 Figure 27 VMS DDNS SENG re 55 Figure 28 Using Domain Name to Connect to UCM6510 rrrrrnnnnnnvrvennnnnnrrevnnnnnerreennnnnersennnnnnererennnnnsrreenn 56 Figure 29 Create New Firewall Rule cccccscccccssscecceseeeceesseecceuseeccsaeeecseaseeeseueeessageeesseueeeessaseeessageees 57 Figure 30 Configure Dynamic Defense ccccccccseseeceeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeseceeessaeeeeeeesseaseeeeesseaseeeessaageeeeeeaas 60 Fig re 31 LDAP Server Coiligualn Suverene 62 Figure 32 Default LDAP Phonebook DN rrrrrnnnnrevvrnnnnnrvvrrnnnnnrvnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnssnnnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsennnnnnsnsenn 63 Figure 33 Default LDAP Phonebook Attributes
300. rity reversal as in UK The default setting is Standard Configure the type of Message Waiting Indicator on FXS lines The default setting is FSK e FSK Frequency Shift Key Indicator e NEON Light Neon Bulb Indicator UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 145 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 146 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM DIGITAL TRUNKS The UCM6510 supports E1 T1 J1 which are physical connection technology used in digital network T1 is the North American standard J1 is used in Japan whereas E1 is the European standard UCM6510 supports four signaling protocols PRI MFC R2 SS7 E amp M Immediate and E amp M Wink PRI provides a varying number of channels depending on the standards in the country of implementation E1 T1 or J1 MFC R2 is a signaling protocol heavily used over E1 trunks SS7 uses out of band signaling which travels on a separate dedicated channel rather than within the same channel as the telephone call providing more efficiency and higher security level when the telephone calls are set up E amp M Immediate and E amp M Wink are only valid when using T1 port To set up digital trunk on the UCM6510 1 Goto web Ul gt PBX gt Ports Config gt Digital Hardware to configure port type and channels 2 Goto web Ul gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Digital Trunks to add and edit digit trunk 3 Go to
301. rmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 316 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L EXPERIENCING THE UCM6510 SERIES IP PBX Please visit our website http www grandstream com to receive the most up to date updates on firmware releases additional features FAQs documentation and news on new products We encourage you to browse our product related documentation FAQs and User and Developer Forum for answers to your general questions If you have purchased our products through a Grandstream Certified Partner or Reseller please contact them directly for immediate support Our technical support staff is trained and ready to answer all of your questions Contact a technical support member or submit a trouble ticket online to receive in depth support Thank you again for purchasing Grandstream UCM6510 IP PBX appliance it will be sure to bring convenience and color to both your business and personal life Asterisk is a Registered Trademark of Digium Inc Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 317 of 317
302. rnrnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnene 117 Table 35 IAX Extension Configuration Parameters Basic SettingS ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 117 Table 36 IAX Extension Configuration Parameters Media rrrrrrnnnnnnvnrrnnnnnvvnrrnnnnnrrnnrnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnrennnnnn 119 Table 37 IAX Extension Configuration Parameters Features ccccccscceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesesaeeeeeeeesaaees 119 Table 38 IAX Extension Configuration Parameters Specific Time rrrrrnnnrnrnnnnnrnrnnnnnonnnnnnennnnnnennnnnnnen 121 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 8 of 317 Table 39 Table 40 Table 41 Table 42 Table 43 Table 44 Table 45 Table 46 Table 47 Table 48 Table 49 Table 50 Table 51 Table 52 Table 53 Table 54 Table 55 Table 56 Table 57 Table 58 Table 59 Table 60 Table 61 Table 62 Table 63 Table 64 Table 65 Table 66 Table 67 Table 68 Table 69 Table 70 Table 71 Table 72 Table 73 Table 74 Table 75 Table 76 Table 77 Table 78 Table 79 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM FXS Extension Configuration Parameters Basic Settings ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeees 122 FXS Extension Configuration Parameters Media rrrnrnnnnrnnnnnnnvnnnnnnenvnnnnrnnnnnnrennnnerennnnsnennnnn 123 FXS Extension Configuration Parameters Features ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeceseeesseeeeeeeeeeeeesaees 124 FXS Extensi
303. s Lists System Crash e Detect Cycle The UCM6510 will detect the event at each cycle based on the specified time Users can enter the number and then select second s minute s hour s day s to configure the cycle OFF OM Click on the switch to turn on off the alert and Email notification for the event Users could also select the checkbox for each event and then click on button Alert On Alert Off Email Notification On Email Notification Off to control the alert and Email notification configuration ALERT LOG Under web GUI gt Status gt System Events gt Alert Log system messages are listed when the alert is triggered for the configured system events The following picture shows disk usage alert log We can tell the detect cycle for the disk usage is 10 minutes and the disk usage is restored to normal after the administrator cleans up the disk storage below the threshold 2013 10 09 21 32 00 Disk Usage Generate Alert Disk usage exceeds the threshold 2013 10 09 21 42 00 Disk Usage Generate Alert Disk usage exceeds the threshold 2013 10 09 21 52 00 Disk Usage Generate Alert Disk usage exceeds the threshold 2013 10 09 22 02 00 Disk Usage Restore to normal Disk usage has been restored to normal Figure 163 System Events gt Alert Log The following screenshot shows system crash alert logs Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 286 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Alert Log Ev
304. s all the feature codes in the UCM6510 and describes how to use the call features FEATURE CODES Table 81 UCM6510 Feature Codes Feature Maps e Default code 1 e Enter the code during active call After hearing Transfer you will hear dial tone Enter the number to transfer to Then the user will be disconnected and transfer is completed Blind Transfer e Options Disable Allow Caller Enable the feature code on caller side only Allow Callee Enable the feature code on callee side only Allow Both Enable the feature code on both caller and callee e Default code 2 e Enter the code during active call After hearing Transfer you will hear the dial tone Enter the number to transfer to and the user will be connected to this number Hang up the call to complete the attended transfer Attended Transfer e Options Disable Allow Caller Enable the feature code on caller side only Allow Callee Enable the feature code on callee side only Allow Both Enable the feature code on both caller and callee e Default code 0 e Enter the code during active call It will disconnect the call e Options Disconnect Disable Allow Caller Enable the feature code on caller side only Allow Callee Enable the feature code on callee side only Allow Both Enable the feature code on both caller and callee e Default code 72 e Enter the code during active call to park the call Call Park Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX
305. s an inbound call from this trunk The last XXXXX is a random string and can be ignored Sample 3 call from call to context start time answer time endtime call time talk time source channel dest channel status S default 1 30 2014 14 30 1 30 2014 14 37 386 0 DAHDI pseudo 1665832080 NO ANSWER 5 default 1 30 2014 14 30 1 30 2014 14 37 390 0 DAHDI pseudo 1946772436 NO ANSWER Figure 173 Downloaded CDR File Sample Source Channel and Dest Channel 3 This is a very special channel name If it shows up most likely it means a conference call There are some other possible values but these values are almost the application name which are used by the dialplan IAX2 NUM XXXXXXX it means this is an IAX call Local Qfrom internal XXXXX it is used internally to do some special feature procedure We can simply ignore it Hangup the call is hung up from the dialplan This indicates there are some errors or it has run into abnormal cases Playback play some prompts to you such as 183 response or run into an IVR ReadExten collect numbers from user It may occur when you input PIN codes or run into DISA Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 292 of 317 GRANDSTREAM STATISTICS CDR Statistics is an additional feature on the UCM6510 which provides users a visual overview of the call report across the time frame Users can filter with different criteria to generate the statistics chart Inbound calls Outbound c
306. s and _ Configure the last name of the user The last name can contain characters letters digits and _ Last Name Fill in the Email address for the user Voicemail will be sent to this Email address Email Address Configure the password for user portal access A random numeric User Password password is automatically generated It is recommended to use the randomly generated password for security purpose Select the voice prompt language to be used for this extension The default setting is Default which is the selected voice prompt language under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Language The dropdown list Language shows all the current available voice prompt languages on the UCM6510 To add more languages in the list please download voice prompt package by selecting Check Prompt List under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Language Select which Music On Hold class to suggest to extension when putting the active call on hold Music On Hold Table 32 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Media Use NAT when the UCM6510 is on a public IP communicating with NAT devices hidden behind NAT e g broadband router If there is one way audio issue usually it s related to NAT configuration or Firewall s support of SIP and RTP ports The default setting is enabled By default the UCM6510 will route the media steams from SIP endpoints through itself If enabled the PBX will attempt to negotiate
307. s model There is always only one default model template that can be assigned at one time on the UCM6510 The selected model template and the default model template will both take effect when generating the config file for the device However the model template has higher priority to default model template when it comes to the same setting option field If the same option field has different value configured in the default model template and the selected model template the value for this option field in the selected model template will override the value in default model template e Click on Create New Template to add a model template Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 95 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM Table 30 Create New Model Template Select a model to apply this template The supported Grandstream Model i models are listed in the dropdown list for selection Template Name Create a name for the model template Description Enter a description for the model template This is optional Select to assign this model template as the default model template The Default Model Template value of the option in default model template will be overridden if other selected model template has a different value for the same option Active Check this option to enable the model template e Click on to edit the model template The editing window for model template is shown in the following figure In the Options field
308. sabled The default setting is stun ipvideotalk com Valid format hostname IP address port The default port number is 3478 if not specified Configure the number of seconds between STUN Refreshes The default setting is 30 seconds UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 260 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING TE Wo eto IAX SETTINGS The UCM6510 IAX global settings can be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt IAX Settings AX SETTINGS GENERAL Bind Port Bind Address IAX1 Compatibility No Checksums Delay Reject ADSI Music On Hold Interpret Music On Hold Suggest Bandwidth Table 86 IAX Settings General Configure the port number that the IAX2 will be allowed to listen to The default setting is 4569 Configure the address that the IAX2 will be forced to bind to The default setting is 0 0 0 0 which means all addresses Select to configure IAX1 compatibility The default setting is No If selected UDP checksums will be disabled and no checksums will be calculated checked on systems supporting this features The default setting is No If enabled the IAX2 will delay the rejection of calls to avoid DOS The default setting is No Select to enable ADSI phone compatibility The default setting is No Specify which Music On Hold class this channel would like to listen to when being put on hold This music class is only effective if this channel has no music class configured and the bridged channel putting th
309. sabled The recording files can be accessed under web GUI gt CDR gt Recording Files Table 57 SIP Register Trunk Configuration Parameters Basic Settings Provider Name Host Name Transport Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Configure a unique label to identify this trunk when listed in outbound rules inbound rules and etc Configure the IP address or URL for the VoIP provider s server of the trunk Configure the SIP transport protocol to be used in this trunk The default setting is All UDP Primary e UDP Only e TCP Only e TLS Only e All UDP Primary UDP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too e All TCP Primary TCP is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 164 of 317 Keep Original CID Keep Trunk CID NAT Disable This Trunk TEL URI Need Registration Username Password Auth ID Auto Record Advanced Settings lt GRANDSTREAM e All TLS Primary TLS is the primary transport protocol when all the other SIP transport methods are available too Keep the CID from the inbound call when dialing out This setting will override Keep Trunk CID option Please make sure that the peer PBX at the other side supports to match user entry using username field from authentication line lf enabled the trunk CID will not be overridden by extension s CID
310. seessnscesaneeessneeesneses 257 INTERNAL OPTIONS JITTER BUFFER sesssssssssssesssssesssscesssecesssecesnscessnscessnecessssessnssessneeesaneeesteses 259 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 5 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM INTERNAL OPTIONS RTP SETTINGS ccsesscsesssessssessseessneesnecesneesnecesseesneesneeesntesneeentesneeenneeeneeetees 259 INTERNAL OPTIONS STUN MONITOR ssssssesssesssstscseessseecueeseeseseessecsusecasessntecaseesntesasersneesasesases 260 RET IINR 261 IAX SETTINGS GENERAL ernsssressenssernvsrnnsrrnssrnnsrnnssrnnsernsrrnssennsernssrnnsernssennsennsernssenssernssennsennssrnnsennsnn 261 IAX SETTINGS REGISTRATION ecco nee teen eecc cect ceetnctes eee eereeeepeeete eee eee 261 KEENE EE 262 Sr SEI TNS gcc at cs apes a ee eggs ese EEE seme scee eee 263 SUSE ING Eb 263 PENNE 264 SIP SETTINGS SESSION TIMER ssesssesssseessesssseesseessnsesnecesnsesneesnsesneesneeesnsesneeenneesneeesneesneesneeeenses 264 SIP SETTINGS TCP and TLS ssesccssssssssesesseessusecaecsucecaseesnescaseeseesacesstecsatecaseestesaseeseeesnsesaneeseses 265 PET Mr 266 PEN 267 VALUE ADDED FEATURES sinnene eesnsminanskdnsenee 269 FAX OE NDING EEE EEE EE 269 ANS NN ET EE 269 ANNOUNCEMENTS CENTER SETTINGS rrrrvrrrrsrrsssrersersssrnsserssrrnsserssrnsserssersssrnssersssrnssernsnnn 270 GROUP SETTINGS mnrrrrrrnssressenssrrssenssrrssrenserrssresseerssresssenssresssenssrrssrensserssrensserssrensenssrnsenssenn 270 STATUS AND RE
311. sion number access user information extension configuration and CDR USER PORTAL e Added support to send Fax via web UI FAX SENDING e Added Enable LDAP option to skip the extension from UCM default LDAP phonebook Table 31 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters e Added video RE INVITE support e Added DDNS Support DDNS SETTINGS e Added support for Call Barging using feature codes ENABLE SPY e Added ability to search the CDR by called number Table 105 CDR Filter Criteria e Added ability to select the file types for automatic backup BACKUP RESTORE e Added automatic backup support on SD Card or USB storage BACKUP RESTORE e Added support to skip trunk authentication by time condition Table 33 SIP Extension Configuration Parameters Features e Added option to send P Asserted Identity header in SIP Register Trunk Table 57 SIP Register Trunk Configuration Parameters Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 16 of 317 GRANDSTREAM e Added ability to specify trunks in CDR filters CDR e Added ability to use Pattern in Caller Number to filter CDR CDR e Added support to send UNREGISTER when VoIP trunk is disabled Table 57 SIP Register Trunk Configuration Parameters e Added LDAP client support LDAP CLIENT CONFIGURATIONS e Added option to specify the chronological order to voice mails Table 68 Voicemail Settings e Added option to configure whether to skip pressing 1 2 to accept or
312. ss configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING DOD VIA VOIP TRUNKS The UCM6510 provides Direct Outward Dialing DOD which is a service of a local phone company or local exchange carrier that allows subscribers within a company s PBX system to connect to outside lines directly Example of how DOD is used Company ABC has a SIP trunk This SIP trunk has 4 DIDs associated to it The main number of the office is routed to an auto attendant The other three numbers are direct lines to specific users of the company At the moment when a user makes an outbound call their caller ID shows up as the main office number This poses a problem as the CEO would like their calls to come from their direct line This can be accomplished by configuring DOD for the CEO s extension Steps on how to configure DOD on the UCM 1 To setup DOD go to UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt VolP Trunks page 2 Click to access the DOD options for the selected SIP Trunk 3 Click Create anew DOD to begin your DOD setup 4 For DOD Number enter one of the numbers DIDs from your SIP trunk provider In the example above Company ABC received 4 DIDs from their provider ABC will enter in the number for the CEO s direct line 5 Select an extension from the A
313. sseeeeeeeessegeeeeeeeas 193 VOICE MAN Se UNG SEE E A OA 201 Voicemail VR EE ER ansectbemdasiaientamecaniuicsaenand 202 VOICEMAIL Email SETNYGS sroine r e oaa padena nTn 204 Voicemail Group Settings ccccccsseeeccceceesseceeeeaeeeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeeaueeeesseeueceeessaeeeeeessaageeeeessageeeees 205 Ano TOUD se 211 EEE EE E 207 Paging Intercom Group Configuration Parameters ccccccsseeeecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesaeeeeeesaeeeeesaees 213 Call Queue Configuration Parameters cccccccccsseeeceeeceeeeeeeeecsaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaeeeeessaaaeeeeessaaess 215 FAT Nede 225 FME ME 232 FME JON ha 232 BJEN 110 EEE NE 235 Callback Configuration Parameters ccccccccccccccssseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseceeeseeeaeceeesseaeeeeeessaaeeeeeeesaaees 237 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 9 of 317 Table 80 Table 81 Table 82 Table 83 Table 84 Table 85 Table 86 Table 87 Table 88 Table 89 Table 90 Table 91 Table 92 Table 93 Table 94 Table 95 Table 96 Table 97 Table 98 Table 99 Table 100 Table 101 Table 102 Table 103 Table 104 Table 105 Table 106 Table 107 Table 108 Table 109 Table 110 Table 111 Cleaner Configuration Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 gt GRANDSTREAM DEE ES go EE NE EE 240 UCMIGS10 Feature NE re 251 Internal Options General rrrrnnnrrnnnnnnnnovnnvrrnnnnnnnsvvnnnrrnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnssnnnnnnnnnnsneennnn 257 Internal Options Jitter Buffer
314. stseseeeseesseecsnesseessusesutecatecaseeaterateeateraseesses 147 DIGITAL TRUNK CONFIGURATION 2 sce scesscesscesesetscetesseesseessesssessneecaeseaeecatseateraesesessteessersaeeeaes 157 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING DOD VIA DIGITAL TRUNKS c seescsescstscsessteesneesseeeneeesteeseeeeees 158 DIGITAL TRUNK TROUBLESHOOTING cssssseesssesssessseceseeeseeeseessesnsesusesnsesueesneeeneesneesseeenneeeeeeness 158 BE ENE 161 VP TRINNS re 163 VOIP TRUNK UNN 163 DIRECT OUTWARD DIALING DOD VIA VOIP TRUNKS cssssssesssesssessssesneesneeeneesneesneeeneeeseeesees 173 SLA STATION serseri E en gee eames a 175 OREATE EDIT SLA STATION EEE tee en eee 175 MPV ATION eee e eee ee E E E 176 CALE ROUTE rr gsi es css E A 179 OUTBOUND ROUTE hv 179 EIT vr 181 INBOUND RULE CONFIGURATIONS ssssssssessssssssssseesseesneesseesneesnsesnsensentenneesneenneenneenneeen 182 INBOUND ROUTE PREPEND EXAMPLE sssssssssssssssssessesssessseesneessnessrsenssessenneenneenneesneenieeen 184 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 3 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM BLACKLIST CONFIGURATIONS cssssecssssssesssssessssssesssssesessssesssisesesssessssssesesisesessseesisesesineeetiee 185 CONFERENCE BEID Eve 187 CONFERENCE BRIDGE CONFIGURATIONS s sscssssscssssssesssssessssssesssssesesssesesssseessisesessieeeesee 187 JOIN A CONFERENCE CALL essssccsssssesssssesssssssessssesssssssssssesssssesssssenessssessssssesnisssesisesesssesesnsee 188 INVITE O
315. t The default setting is 192 168 2 1 Enter the subnet mask The default setting is 255 255 255 0 Enable or disable DHCP server capability The default setting is Yes Enter DNS server address 1 The default setting is 8 8 8 8 Enter DNS server address 2 The default setting is 208 67 222 222 Enter the DHCP IP Pool starting address The default setting is 192 168 2 100 Enter the DHCP IP Pool ending address The default setting is 192 168 2 254 Enter the IP lease time in seconds The default setting is 43200 LAN when Method is set to Switch IP Method IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway IP DNS Server 1 DNS Server 2 User Name Password Layer 2 QoS 802 1Q VLAN Tag Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 Select DHCP Static IP or PPPoE The default setting is DHCP Enter the IP address for static IP settings The default setting is 192 168 0 160 Enter the subnet mask address for static IP settings The default setting is 255 255 0 0 Enter the gateway IP address for static IP settings The default setting is 0 0 0 0 Enter the DNS server 1 address for static IP settings The default setting is 0 0 0 0 Enter the DNS server 2 address for static IP settings Enter the user name to connect via PPPoE Enter the password to connect via PPPoE Assign the VLAN tag of the layer 2 QoS packets for LAN port The default value is 0 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 45 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE WORLD Layer 2 QoS 8
316. t DOCUMENTATION lt amaflags gt lt uniqueid gt 1386100943 2 lt uniqueid gt lt userfield gt EXT lt userfie ld gt lt channel ext gt 5300 lt channel ext gt lt dstchannel ext gt 5301 lt dstchannel ext gt lt service gt s lt service gt lt cdr gt lt root gt cdr Acctld 62 accountcode src 5300 dst 5301 dcontext from internal clid on01 lt 5300 gt channel SIP 5300 00000000 dstchannel SIP 5301 00000001 lastapp Dial lastdata SIP 5301 60 start 2013 12 03 11 46 40 answer 2013 12 03 11 46 43 end 2013 12 03 11 46 49 duration 9 billsec 6 disposition ANSWERED amaflags DOCUMENTATION uniqueid 1386092800 0 userfield EXT channel ext 5300 dstchannel ext 5301 service s Acctld 63 accountcode src 5300 dst 5301 dcontext from internal clid on01 lt 5300 gt channel SIP 5300 00000000 dstchannel SIP 5301 00000001 lastapp Dial lastdata SIP 5301 60 start 2013 12 03 14 01 41 answer 2013 12 03 14 01 43 end 2013 12 03 14 01 46 duration 5 billsec 3 disposition ANSWERED amaflags DOCUMENTATION uniqueid 1386100901 0 userfield EXT channel ext 5300 dstchannel ext 5301 service s Acctld 64 accountcode src 5300 dst 5301 dcontext from internal clid on01 lt
317. t setting is Ring All Select the Music On Hold class for the call queue Note Music On Hold classes can be managed from web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Music On Hold Configure whether the callers will be disconnected from the queue or not if the queue has no agent anymore The default setting is Strict e Yes Callers will be disconnected from the queue if all agents are paused or invalid e No Never disconnect the callers from the queue when the queue is empty e Strict Callers will be disconnected from the queue if all agents are paused invalid or unavailable Configure whether the callers can dial into a call queue if the queue has no agent The default setting is No e Yes Callers can always dial into a call queue e No Callers cannot dial into a queue if all agents are paused or invalid e Strict Callers cannot dial into a queue if the agents are paused invalid or unavailable Assign permission level to the user The available permissions are Internal Local National and International from the lowest level to the highest level The default setting is Internal If enabled the configured PIN number is required for dynamic agent to log in The default setting is disabled Configure the number of seconds an agent will ring before the call goes to the next agent The default setting is 15 seconds Configure the number of seconds before a new call can ring the queue after the last call o
318. t setting is 1000ms When Enable Qualify option is set to Yes configure the interval in seconds of the SIP OPTIONS message sent to the device to check if the device is still online The default setting is 60 seconds The maximum number of concurrent calls using the trunk The default settings 0 which means no limite Select Fax mode The default setting is None e None Disable Fax e Fax Detect Fax signal from the user trunk during the call can be detected and the received Fax will be sent to the Email address configured for this extension If no Email address can be found for the user the Fax will be sent to the default Email address configured in Fax setting page under web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Fax T 38 Enable SRTP for the VoIP trunk The default setting is No If enabled the local UCM6510 will automatically provide and update the local LDAP contacts to the remote UCM6510 SIP peer trunk In order to ensure successful synchronization the remote UCM6510 peer also needs to enable this option on the SIP peer trunk The default setting is No This is the password used for LDAP contact file encryption and decryption UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 169 of 317 Sync LDAP Port LDAP Outbound Rule LDAP Dialed Prefix lt GRANDSTREAM during the LDAP sync process The password must be the same on both UCM6510 peers to ensure successful synchronization Configure the TCP port used LDAP sync featur
319. te DISA call queue and conference requires non repetitive and non sequential digits with a minimum length of 4 digits Repetitive digits pattern Such Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 257 of 317 Enable Random Password Disable Extension Range Extension Ranges Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM as 0000 1111 1234 2345 and etc or common digits pattern Such as 111222 321321 and etc are not allowed to be configured as password 2 Password for extension registration web GUI admin login LDAP and LDAP sync requires alphanumeric characters containing at least two categories of the following with a minimum length of 4 characters Numeric digits Lowercase alphabet characters Uppercase alphabet characters Special characters If enabled random password will be generated when the extension is created The default setting is Yes It is recommended to enable it for security purpose If set to Yes users could disable the extension range pre configured configured on the UCM6510 The default setting is No The default extension range assignment is shown in Extension Ranges below Note lt is recommended to keep the system assignment to avoid inappropriate usage and unnecessary issues The default extension range assignment is e User Extensions 1000 6299 User Extensions is referring to the extensions created under web Ul gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions page e
320. tensions with similar or different configurations quickly 1 Export extension csv file from the UCM6510 by clicking on Export Extensions button Fill up the extension information you would like in the exported csv template Click on Import Extensions button The following dialog will be prompted Import Extensions Import Options On Duplicate Extension Skip sw Delete and Recreate Update Information Extension File Figure 77 Export Extensions 4 Select the option in On Duplicate Extension to define how the duplicate extension s in the imported csv file should be treated by the PBX Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 133 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L e Skip Duplicate extensions in the csv file will be skipped The PBX will keep the current extension information as previously configured without change e Delete and Recreate The current extension previously configured will be deleted and the duplicate extension in the csv file will be loaded to the PBX e Update Information The current extension previously configured in the PBX will be kept However if the duplicate extension in the csv file has different configuration for any options it will override the configuration for those options in the extension 5 Click on to select csv file from local directory in the PC for uploading 6 Click on Save to import the csv file 7 Click on Apply Changes to apply th
321. ternal Refresh External TCP Port External TLS Port Local Network Address Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 SRANDSTREAM client The default setting is Yes This is the CA certificate if the TLS server being connected to requires self signed certificate including server s public key This file will be renames as TLS ca automatically Note The size of the uploaded ca file must be under 2MB This is the Certificate file pem format only used for TLS connections It contains private key for client and signed certificate for the server This file will be renamed as TLS pem automatically Note The size of the uploaded certificate file must be under 2MB This file must be named with the CA subject name hash value It contains CA s Certificate Authority public key which is used to verify the accessed servers Note The size of the uploaded CA certificate file must be under 2MB Display a list of files under the CA Cert directory Table 93 SIP Settings NAT Configure a static address and port optional that will be used in outbound SIP messages if the UCM6510 is behind NAT If it s a hostname it will only be looked up once Specify an external host name which is similar to External Address except the host name will be looked up periodically based on the External Refresh interval Configure the refresh interval for the external host if used The default setting is 10 Configure the externally mapped TCP
322. the CDR data matching given parameters as configured on the third party application Before accessing the API the administrators need enable API and configure the access authentication information on the UCM6510 first Enable TLS Bind Address TLS Private Key TLS Cert TLS Authentication Name TLS Authentication Password Permitted Table 107 CDR API Configuration Files Enable Disable CDR API The default setting is disabled Configure the IP address for TLS server to bind to 0 0 0 0 means binding to all interfaces The port number is optional and the default port number is 8443 The IP address must match the common name host name in the certificate so that the TLS socket won t bind to multiple IP addresses The default setting is 0 0 0 0 8443 Upload TLS private key The size of the key file must be under 2MB This file will be renamed as private pem automatically Upload TLS cert The size of the certificate must be under 2MB This is the certificate file pem format only for TLS connection This file will be renamed as certificate oem automatically It contains private key for the client and signed certificate for the server Configure the user name for TLS authentication If not configured authentication will be skipped Configure the password for TLS authentication This is optional Specify a list of IP addresses permitted by CDR API This creates an AIP specific access control list Multiple entries are
323. the device after receiving the device s request This feature is for the GXP series phones that Enable Pick Extension l _ l support selecting extension to be provisioned via phone s LCD The default setting is disabled Click on the link Pick Extension Segment to specify the extension list to be sent to the device The default range is 4000 to 4999 Pick Extension Pick Extension Segment Segment range can be defined in web Ul gt PBX gt Internal Options gt General page gt Extension Preference section Pick Extensions l l Specify the number of minutes to allow the phones being provisioned to Pick Extension Period hour l l pick extensions Please make sure an extension is manually assigned to the phone or Automatically Assign Extension is enabled during provisioning After the configuration on the UCM6510 web GUI click on Save and Apply Changes Once the phone boots up and picks up the config file from the UCM6510 it will take the configuration right away DISCOVERY Users could manually discover the device by specifying the IP address or scanning the entire LAN network Three methods are supported to scan the devices e PING e ARP e SIP Message NOTIFY Click on Auto Discover under web GUI gt PBX gt Zero Config gt Zero Config fill in the Scan Method and Scan IP The IP address segment will be automatically filled in based on the network mask detected on the UCM6510 I
324. the voicemail is enabled for UCM6510 extensions the users can dial the voicemail access feature code by default 98 or 97 to access the extension s voicemail The users will be prompt to enter the voicemail password and then can enter digits from the phone keypad to navigate in the IVR menu for different options Table 69 Voicemail IVR Menu Main Menu Sub Menu 1 3 Advanced options 1 New 5 Repeat the current message messages 7 Delete this message 8 Forward the message to another user 9 Save Help Exit 0 New messages 1 Old messages 2 Change 2 Work messages folders 3 Family messages 4 Friend messages Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Sub Menu 2 1 Send a reply 2 Call the person who sent this message 3 Hear the message envelop 4 Leave a message Return to the main menu Page 202 of 317 GRANDSTREAM Cancel 1 Send a reply g 2 Call the person who sent this message Advanced 3 Hear the message envelop options 4 Leave a message Return to the main menu 1 Accept this recording 1 Record your unavailable message 2 Listen to it 3 Re record your message 1 Accept this recording 2 Record your busy message 2 Listen to it 3 Re record your message 0 Mailbox 1 Accept this recording options 3 Record your name 2 Listen to it 3 Re record your message 1 Accept this recording 4 Record temporary gree
325. ting 2 Listen to it 3 Re record your message 5 Change your password Return to the main menu VOICEMAIL EMAIL SETTINGS The UCM6510 can be configured to send the voicemail as attachment to Email Click on Voicemail Email Settings button to configure the Email attributes and content Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 203 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Voicemail Email Settings Gi Attach Recordings to E mail G Keep Recordings Template for Voicemail Emails Template Variables Subject Message t TAB VM NAME Recipients firstname and lastname HVM DUR The duration of the voicemail message SM MAILBOX The recipients extension HVM CALLERID The caller ID ofthe person who has left the message SM MS8GNUM The message number in the mailbox HVM DATE The date and time when the message was left New voicemail FROM VM_CALLERID for VM MAILBOX Hello HVM NAME you received a message lasting HVM DUR at VM DATE FROM VM CALLERID This is message SM MSGNUNM in your voicemail Inbox Load Default Settings Figure 108 Voicemail Email Settings Click on Load Default Settings button to view the default template as an example Table 70 Voicemail Email Settings If enabled voicemails will be sent to user s Email address The default Attach Recordings to E Mail Keep Recordings setting is Yes If enabled voicemail will be stored in the UCM
326. ting is 60 Configure the Music On Hold class for the channel when being put on hold This is used when the Music On Hold class is not set on the channel and the peer channel placing the call on hold doesn t have Music On Hold Suggest Configure the Music On Hold class to suggest to the peer channel when placing the peer on hold Select to enable relaxed DTMF handling The default setting is No Select DIMF mode to send DTMF The default setting is RFC2833 If Info is selected SIP INFO message will be used If Inband is selected 64 kbit codec PCMU and PCMA are required When Auto is selected RFC2833 will be used if offered otherwise Inband will be used The default setting is RFC2833 During an active call if there is no RIP activity within the timeout in seconds the call will be terminated The default setting is no timeout Note This setting doesn t apply to calls on hold When the call is on hold if there is no RTP activity within the timeout in seconds the call will be terminated This value of RIP Hold Timeout should be larger than RTP Timeout The default setting is no timeout Configure whether the Remote Party ID should be trusted The default UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 267 of 317 Send Remote Party ID Generate In Band Ringing Server User Agent Send Compact SIP Headers Add user phone to URI Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 gt GRANDSTREAM setting is No Configure whether the
327. tings gt Static Routes rrrrrnnnrrnnannnrnrnnnnrrnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnrnnnnennnnnnrennnnnrennnnenennnnn 51 Table 11 UCM6510 Network Settings gt Port Forwarding ccccccsseccecceseceeceeeeeeceeeeeeeceeeceesseeeesseneeessenes 53 Table 12 UCM6510 Firewall gt Static Defense gt Current Service rrrrrrrrnrnnnnnrrrrrnnnnrvrnvrnnnnnrrnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnsnee 56 Table 13 Typical Firewall Settings sessiossa E e A a r EEEa 57 Table 14 Firewall Rule Settings ccccccccsecccccessceeceeseceeeeeeceeceeeceeseeeeceeseeeceeseueeeesseaecesseeeeeessaeeessaeeeesaees 58 Table 15 UCM6510 Firewall Dynamic Defense rrrrrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnnnnnnennnnnnrennnnnnennnnnnsennnnnsennnnsnnnnnn 59 Table 16 FaRB n Settings save RS ededende 60 Table 17 HTTP Server Settings rrrrnrnnnnerrnnnnrrrnannrrrrnnnnernnnnnrnnnannrrnnnnssennnnnseennnnssennnnesennnnnnsennnnnennnnsnsnnnnn 69 TETEN nende 69 eve VNR 71 Table 20 Create New Office Time rrrrnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrrnnnnnnernnnnnrnnnannrennnnenrnnnnnsennnnnssennnnesennnannsennnnnsennnnsssnnnnn 74 Table 21 Create New Holiday ccccccccccccssseceeceeceeceeeceeeeeeeeeceeceesseeeeeeseaeeeessaaeeesseueeesssaeceessaeeeessageeessaaes 75 Table 22 Auto Provision Settings cccccccsecccccessceeceesececeeeeeeeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeceessueeeesseaeceessaeeesseneeesseneeessaees 84 Table 23 Global Policy Parameters Localization rrrrrnnrrrrnnnnnorrnnnnrrrnnnnrnnnnnnre
328. to l answer incoming calls after a short reminding beep based on the SIP Auto Answer by Call info Call Info header sent from the server proxy The default setting is enabled NAT Traversal Configure if NAT traversal mechanism is activated If set to Yes this parameter will force random generation of both the local User Random Port SIP and RTP ports Configure call progress tones including ring tone dial tone second dial tone message waiting tone ring back tone call waiting tone busy tone and reorder tone using the following syntax f1 val f2 val c 0n1 off1 on2 off2 on3 off3 Call Progress Tones e Frequencies are in Hz and cadence on and off are in 10ms e on is the period in ms of ringing while off is the period of silence Up to three cadences are supported e Please refer to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details Select Default Mode or Toggle Headset Speaker for the Headset key HEADSET Key Mode Please refer to user manual of the SIP devices to be provisioned for more details Table 25 Global Policy Parameters Contact List Select Manual or PBX as the LDAP configuration source e f Manual is selected the LDAP configuration below will be applied to Source the SIP end device e lf PBX is selected the LDAP configuration built in from UCM6510 web Ul gt Settings gt LDAP Server will be applied Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM65
329. to 3 fields can be displayed Example e cn sn telephoneNumber Specify the maximum number of results to be returned by the LDAP server Valid range is 1 to 3000 The default value is 50 Specify the interval in seconds for the server to process the request and client waits for server to return Valid range is 0 to 180 The default value is 30 Specify whether the searching result is sorted or not The default setting is No Configure to enable LDAP number searching when receiving calls The default setting is No Configure to enable LDAP number searching when making calls The default setting is No UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 89 of 317 Lookup Display Name Phonebook XML Server Phonebook Download Interval Remove manually edited entries on download Firmware Source Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 GRANDSTREAM Configures the display name when LDAP looks up the name for incoming call or outgoing call It must be a subset of the LDAP Name Attributes Select the source of the phonebook XML server e Disable Disable phonebook XML downloading e Manual Once selected users need specify downloading protocol HTTP HTTPS or TFTP and the server path to download the phonebook XML file The server path could be IP address or URL with up to 256 characters e Local UCM Server Once selected click on the Server Path field to upload the phonebook XML file Please note after uploading the phonebook XML file to the server th
330. to Record Figure 114 Ring Group Remote Extension Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 211 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 212 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L PAGING AND INTERCOM GROUP Paging and Intercom Group can be used to make an announcement over the speaker on a group of phones Targeted phones will not ring but answer immediately using speaker The UCM6510 paging and intercom can be used via feature code to a single extension or a paging intercom group This sections describes the configuration oof paging intercom group under web GUIl gt PBX gt Call Features gt Paging Intercom CONFIGURE PAGING INTERCOM GROUP e Click on Create New Paging Intercom Group to add paging intercom group Create New Paging ntercom Group Name shipping Extension 6770 Type 2 Way Intercom Available Extensions Paging Intercom Group Members Name Extension Type Custom Prompt Page Intercom Group Members Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 670 ri 672 Figure 115 Paging Intercom Group Table 73 Paging Intercom Group Configuration Parameters Configure paging intercom group name Configure the paging intercom group extension Select 2 way Intercom or 1 way Page This option is setting a custom prompt used as announcement placed to the person receiving a paging internal call The file
331. to join it into the conference Invitation Participants Extension Figure 100 Conference Invitation From web GUI e Invite by dialing 0 or 1 during conference call A conference participant can invite other parties to the conference by dialing from the phone during the conference call Please make sure option Enable User Invite is turned on for the conference bridge first Enter 0 or 1 during the conference call Follow the voice prompt to input the number of the party you would like to invite A call will be sent to this number to join it into the conference 0 If O is entered to invite other party once the invited party picks up the invitation call a permission will be asked to accept or reject the invitation before joining the conference 1 If 1 is entered to invite other party no permission will be required from the invited party A Note Conference administrator can always invite other parties from the phone during the call by entering 0 or 1 To join a conference bridge as administrator enter the admin password when joining the conference A conference bridge can have multiple administrators Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 189 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD DURING THE CONFERENCE During the conference call users can manage the conference from web GUI or IVR e Manage the conference call from web GUI Log in UCM6510 web GUI during the conference call the participants in
332. ts Settings Network Maintenance Phonebook 7 Version 1 0 4 16 Co Network Status Status Network Status MAC Address 00 0B 82 59 A9 8D se IP Setting OKP IPv4 Address 192 168 2 100 IPv6 Address 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 2 1 DNS Server 1 8 8 8 8 DNS Server 2 208 67 222 222 PPPoE Link Up Disabled Figure 25 GXP2160 Web Access Using UCM6510 Port Forwarding Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 54 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD DDNS SETTINGS DDNS setting allows user to access UCM6510 via domain name instead of IP address The UCM6510 supports DDNS service from the following DDNS provider dydns org noip com freedns afraid org zoneedit com oray net Here is an example of using noip com for DDNS Register domain in DDNS service provider Please note the UCM6510 needs to have public IP access Hostname Information haograndstream ddns net DNS Host A DNS Host Round Robin DNS Alias CNAME Port 80 Redirect Web Redirect IP Address 1754 Last Update 2015 01 07 17 29 20 PST Assign to Group No Group 7 W Configure Groups Enable Wildcard Wildcards are a Plus Enhanced feature Upgrade Now Advanced Records TXT SPF and SRV records and the use of some special clients are Plus Enhancedfeatures amp Upgrade now to use them Figure 26 Register Domain Name on noip com 2 On web Ul gt Settings gt Networ
333. tus Data Channel Always shows blue square D Channel Always shows grey with channel number in blue Other operations are also available in interface status section e Click on to refresh the Digital Channels status e Click on to expand the Digital Channels Status details e Click on to hide the Digital Channels Status details PARKING LOT The UCM6510 supports call park using feature code When there is call being parked this section will display the parking lot status Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 280 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Parking Lot gt Caller ID SIP 6070 00000050 SIP 6005 00000052 Figure 154 Parking Lot Status Table 102 Parking Lot Status Caller ID Display the caller ID who parks the call Channel Display channel for the call park Extension Display the parking lot number where the call is parked retrieved Display timeout in seconds for the parked call The status page will Timeout dynamically update this timer from 120 seconds default to 0 When the timer reaches 0 the caller who parks the call will be called back Other operations are also available in parking lot status section e Click on Parking Lot the web page will redirect to feature codes page which can also be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Feature Codes e Click on G to refresh the parking lot status e Click on to expand th
334. uage English Delete Check Prompt List Figure 107 New Voice Prompt Language Added A new language option will be displayed after successfully installed Users then could select it to apply in the UCM6510 system voice prompt or delete it from the UCM6510 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 199 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING eS Wo eto This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 200 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM VOICEMAIL CONFIGURE VOICEMAIL If the voicemail is enabled for UCM6510 extensions the configurations of the voicemail can be globally set up and managed under web GUI gt PBX gt Call Features gt Voicemail Table 68 Voicemail Settings Vee Configure the maximum number of seconds for the voicemail greeting The ax Greetin default setting is 60 seconds If enabled the caller can press 0 to exit the voicemail application and Dial 0 For Operator connect to the configured operator s extension The operator extension can be configured under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt General Configure the maximum number of messages per folder in users Max Messages Per Folder ee voicemail The valid range 10 to 1000 The default setting is 50 Select the maximum duration of the voicemail message The message will not be recorded if the duration exceeds the max message time The default setting is 15 minutes The available options are e 1
335. uage settings for voice prompt can be accessed under web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt Language DOWNLOAD AND INSTALL VOICE PROMPT PACKAGE To download and install voice prompt package in different languages from UCM6510 web GUI click on Check Prompt List button Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 197 of 317 Language Settings Upload Voice Prompt Package T Choose Voice Prompt to Upload Voice Prompt Package List Language E En gl ish RH GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Check Prompt List Figure 105 Language Settings for Voice Prompt A new dialog window of voice prompt package list will be displayed Users can see the version number latest version available V S current installed version package size and options to upgrade or download the language Voice Prompt Package List British English Deutsch English Espa ol EMnvik Francais Italiano Nederlands Polski Portugu s PYCCEHA Svenska T rk e nay iy yl Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 3 7M Figure 106 Voice Prompt Package List UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 198 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Click on to download the language to the UCM6510 The installation will be automatically started once the downloading is finished Language Settings Upload Voice Frompt Package Choose Voice Prompt to as Upload Upload Voice Prompt Package List D Lang
336. ue ring group paging intercom group IVR voicemail groups and Fax extension as configured in DID destination If the dialed number matches the DID pattern the call will be allowed to go through Configure the number of digits to be stripped in Strip option Dial By Name INBOUND ROUTE PREPEND EXAMPLE UCM6510 now allows user to prepend digits to an inbound DID pattern with strip taking precedence over prepend With the ability to prepend digits in inbound route DID pattern user no longer needs to create multiple routes for the same trunk in order to route calls to different extensions Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 184 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Edit Inbound Rule GJ DID Pattern G Privilege Level Internal G Default Destination By DID G Strip 0 G Prepend Trunk Name GJ Dial Trunk Figure 98 Inbound Route feature Prepend The following example demonstrates the process 1 2 3 If Trunk provides a DID pattern of 18005251163 If Strip is set to 8 UCM6510 will strip the first 8 digits If Prepend is set to 2 UCM6510 will then prepend a 2 to the stripped number now the number become 2163 UCM6510 will now forward the incoming call to extension 2163 BLACKLIST CONFIGURATIONS In the UCM6510 Blacklist is supported for all inbound routes Users could enable the Blacklist feature manage the Blacklist by clicking on Blacklist Blacklist The blac
337. umber for example dial 1002 on phone 1 or dial 1005 on phone 2 to hear the dial tone Then the users could dial external number for the outbound call e Making an outbound call from the station extension using BLF key When the extension is in idle state pressing the MPK and users could dial external numbers directly e Answering call using LINE key When the station is ringing pressing the LINE key to answer the incoming call e Barging in active call using BLF key When there is an active call between an SLA station and an external number using the SLA trunk other SLA stations monitoring the same trunk could join the call by pressing the BLF key if Barge Allowed is enabled for the analog trunk e Hold Unhold using BLF key If the external line is previously put on hold by an SLA station another station that monitors the same SLA trunk could unhold the call by pressing the BLF key if Hold Access is set to open on the analog trunk and the SLA station Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 177 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 178 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CALL ROUTES OUTBOUND ROUTES In the UCM6510 an outgoing calling rule pairs an extension pattern with a trunk used to dial the pattern This allows different patterns to be dialed through different trunks e g Local 7 digit dials t
338. use this rule when making outbound Password calls i a Once call duration limit is enabled it will set the maximum duration of Call Duration Limit call blocking Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 179 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L User can customize the maximum call duration in seconds that is allowed The Maximum call duration for the outbound call By default this value is set to 0 means there is no limit for the call duration This option will give caller warning when call duration is approaching to its Warning Time limit If the warning time is set to y the warning tone will be played to caller when y seconds is left to end the call by UCM Once this option is set to z it will repeatedly warning caller every z Warning Repeat Interval l l seconds after the first warning Select privilege level for the outbound rule Internal The lowest level required All users can use this rule e Local Users with Local National or International level are allowed to use this rule e National Users with National or International level are allowed to use i this rule Privilege Level a e International The highest level required Only users with international level can use this rule The default setting is Disable Please be aware of the potential security risks when using Internal level which means all users can use this outbound rule to dial out from the trunk When enabled users c
339. usic on hold class and upload music files The default Music On Hold class already has 5 audio files defined for users to use Manage Music On Hold Create New MOH Class k Music On Hold Classes defaut gt M Upload an KHz Mono Music file file size under 5M Choose file to upload as Upload List of Sound Files macroform cold_day wav macroform robot_dity wav macroform the_simplicity wav manolo_camp morming_coffee wav reno_project system wav Figure 123 Music On Hold Default Class e Click on Create New MOH Class to add a new Music On Hold class e Clickon to configure the MOH class sort method to be Alpha or Random for the sound files I e Clickon next to the selected Music On Hold class to delete this Music On Hold class cs e Click on _ to select music file from local PC and click on t to start uploading The music file uploaded has to be 16 bit 8 KHz Mono in wav format with size smaller than 5M en e Clickon I next to the sound file to delete it from the selected Music On Hold Class Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 223 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L In case the users have deleted the system MOH files there are two ways to recover 1 Users could download the MOH file from this link After downloading unzip the pack and upload the music files to the UCM6510 2 Factory reset could also recover the MOH file on the UCM Firmware Versi
340. ut from the PBX s trunk or not The default setting is disabled Please be aware of potential security risk if Dial Trunk is enabled The inbound call might be able to dial out international calls from the PBX s trunk if allowed by the privilege level Select the DID destination if By DID is selected in Default Destination Only the selected category can be reached by DID using this inbound route e Extension e Conference e Call Queue e Ring Group e Paging Intercom Group e IVR e Voicemail Groups e Fax Extension e Dial By Name When present in an INVITE request the Alert Info header field specifies an alternative ring tone to the UAS UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 183 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Time Condition Start Time Select the start time hour minute for the trunk to use the inbound rule End Time Select the end time hour minute for the trunk to use the inbound rule Date Select By Week or By Day and specify the date for the trunk to use the inbound rule Week Select the day in the week to use the inbound rule Select the destination for the inbound call under the defined time condition e Extension e Voicemail e Conference Room e Call Queue e Ring Group e Paging Intercom e Voicemail Group e Fax feat e DISA Destination e IVR e By DID When By DID is used the UCM6510 will look for the destination based on the number dialed which could be local extensions conference call que
341. vailable Extensions list Users have the option of selecting more than one extension In this case Company ABC would select the CEO s extension After making the selection click on the button to move the extension s to the Selected Extensions list Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 173 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD Edit DOD Direct Outward Dialing DOD is a service of a local phone company or local exchange carrier that allows subscribers within a company s PBX system to connect to outside lines directly DOD Number 88861711234 Available Extensions Selected Extensions Figure 91 DOD extension selection 6 Click Save at the bottom Once completed the user will return to the Edit DOD page that shows all the extensions that are associated to a particular DOD Edit DOD Direct Outward Dialing DOD is a service of a local phone company or local exchange carrier that allows subscribers within a company s PBA system to connect to outside lines directly Create a new DOD Edit DOD 6176516241 5002 4451234567 5005 Total 2 Show 1 1 Go to ER Figure 92 Edit DOD Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 174 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD SLA STATION UCM6510 supports SLA that allows mapping the key with LED on a multi line phone to different external lines When there is an incoming call and the phone starts to ring the LED on the key
342. web Ul gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Outbound Routes and Inbound Routes to configure outbound and inbound rule for the digital trunk DIGITAL HARDWARE CONFIGURATION Go to web GUI gt PBX gt Ports Config gt Digital Hardware page and configure the following PBX gt gt Ports Config gt gt Digital Hardware GS Digital Hardware Group Name DefaultGroup1 Figure 87 Digital Hardware Configuration e Step 1 Click on to edit digital ports Please see configuration parameters in the tables below e Step 2 Click on to edit group This assigns channels to be used for the digital port For E1 30 B channels can be assigned to the default group for T1 J1 23 B channels can be assigned to the default group e Step 3 If fewer than 30 B channels for E1 or 23 B channels for T1 J1 are assigned in default group users can click on to add more groups This is not necessary in most cases and only default Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 147 of 317 group is needed A Note GRANDSTREAM CONNE TING THE WORLD Currently the group configuration in digit trunks settings is to manage outbound routes only It doesn t control inbound routes Therefore if the users have configured multiple groups for the digital trunk please make sure the inbound routes for those groups have the same inbound rule configured Otherwise inbound call using the digital trunk might not work properly The UCM6510 curre
343. whether the clock signal from the far end of the E1 T1 J1 is used as the master source of clock timing If the far end is used as the master the PBX system clock will synchronize to it e Master The port will never be used as a source of timing This is appropriate when you know the far end should always be a slave to you e Slave The equipment at the far end of the E1 T1 link is the preferred source of the master clock Select ITU ANSI or CHINA Originating point code is used to identify the node originating the message always provided by the operator ISP e ITU Format decimal number e ANSI amp CHINA Format decimal number or XXX XXX XXX Destination point code is the address to send the message to always be provided by the operator ISP e ITU Format decimal number e ANSI amp CHINA Format decimal number or XXX XXX XXX When Span Type is E1 ITU amp CHINA Range 0 4065 ANSI Range 0 16353 When Span Type is T1 J1 ITU amp CHINA Range 0 4072 ANSI Range 0 16360 If set to yes D channel will be assigned a CIC Else D channel will not be assigned By default it is set to No Network Indicator NI should match in nodes otherwise it might cause issues Users can select National National Spare International or International Spare Usually National or International is used UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 150 of 317 LBO RX Gain TX Gain Codec GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE
344. with the Can Reinvite endpoints to route the media stream directly It is not always possible for the UCM6510 to negotiate endpoint to endpoint media routing The default setting is No Select DIMF mode for the user to send DTMF The default setting is RFC2833 If Info is selected SIP INFO message will be used If DTMF Mode Inband is selected 64 kbit PCMU and PCMA are required When Auto is selected RFC2833 will be used if offered otherwise Inband will be used e Port Allow peers matching by IP address without matching port number Insecure e Very Allow peers matching by IP address without matching port number Also authentication of incoming INVITE messages is not required Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 113 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM WORLO e No Normal IP based peers matching and authentication of incoming INVITE The default setting is Port If enabled empty SDP packet will be sent to the SIP server periodically to Enable Keep alive eee keep the NAT port open The default setting is Yes Configure the Keep alive interval in seconds to check if the host is up Keep alive Frequenc P q y The default setting is 60 seconds If the end device phone has an assigned PSTN telephone number this field should be set to User Phone Then a User Phone parameter will TEL URI be attached to the Request Line and TO header in the SIP request to indicate th
345. xtension status in this section Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 274 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L Extensions 3 All Analog IAX SIP 1000 GXP2140 1001 HT701 1005 1002 1003 1004 Total 6 Show 1 4 Goto ED Figure 150 Extension Status Table 98 Extension Status Display extension number including feature code The color indicator has the following definitions au Green Free og Blue Ringing Yellow In Use Grey Unavailable Status Extension Display the extension number Name Label Display name callerID name or label for the extension Display message status for the extension Example 2 4 1 Message te Description There are 2 urgent messages 4 messages in total and 1 message that has been already read Displays extension type e SIP User Type e AX User e Analog User FXS e Features Other operations are also available in extension status section e Click on Extensions the web page will redirect to extension configuration page which can also be accessed via web GUI gt PBX gt Basic Call Routes gt Extensions e Click on O to refresh the extension status e Click on one of the tabs All Analog Features IAX SIP to display the corresponding extensions accordingly e Click on to expand the status detail table Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 275 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD
346. y a time zone offset above three formats replace in time zone offset with 2B see http www w3 org TR NOTE datetime HH MM HH MM SS HH MM SS SSS NOW DDDDDDDDDD minDur Filters based on the billsec value the duration between Number duration in seconds call answer and call end maxDur Example Queries The following illustrates the format of queries to accomplish certain requests In most cases multiple different queries will accomplish the same goal and these examples are not intended to be exhaustive but rather to bring attention to particular features of the CDR API connector Query 1 Request all records of calls placed on extension 5300 which last between 8 and 60 seconds inclusive with results in CSV format https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi format CSV amp caller 5300 amp minDur 8 amp maxDur 60 OR https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi caller 5300 amp minDur 8 amp maxDur 60 Query 2 Request all records of calls placed on extension 5300 or in the range 6300 6399 to extensions Starting with 5 with results in XML format https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi format XML amp caller 5300 6300 6399 amp callee 5 Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 296 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM OR https 192 168 254 200 8088 cdrapi cdrapi format XML amp caller 5300 amp caller 6300 6399 amp callee 5Q Query 3 Request all records of calls placed on extensions containing substring 53 prior to
347. y the ring group Letters digits _ and Ring Group Name are allowed Extension Configure the ring group extension Select available users from the left side to the ring group member list on the right side Click on A 5 Ga KA to arrange the order Select the ring strategy The default setting is Ring in order Ring Group Members e Ring simultaneously Ring all the members at the same time when there is incoming call to the ring group extension If any of the member answers the call it will Ring Strategy stop ringing e Ring in order Ring the members with the order configured in ring group list If the first member doesn t answer the call it will stop ringing the first member and start ringing the second member Assign permission level to the user The available permissions are Permission Internal Local National and International from the lowest level to the highest level The default setting is Internal Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 207 of 317 Custom Prompt Ring Timeout on Each Member Auto Record Enable Destination Secret Email Address Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 5 GRANDSTREAM This option allows user to customize prompt for a ring group to announce to caller The file can be uploaded from web GUI gt Internal Options gt Custom Prompt or click the Prompt to add additional record Configure the number of seconds to ring each member If set to 0 it will keep
348. y to the global policy Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 93 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD when it comes to the same setting option field If the same option field has different value configured in the global policy and the selected global template the value for this option field in the selected global template will override the value in global policy e Click on Create New Template to add a global template Users will see the following configurations Table 29 Create New Template Template Name Create a name to identify this global template Description Provide a description for the global template This is optional Active Check this option to enable the global template I e Clickon to edit the global template The window for editing global template is shown in the following figure In the Options field after entering the option name key word the options containing the key word will be listed Users could then select the options to be modified and click on Add Option to add it into the global template Edit Template temp1 Gi Template Name G Description Gi Active Options Add Option Localization Language Settings G Language English Phone Settings Default Call Settings Gi Dial Plan x x xx x Figure 59 Edit Global Template Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 94 of 317 gt GRANDSTREAM The added options wi
349. y useful when the system admin tries to track the state of a telephony client inside Asterisk User could configure AMI parameters on UCM6510 web GUI gt PBX gt Internal Options gt AMI For details on how to use AMI on UCM6510 please refer to the following AMI guide http www grandstream com products ucm series ucm61xx documents ucm6100 ami guide pdf A Warning Please do not enable AMI on the UCM6510 if it is placed on a public or untrusted network unless you have taken steps to protect the device from unauthorized access It is crucial to understand that AMI access can allow AMI user to originate calls and the data exchanged via AMI is often very sensitive and private for your UCM6510 system Please be cautious when enabling AMI access on the UCM6510 and restrict the permission granted to the AMI user By using AMI on UCM6510 you agree you understand and acknowledge the risks associated with this Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 229 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE Wr Ga Pe ae e This page intentionally left blank Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 230 of 317 GRANDSTREAM CONNECTING THE WORLD FOLLOW ME Follow Me is a feature on the UCM6510 that allows users to direct calls to other phone numbers and have them ring all at once or one after the other Calls can be directed to users home phone office phone mobile and etc The calls will get to the user no matter where they are
350. yslog information The default syslog level for all modules is error which is recommended in your UCM6510 settings because it can be helpful to locate the issues when errors happen Some typical modules for UCM6510 functions are as follows and users can turn on notic and verb levels besides error level pbx This module is related to general PBX functions chan_sip This module is related to SIP calls chan_dahdi This module is related to analog calls FXO FXS app meetme This module is related to Conference Bridge A Note Syslog is usually for debugging and troubleshooting purpose Turning on all levels for all syslog modules is not recommended for daily usage Too many syslog print might cause traffic and affect system performance Firmware Version 1 0 2 7 UCM6510 IP PBX User Manual Page 310 of 317 lt GRANDSTREAM L TROUBLESHOOTING On the UCM6510 users could capture traces ping remote host and traceroute remote host for troubleshooting purpose under web GUI gt Maintenance gt Troubleshooting ETHERNET CAPTURE The captured trace can be downloaded for analysis Also the instructions or result will be displayed in the web GUI output result Ethernet Capture G Interface Type LAN f l GJ Capture Filter host 192 168 40 178 Start Download Output Result capture Dignostic run Package capturing Done Click on Download to download the captured packages Figure 186 Ethernet Ca

UCM6510 User Manual - Grandstream Networks

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents